Operating instructions

Type Computer type Component type

CMS 530 642 OKC5.0 000
643
CMS 520 C 647 OKC5.0 000
CMS 502 645 OKC5.0 000
646

ID 268533 GB
Date: 2014-10-02
Translation of the original operating instructions
Operating system of the machine: V_OKC_002.008.000_STOLL (or higher)
H. STOLL GmbH & Co. KG, Stollweg 1, D-72760 Reutlingen, Germany
Our products are being developed further continuously. They are therefore subject to technical modifica-
tions.
End User Licence Contract (03/2001)
Licence terms in business transactions with entrepreneurs for the use of the STOLL software
Licenser: H. STOLL GmbH & Co. KG, Stollweg 1, D-72760 Reutlingen / Germany.
§1 Licensed object and scope of use
(1) The licenser grants the licensee a not exclusive right to use above-mentioned STOLL software according to the
following terms and conditions. The licenser shall provide the licensee with a copy of the object code for the
licensed programs. The licence material also includes a program description in printed form. In the following
text, the licensed programs and the program description are altogether referred to as "licensed software".
(2) The licensed software is only intended to be used with the STOLL knitting machine with which the software was
delivered and can only be run in connection with this knitting machine. Any other form of use of the licensed
software is not permitted.
(3) The approved use covers the storing of the licensed programs in one data-processing machine, the execution of
the programs, the processing of the data stock, as well as the production of copies of the programs to the extent
that this is required for contractual use. All rights to the copies shall remain with licenser.
(4) Additional usufructuary and exploitation rights of the licensee do not exist. The creation of back-up copies, the
testing and inspecting of the programs , the processing of the data stock as well as a decompiling are only
permissible if this must be imperatively permitted due to legal regulations.
(5) Licence material handed over in printed form, in particular the program description is only allowed to be
reproduced with the written consent of the licenser.
(6) After having informed the licenser previously in writing, the licensee is allowed to transfer his right of use
together with the knitting machine mentioned in Par. (2) in the scope and with the limited conditions resulting
from the Par. (1) to (5) entirely to a third party. These conditions must be expressly pointed out to the third party.
The transfer within the framework of continuous obligation (e.g. rental, leasing) is not permissible. With the
transfer, all the rights of use of the first licensee shall expire, including any rights to copies and adaptions. If
these were not handed over to third parties, they must be destroyed.
(7) Neither the licensee nor the subsequent user has the right to use licensed software in whole or in part on more
than one data-processing machine at the same time or distribute any reproduced sections of the licensed
software in its original version or in altered adapted versions.
§2 Period of use
The granting of the usufruct mentioned under § 1 is provided for an indefinite period of time for the entire
economic service life of the licensed software.
§3 Safeguarding of the licensed software
(1) The licensee must ensure that no form of improper use of the licensed software is carried out at his company
and that the obligations in accordance with § 1 are also observed by his employees and personnel as well as by
other persons working with the package.
(2) The licensee agrees not to change any protective annotations, such as copyright annotations or any other
reservations of rights and agrees to transfer completely into specifically made copies of the licensed software.
The licensee is only allowed to use the programs or program sections of other producers included in or related
to the licensed software if the licensee accepts the licence terms applicable for such use.
§4 Warranty
(1) The contracting parties are in agreement that, based on the present state of technology, it is not possible to
develop programs so that they run without any errors for all application conditions. For the licensed software, the
licenser shall hand over to the licensee a program description based on the most recent status in each case that
refers to the proper use and conditions of use for the programs. Specific characteristic features shall not be
guaranteed unless an agreement to the contrary is reached in individual cases.
(2) The licenser guarantees that the licensed software is usable within the meaning of the program description
issued by him and applicable at the time of delivery to the licensee; an irrelevant diminishment of the usability
shall not be taken into account. The licenser also guarantees that the data carrier being used is free of material
and manufacturing defects and that the data has been properly recorded on the data carrier. If the licensee
operates the licensed software in connection with hardware and software products that do not come from
STOLL, the licensee is obliged to furnish proof that a determined error has its cause in the licensed software.
(3) If the licensed software proves to be useless or defective within the meaning of Par. (2), the warranty is carried
out by replacement delivery versus the return of the defective software. If the software delivered on a
replacement basis also proves to be useless or defective and the licenser is not able to restore the usability or
eliminate the error within a suitable time limit, the licensee can demand, according to his choice, a reduction of
the licence fee or reimbursement of the licence fee versus the return of the licensed software.
(4) Any further warranty, in particular for guaranteeing that the data or the licensed software comply with the
requirements and purposes of the licensee shall be excluded.
(5) The warranty period amounts to twelve months, starting with the date of delivery of the licensed software to the
licensee.
§5 Liability limitations
(1) The licenser shall be liable for damages that were caused by a culpable infringement of an essential contractual
obligation, for which the licenser is responsible, in a manner endangering the achievement of the contractual
purpose. The liability is limited to the contract-typical damage the occurrence of which the licenser had to expect
based on the circumstances known to the licenser upon the conclusion of the contract. In any case, the liability
is limited to two times the amount of the licence fee paid by the licensee.
(2) In case of virus contamination, the licensee is responsible for providing proof that the licensed software was
contaminated with the virus.
(3) The licenser shall not be liable for insufficient economic success, lost profits, remote damages and
consequential damages and for damages from the claims of third parties with the exception of claims resulting
from the infringement of protective rights of third parties.
(4) For the recovery of data, licenser shall only be liable within the framework of Par. (1) and only if the licensee
stored this data in machine-readable form on a daily basis, the corresponding data carrier is available and the
data can be reproduced at reasonable expense.
(5) The aforementioned liability limitations do not apply to damages that have been proved to be based on
premeditation or gross negligence on the part of licenser or on the lack of guaranteed characteristics, as well as
to any claims based on the product liability law.
§6 Final provisions
(1) Alterations and supplements of this contract require the written form for their legal validity.
(2) Should any individual provisions of this licence terms be void or become void, the validity of the other provisions
shall remain unaffected. The void provision must be replaced by a lawful provision that comes as close as
possible to the economic purpose it is being used to pursue.
(3) This terms and the legal relations between the licenser and the licensee are subject to German law exclusively.
(4) Place of fulfilment and jurisdiction in business transactions with businessmen is D-Reutlingen / Germany.

Installation of the programs

The exact installation instructions for the software are contained in the manual.

Software license for Windows XP

The license number is located on the left or on the right control cabinet.

Fig. 1 Software license for Windows XP on the left control cabinet

Table of contents

1 About this document 12

1.1 Function of this document ................................................................................................. 12
1.2 Target groups of this document ........................................................................................ 12
1.3 Information in this document ............................................................................................. 13
1.4 Symbols in this document ................................................................................................. 14
1.5 Warnings in the documentation......................................................................................... 15

2 Description of knitting machine...................................................................... 17

2.1 Components of the knitting machine................................................................................. 18

2.1.1 Front side (CMS 530, CMS 520, CMS 520 C, CMS 502) * ......................................... 18

2.1.4 Lateral view (right) *..................................................................................................... 21

2.1.5 Rear side * ................................................................................................................... 22
2.2 Yarn guide......................................................................................................................... 23

2.2.1 Courses of yarn ........................................................................................................... 23

2.2.2 Yarn control unit........................................................................................................... 26
2.2.3 Lateral yarn guide *...................................................................................................... 27
2.2.4 Thread clamping and cutting device *.......................................................................... 29
2.2.5 Intarsia yarn carrier * ................................................................................................... 30
2.2.6 Plating yarn carriers * .................................................................................................. 31
2.3 Carriage assembly ............................................................................................................ 32

2.3.1 Drive, speed and operating path.................................................................................. 32

2.3.2 Suction and cleaning row............................................................................................. 32
2.3.3 Central lubrication........................................................................................................ 33
2.4 Knitting system.................................................................................................................. 34

2.4.1 Needle paths and design ............................................................................................. 34

2.4.2 Holding-down function ................................................................................................. 35
2.4.3 Step motor for adjusting the stitch tension................................................................... 36
2.5 Control devices ................................................................................................................. 37

2.5.1 Impulse sensor ............................................................................................................ 37

2.5.2 Stop resistance ............................................................................................................ 38
2.5.3 Shock stop ................................................................................................................... 38
2.5.4 Needle detector ........................................................................................................... 38
2.6 Needle beds ...................................................................................................................... 39

2.6.1 Structure ...................................................................................................................... 39

2.6.2 Racking device ............................................................................................................ 39
2.7 Fabric take-down............................................................................................................... 41

2.7.1 Main take-down ........................................................................................................... 41

2.7.2 Auxiliary take-down * ................................................................................................... 42
2.7.3 Comb take-down * ....................................................................................................... 43
2.7.5 Control devices (fabric take-down) .............................................................................. 44

5
 2.8 Display and operating elements........................................................................................ 45

2.8.1 Main switch .................................................................................................................. 45

2.8.2 Engaging rod ............................................................................................................... 46
2.8.3 Signal light ................................................................................................................... 48
2.8.4 Input unit ...................................................................................................................... 49
2.8.5 User Interface .............................................................................................................. 50

3 Producing with the knitting machine .............................................................. 59

3.1 Preparing production and shift changes............................................................................ 59

3.1.1 Loading files, libraries and pattern folders ................................................................... 59

3.1.2 Entering piece number or number of courses.............................................................. 64
3.1.3 Setting touch screen .................................................................................................... 65
3.2 Threading up yarn ............................................................................................................. 67

3.2.1 Calling up yarn carrier assignment and allocation ....................................................... 67

3.2.2 Putting up bobbins ....................................................................................................... 68
3.2.3 Threading threads through yarn guide bracket............................................................ 68
3.2.4 Threading threads through yarn control device ........................................................... 69
3.2.5 Thread the yarns through the yarn length measuring device * .................................... 69
3.2.6 Threading up threads into friction feed wheel * ........................................................... 70
3.2.7 Thread up the yarn into the permanent brake ............................................................. 71
3.2.8 Threading threads through safety door........................................................................ 72
3.2.9 Threading up yarns into yarn deflector (CMS 520 C, CMS 830 C).............................. 73
3.2.10 Threading up yarns into yarn carrier............................................................................ 74
3.3 Production ......................................................................................................................... 75

3.3.1 Starting machine.......................................................................................................... 75

3.3.2 Calling up report and shift counters ............................................................................. 78
3.3.3 Stopping machine ........................................................................................................ 85
3.3.4 Switch off machine at the end of work ......................................................................... 87
3.3.5 Monitoring the running time ......................................................................................... 89
3.3.6 Measuring the running time ......................................................................................... 94
3.4 Producing with knitting orders (order menu) ..................................................................... 96

3.4.1 Creating and managing order menu ............................................................................ 96

3.4.2 Setting or changing counters for order menu .............................................................. 98
3.4.3 Saving/loading order menu.......................................................................................... 99
3.5 Eliminating errors in the fabric........................................................................................... 101

3.5.1 Starting again after pressing off fabric ......................................................................... 101

3.5.2 Threading up thread into yarn carrier .......................................................................... 105
3.5.3 Removing fabric winding around fabric take-down ...................................................... 106

3.6 Starting the machine after a fault ...................................................................................... 107

3.6.1 Message and tip retrospective view............................................................................. 109

3.6.2 Suppressing error messages....................................................................................... 111

6
4 Adjusting knitting machine............................................................................. 110
4.1 Basic settings .................................................................................................................... 110

4.1.1 Adjusting carriage speed ............................................................................................. 111

4.1.2 Setting stitch tension.................................................................................................... 114
4.1.3 Adjusting yarn carriers ................................................................................................. 118
4.1.4 Staggering yarn carriers .............................................................................................. 126
4.1.5 Adjusting yarn tension ................................................................................................. 129
4.1.6 Adjusting yarn delivery on friction feed wheel * ........................................................... 131
4.1.7 Adjusting storage feed wheel MSF 3 *......................................................................... 133
4.1.8 Adjusting knitting areas................................................................................................ 134
4.1.9 Adjusting take-down .................................................................................................... 135
4.1.10 Processing fabric take-down menu.............................................................................. 139
4.1.12 Setting Cycle Counter and Quantity of Fabrics............................................................ 145
4.1.13 Adjusting shape counters ............................................................................................ 146
4.1.14 Setting counters........................................................................................................... 148
4.1.15 Switch illumination on and off ...................................................................................... 148
4.1.16 Setting value for releasing thread clamp ..................................................................... 150
4.1.17 Configuration symbol bar............................................................................................. 151
4.1.18 Configuring monitoring................................................................................................. 153
4.1.19 Setting up the pattern .................................................................................................. 157
4.1.20 Racking correction ....................................................................................................... 165
4.2 Advanced adjustments...................................................................................................... 168

4.2.1 Switching on and off aggregates * ............................................................................... 169

4.2.2 Setting language.......................................................................................................... 172
4.2.3 Adjusting sensor mechanism * .................................................................................... 174
4.2.4 Setting needle bed parameters.................................................................................... 176
4.2.5 Setting machine parameters........................................................................................ 178
4.2.6 Setting switch-off time when a power failure occurs.................................................... 180
4.2.7 Copying service data ................................................................................................... 182
4.2.8 Carry out the reference run.......................................................................................... 184
4.2.9 Adjusting racking position correction VPK ................................................................... 187
4.2.10 Adjusting basic racking correction VGK....................................................................... 189
4.2.11 Correcting position of stitch cams................................................................................ 192
4.2.12 Adjusting needle brushes ............................................................................................ 194
4.2.14 Adjusting needle detector ............................................................................................ 200
4.2.15 Adjusting yarn carriers ................................................................................................. 201
4.2.16 Adjusting yarn carrier limiters ...................................................................................... 202
4.2.17 Adjusting yarn carrier guide ......................................................................................... 203
4.2.18 Adjusting the brushes of the central lubrication *......................................................... 203
4.2.19 Adjusting intarsia yarn carrier (type 1) *....................................................................... 204
4.2.20 Adjusting intarsia yarn carriers (type 2) *..................................................................... 205
4.2.21 Shifting intarsia yarn carriers in area of carriage assembly *....................................... 206
4.2.22 Intarsia yarn carrier - Adjust stopping point (basic setting, braking value) * ................ 207
4.2.23 Intarsia yarn carrier - check the pressure plates * ....................................................... 216
4.2.24 Intarsia yarn carrier - Correct stopping point (correction value) * ................................ 218
4.2.25 Float slider (holding-down jack control) ....................................................................... 219
4.2.26 Normal yarn carrier type 2 ........................................................................................... 222
4.2.27 Plating – the different possibilities................................................................................ 224
4.2.28 Plating - Double bow yarn carrier ................................................................................ 226
4.2.29 Plating - Plating yarn carrier carriage .......................................................................... 228

7
 4.2.30 Changing the position of the knock-over wire.............................................................. 231
4.2.31 Overview of all machine data....................................................................................... 233
4.3 Working with files .............................................................................................................. 235

4.3.1 Help on working in the windows .................................................................................. 235

4.3.2 File manager................................................................................................................ 241
4.3.3 Working with files, libraries and folders ....................................................................... 245
4.3.4 Displaying file in pattern editor..................................................................................... 250
4.3.5 Clear knitting memory.................................................................................................. 252
4.3.6 Copying files ................................................................................................................ 254
4.3.7 Selecting the current folder.......................................................................................... 257
4.3.8 Carrying out a program check ..................................................................................... 260
4.4 Working with the Sintral editor .......................................................................................... 262

4.4.1 Activating Sintral editor ............................................................................................... 262

4.4.2 Go to help in function and error list.............................................................................. 268
4.5 KnitLAN connection........................................................................................................... 269
4.6 Defining user profile .......................................................................................................... 272

5 Setup Data .................................................................................................... 274

5.1 Background ....................................................................................................................... 275
5.2 Comparing Setup1 to Setup2............................................................................................ 276
5.3 Using Setup1 or Setup2 .................................................................................................... 278
5.4 Loading knitting program................................................................................................... 279
5.5 Setup2 Editor .................................................................................................................... 280

5.5.1 Overview of the Setup2 Editor of the CMS .................................................................. 280

5.5.2 Take-down ................................................................................................................... 289
5.5.3 Yarn carrier .................................................................................................................. 293
5.5.4 Stitch lengths ............................................................................................................... 297
5.5.5 Carriage speed ............................................................................................................ 299
5.5.6 Cycle counters ............................................................................................................. 300
5.5.7 Yarn length .................................................................................................................. 301
5.5.8 Racking........................................................................................................................ 306
5.5.9 Miscellaneous .............................................................................................................. 307
5.5.10 Data Mode and File Mode ........................................................................................... 308
5.6 Setup1 - Editing the setup file ........................................................................................... 309

6 Maintenance of the knitting machine ............................................................. 313

6.1 Minimize wear ................................................................................................................... 314
6.2 Cleaning the knitting machine ........................................................................................... 316

6.2.1 Cleaning the touch screen ........................................................................................... 317

6.2.2 Cleaning suction and lint container * ........................................................................... 318
6.2.3 Vacuuming off knitting machine................................................................................... 319
6.2.4 Cleaning needle bed.................................................................................................... 320
6.2.5 Cleaning thread clamping and cutting device .............................................................. 320
6.2.6 Cleaning the active thread clamp ................................................................................ 321
6.2.7 Cleaning the permanent brakes................................................................................... 321
6.2.8 Cleaning the friction feed wheel * ................................................................................ 321

8
 6.2.9 Cleaning main drive fan *............................................................................................. 322
6.2.10 Cleaning fan and radiators in right control unit ............................................................ 322
6.2.11 Cleaning filter mat of power supply unit....................................................................... 323
6.2.12 Thoroughly cleaning needle bed.................................................................................. 323
6.2.13 Clean the knitting systems........................................................................................... 325
6.3 Lubricate knitting machine ................................................................................................ 326

6.3.1 Lubrication interval....................................................................................................... 327

6.3.2 Setting lubricating interval for needle bed.................................................................... 328
6.3.3 Setting of central lubrication ........................................................................................ 329
6.3.4 Oil needle bed.............................................................................................................. 333
6.3.5 Restarting lubricating interval ...................................................................................... 334
6.3.6 Oiling jack bed ............................................................................................................. 334
6.3.7 Oiling yarn carrier rods ................................................................................................ 335
6.3.8 Oiling the control of the holding-down jacks ................................................................ 335
6.3.9 Oiling carriage guide rail .............................................................................................. 335
6.3.10 Greasing impulse sensor rails ..................................................................................... 336
6.3.11 Greasing butts of the coupling parts and intermediate sliders..................................... 337
6.3.12 Oiling lifting slide (yarn carrier plunger) ....................................................................... 337
6.3.14 Greasing racking device .............................................................................................. 338
6.3.15 Grease needle bed support/adjustment pieces ........................................................... 339

7 Repairing the knitting machine ...................................................................... 349

7.1 Supplementary activities during maintenance................................................................... 349

7.1.1 Switching power supply 40 V off and on...................................................................... 349

7.1.2 Central lubrication - mounting and working position .................................................... 351
7.2 Helpful knitting rows .......................................................................................................... 352
7.3 Replacing parts ................................................................................................................. 354

7.3.1 Replacing needle and coupling part ............................................................................ 355

7.3.2 Replacing intermediate slider ...................................................................................... 357
7.3.3 Replacing selection jack .............................................................................................. 360
7.3.4 Replacing holding-down jack ....................................................................................... 361
7.3.5 Remove needle bed or position it at an angle ............................................................. 364
7.3.6 Repairing needle bed and additional needle bed ........................................................ 367
7.3.7 Removing selection jack bed (CMS 520 C and CMS 830 C) ...................................... 371
7.3.8 Removing and mounting carriage part......................................................................... 374
7.3.9 Removing cam plate .................................................................................................... 382
7.3.10 Removing and mounting step motor............................................................................ 383
7.3.11 Replacing gear racks in the step motor ....................................................................... 384
7.3.12 Replacing yarn carrier.................................................................................................. 388
7.3.13 Mount intarsia yarn carrier *......................................................................................... 389
7.3.14 Replacing yarn control unit .......................................................................................... 391
7.3.15 Replacing drive belts and friction roller of friction feed wheel...................................... 391
7.3.16 Deaerating oil line ........................................................................................................ 394
7.3.17 Replacing comb hook .................................................................................................. 395

7.4 Eliminating faults in electronics system............................................................................. 397

7.4.1 Overview of the electronic control (control cabinet right)............................................. 397

7.4.2 Overview of the electronic control (control cabinet right)............................................. 400

9
 7.4.3 Overview of the electronic control (control cabinet left and right) ................................ 403
7.4.4 Power supply unit ........................................................................................................ 406
7.4.5 Control of yarn carrier magnets ................................................................................... 406
7.4.6 Replacing electronic card ............................................................................................ 407
7.5 Check fuses ...................................................................................................................... 408

7.5.1 Checking fuse (right control cabinet) ........................................................................... 408

7.5.2 Checking fuse (right control cabinet) ........................................................................... 411
7.5.3 Checking fuse (right and left control cabinet) .............................................................. 414
7.6 Needle selection displacement ......................................................................................... 417

7.6.1 Setting the impulse sensor type................................................................................... 418

7.6.2 Preparations ................................................................................................................ 423
7.6.3 Reset reference values of impulse sensor, carry out carriage reference run .............. 424
7.6.4 Determining the needle selection displacement manually........................................... 425
7.7 Entering the data of the needle selection displacement manually .................................... 428

8 Software - Installation and basic settings ...................................................... 418

8.1 Boot process ..................................................................................................................... 419

8.1.1 Basic Settings .............................................................................................................. 423

8.2 Saving all machine data on the USB-Memory-Stick ......................................................... 432
8.3 Saving pattern after a big fault .......................................................................................... 434
8.4 Installing the Stoll operating system.................................................................................. 436

8.4.1 Direct installation ......................................................................................................... 437

8.4.2 Indirect installation ....................................................................................................... 443
8.4.3 Updating software........................................................................................................ 449
8.4.4 Carrying out a restart (Restart) .................................................................................... 453
8.4.5 Carrying out restart with machine configuration (Restart and Configuration) .............. 454
8.4.6 Setting online connection............................................................................................. 456
8.4.7 Overview of all system data......................................................................................... 458
8.5 Diagnose Control .............................................................................................................. 460

9 Yarns and stitch tension ................................................................................ 462

9.1 Economic production and the influencing factors.............................................................. 462
9.2 Stitch Tension Range........................................................................................................ 464
9.3 Stitch lengths..................................................................................................................... 466
9.4 Yarn table.......................................................................................................................... 469
9.5 Conversion table ............................................................................................................... 472

10 Empty Chapter 473

10
11 Machine Management Tools ......................................................................... 474
11.1 Machine Management Tools window................................................................................ 475
11.2 Display the virtual keyboard .............................................................................................. 476
11.3 Remote control with the software VNC ............................................................................. 477

11.3.1 Activating the remote control VNC on the machine ..................................................... 478
11.3.2 Configuring the remote control VNC on the machine .................................................. 479
11.3.3 Determine the IP address of the machine ................................................................... 480
11.3.4 Installing software VNC Viewer on the computer (e.g. a note-book) ........................... 480
11.3.5 Remote control with the VNC Viewer .......................................................................... 481
11.3.6 Remote control via a web browser .............................................................................. 483
11.4 Send email directly from the machine ............................................................................... 485

12 Key word directory......................................................................................... 489

11
12
 About this document 1

Function of this document

1 About this document

About this document

This chapter contains information on:

 Function of this document [1]
 Target groups of this document [1]
 Information in this document [2]
 Symbols in this document [3]
 Warnings in the documentation [4]
Function of this document

1.1 Function of this document

This document explains how to operate your knitting machine.
This section contains the information about:
 Operation
 Maintenance in normal operation
 Elimination of faults
 Maintenance
 Troubleshooting
Target groups of this document

1.2 Target groups of this document

The individual chapters of this document are directed at persons with different
tasks and qualifications:
Allocation of target groups and chapters

Target groups and qualifications Chapter

everybody: Knowledge on the 1 About this document

applicable safety guidelines at the
workplace 2 Description of knitting machine

User: Knowledge of the basic all the above-mentioned chapters

principles of flat knitting
3 Producing with the knitting machine

4 Adjusting knitting machine

6 Maintenance of the knitting machine

7 Repairing the knitting machine

Technician: Knowledge of the All chapters

current electrotechnical safety
guidelines and completed
professional training in the field of
textile mechanics

Allocation of target groups and chapters

13
1 About this document

Information in this document

Information in this document

1.3 Information in this document

This document contains all information on assembly, operation, servicing and
maintenance of the knitting machine.
Additional information is provided by the following separate documents:
Overview of the documents for the knitting machine and STOLL pattern preparation unit

Document Information contained

Spare Parts Catalog Illustration of all spare parts with their order
numbers

Manual for the STOLL pattern Using the STOLL pattern preparation unit
preparation unit

ASCON instructions Special attachments for measuring and controlling

STIXX instructions stitch length

Stoll-knit report 2 (SKR2) Software for operational and machine data

acquisition

Order Management Software Software for the distribution, control and

(OMS) management of knitting orders

Overview of the documents for the knitting machine and STOLL pattern preparation
unit

Additional information is available via:

 the Stoll branch office or Stoll dealer in your country
 the Stoll helpline:
– Tel: +49-(0)7121-313-450
– Fax: +49-(0)7121-313-455
 E-mail: [email protected]
 Internet: http: //www.stoll.com
 Training courses at the Stoll training centers
Type plate Some information and descriptions depend on the component and computer
type. There may be differences in the design depending on the manufacturing
date of the machine. The type plate and the table, which are located on the
front page of these operating instructions, indicate which machine model is
concerned.
Machine type plate

Machine type plate

The second column of numbers in the "Type" field indicates the component
type. In the above example the machine in question is the component type
"000".

14
 About this document 1

Symbols in this document

1.4 Symbols in this document

Symbols in this document

Some information in this document are marked with special symbols to make
it easier to access this information quickly.

The additional equipment of your machine can deviate from this description
depending on the machine type (type of machine, scope of supply, special
equipment).

Background information is provided here.

Tips for optimal procedure are provided here.

DANGER
A warning is given here!
A warning protects you from death or injuries and the knitting
machine from serious damage.
➜ Always read warnings carefully and observe them exactly.

One-step action Carry out an one-step action:

 Condition for the following action.
➜ Carry out one-step action.
Multi-step action Carry out a multi-step action:
 Condition for the following actions.
1. Carry out first action.
2. Carry out second action.
 Result of the action carried-out.
3. Carry out third action.
- or -
➜ Carry out the alternative action for point 3.
 Result of the action sequence.

If something fails to function properly:

Information on the possible causes is provided here.
➜ To solve the problem, carry out the action described here.
Warnings in the documentation

15
1 About this document

Warnings in the documentation

1.5 Warnings in the documentation

The warnings in the documentation have the following structure:
 Safety sign
The safety sign warns about the danger of injury and death.
In order to avoid death and injuries, all measures that are indicated along
with the safety sign are to be followed.
 Signal word
DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION, IMPORTANT
 Signal color
depending upon the signal word: red, orange, yellow, blue
 Text comprises of:
– Type and source of danger
– Possible outcomes
– Measures for protection against danger and prohibitions
Example:

DANGER
Life-threatening high voltage!
Electrical shock may cause death or serious injuries.
➜ Set machine main switch to "0".
➜ Secure the machine against being switched on again.
Explanation to the signal words

Signal word Explanation

Imminent danger of death or serious injuries

(irreversible).

Death of serious injury (irreversible) possible.

Slight injury (reversible) possible.

Damage to property possible.

Explanation to the signal words

16
 Description of knitting machine 2

Components of the knitting machine

2 Description of knitting machine

Description of knitting machine

This chapter contains information on:

 Components of the knitting machine [18]
 Yarn guide [23]
 Carriage assembly [32]
 Knitting system [34]
 Control devices [37]
 Needle beds [39]
 Fabric take-down [41]
 Display and operating elements [45]
Components of the knitting machine

17
2 Description of knitting machine

Components of the knitting machine

2.1 Components of the knitting machine

Front side (CMS 530, CMS 520, CMS 520 C, CMS 502) *

2.1.1 Front side (CMS 530, CMS 520, CMS 520 C, CMS 502)
*

Overview machine elements 1

Label Explanation

1 Yarn control unit Tensions and controls the thread.

2 Bobbin board The bobbins are placed on it.

3 Carriage It moves over the needle beds. It controls the work

positions of each yarn carrier and each and every
needle in the needle bed.

4 Signal light It displays the operating state of the knitting machine

5 Safety door (left, right) The reversing position of the carriage is secured by the
safety door.

6 Covers The entire traversing path of the carriage is secured

with a safety door. You have to forbid everyone from
reaching out into the running machine.

7 Control Unit It controls the knitting process.

It saves the data of the knitting program.

It controls the needle selection and the motors in the

carriage.

8 Main switch Switching on and off of the machine. EMERGENCY-

STOP switch.

Overview machine elements 1

18
 Description of knitting machine 2

Components of the knitting machine

Overview machine elements 2

Label Explanation

9 Engaging rod It activates and stops the carriage run.

10 Fabric take-down Main take-down:

(main take-down, Pulls the stitches away from the
auxiliary take-down, needle downwards to the fabric
comb take-down) container.

Auxiliary take-down:
Grasps the fabric directly under the
needle bed.
Comb take-down:
With the comb take-down fabric
pieces are automatically started and
press off after completion.

11 Fabric collection chamber The fabric take-down guides the

finished fabric into the fabric collection
chamber. There the fabric is protected
from soiling.

12 Touch screen The touch screen enables

communication with the machine
control

13 USB connection Connection for a removable data

carrier, containing knitting programs,
operating systems and machine data.

Recommendations: Use USB Memory

Stick. Also possible: Floppy disk drive,
CD drive, DVD drive, external hard
disk.

Overview machine elements 2

19
2 Description of knitting machine

Components of the knitting machine

Inside
Components of the knitting machine (inside)

Overview machine elements 3

Label Explanation

1 Carriage It moves over the needle beds. It controls the

work positions of each yarn carrier and each
and every needle in the needle bed.

2 Needle Bed Every machine has a front and a rear needle

bed. There are grooves in the needle bed which
are run by needles.

3 Thread clamping and cutting The thread clamping and cutting device holds
device (left, right) the thread of a yarn carrier not used for knitting
at the moment.

4 Yarn carrier It gets pulled by the carriage over the needle

bed and leads the thread into the needle.

5 Yarn carrier rail The bars are attached to the upper part of the
needle beds. The yarn carrier glides on this rail.

Overview machine elements 3

Further information:
 Symbols in this document [14]

20
 Description of knitting machine 2

Components of the knitting machine

2.1.4 Lateral view (right) *

Lateral view (right) *

Overview machine elements 4

Label Explanation

1 Yarn control unit Tensions and controls the thread.

2 Yarn guide device On this the yarn control units and the friction feed
wheels are mounted.

3 Friction feed wheel It pulls the thread from the bobbin and feeds it to
the yarn carrier with a constant tension.

4 Lateral yarn tensioner It monitors and tensions the thread.

5 Safety door (left, right) The reversing position of the carriage is secured by
the safety door.

Overview machine elements 4

Further information:
 Symbols in this document [14]

21
2 Description of knitting machine

Components of the knitting machine

2.1.5 Rear side *

Rear side *

Overview machine elements 5

Label Explanation

1 Carriage It moves over the needle beds. It controls the

work positions of each yarn carrier and each and
every needle in the needle bed.

2 Rear needle bed Every machine has a front and a rear needle bed.
There are grooves in the needle bed which are
run by needles.

3 Trailing cable (energy The cables for the carriage that travels hence
chain) and forth are fed along with in the energy chain.

4 Transformer (Fuses) The knitting machine can be operated with

various mains voltages.

5 Fluff absorption The fluff absorption removes the yarn fluff from
the upper area of the needle beds.

6 Control Unit It controls the knitting process.

(CMS 530, CMS 520, CMS It saves the data of the knitting program.
520 C, CMS 502)
It controls the needle selection and the motors in
the carriage.

Control (right-hand side of It controls the carriage run and the racking of the
the machine) needle bed.
(CMS 830 C, CMS 822,
CMS 740)

7 Main Drive The carriage is driven by the drive motor via a

toothed belt.

8 Racking device Racks the rear needle bed laterally.

Overview machine elements 5

Further information:
 Symbols in this document [14]

22
 Description of knitting machine 2

Yarn guide

2.2 Yarn guide

Yarn guide

The yarn guide has the following tasks:

 Guiding knitting yarn
– from the bobbin to the yarn carrier
– as friction-free as possible
– without the threads touching or crossing over each other
 Controlling knitting yarn for
– yarn end
– Yarn Breakage
– Knots
 Controlling yarn tension
 Preventing sagging threads with yarn tensioning
Courses of yarn

2.2.1 Courses of yarn

Various courses of yarn are provided for threading up the yarn on the knitting
machine. The optimal course of yarn depends on the yarn and pattern.
Determining the course of yarn

Yarn Course of yarn

Seldom used threads, e.g. elastic yarns Course of yarn 1

Seldom used threads, e.g. draw threads Course of yarn 2

Frequently used threads Simple patterns: Course of yarn 2

Difficult patterns: Course of yarn 3

Difficult-to-process threads Course of yarn 3

Equally long fabrics Course of yarn 4

Determining the course of yarn

23
2 Description of knitting machine

Yarn guide

The following pictures show the four possible courses of yarn.

Course of yarn 1

Course of yarn 1

1 Bobbin 4 Safety door

2 Yarn guide bracket 5 Yarn deflector
3 Yarn control unit 6 Yarn Carrier
Course of yarn 2

Course of yarn 2

1 Bobbin 5 Yarn deflector

2 Yarn guide bracket 6 Yarn Carrier
3 Yarn control unit 7 Lateral yarn tensioner
4 Safety door

24
 Description of knitting machine 2

Yarn guide

Course of yarn 3

Course of yarn 3

1 Bobbin 5 Yarn deflector

2 Yarn guide bracket 6 Yarn Carrier
3 Yarn control unit 7 Lateral yarn tensioner
4 Safety door 8 Friction feed wheel
Course of yarn 4

Course of yarn 4

1 Bobbin 6 Yarn Carrier

2 Yarn guide bracket 7 Lateral yarn tensioner
3 Yarn control unit 8 Friction feed wheel
4 Safety door 9 Yarn length measuring device
(ASCON, STIXX)
5 Yarn deflector

25
2 Description of knitting machine

Yarn guide

2.2.2 Yarn control unit

Yarn control unit

Yarn control unit

Yarn control unit

1 Thread break control 4 Yarn brake disc

2 Knot detector for large knots 5 LED
3 Knot detector for small knots

The elements of the yarn control device can individually be adjusted to the
yarn being processed.
The yarn break control (1) monitors the yarn ends and switches off the
machine in case of a yarn breakage or end. The error is indicated by the LED
(5) on the yarn control device, the signal light and on the touch screen.
In the case of large knots in the yarn, the knot detector switches off the knitting
machine. The error is indicated by the LED (5) on the yarn control device, the
signal light and on the touch screen.
In the case of small knots in the yarn, the machine knits a programmed
number of rows at reduced speed.
The yarn brake setting (4) regulates the yarn tension and prevents the thread
from hanging through.
Lateral yarn guide *

26
 Description of knitting machine 2

Yarn guide

2.2.3 Lateral yarn guide *

The friction feed wheel, the permanent brake, the active thread clamp and the
lateral yarn tensioner work together.
Lateral yarn guide

Lateral yarn guide

1 Friction feed wheel 3 Active thread clamp

2 Permanent brake 4 Lateral yarn tensioner

Further information:
 Symbols in this document [14]
Friction feed wheel *

Friction feed wheel * The friction rollers of the friction feed wheel (1) reduce the yarn tension.

Further information:
 Symbols in this document [14]
Storage feed wheel MSF 3 *

Storage feed wheel MSF 3 * The feed wheel serves for intermediate storage of the thread. The cylindrical
coiling and the separately positioned thread layers offer a more even thread
tension when yarn is being drawn off than when drawing off the bobbin. Peaks
in tension are caught up and compensated by the feed wheel.
Storage feed wheel MSF 3

Storage feed wheel MSF 3

According to use up to 6 feed wheels can be inserted on each machine side.

Further information:
 Symbols in this document [14]

27
2 Description of knitting machine

Yarn guide

Active thread clamp The active thread clamp is found under the friction feed wheel. It is integrated
Active thread clamp

in the lateral safety door. The thread clamp is positioned in such a manner that
each track of the friction feed wheel is arranged corresponding to a track of the
thread clamp. In all there are 8 tracks available.
Lateral yarn guide

Lateral yarn guide

1 Friction feed wheel 3 Active thread clamp

2 Permanent brake 4 Lateral yarn tensioner

In the case of a friction feed wheel sometimes a problem appears:

When a thread is not knitted over a longer period of time it is possible that the
friction feed wheel releases some threads because of the friction and thereby
the lateral yarn tensioner swivels so mush outwards that the machine stops.
This hinders the thread clamp. If the yarn tensioner swivels over the angle by
approx. 45 degree, the clamp closes automatically. If the thread is knitted
again the yarn tensioner swivels inwards and the clamp is open.
Lateral yarn tensioner

Lateral yarn tensioner

The lateral yarn tensioner has two tasks:

Function Description

Control the thread Switch off the knitting machine in case of a thread break or
yarn end.

Tension the thread When the yarn carrier moves on the yarn tensioner, it can
hold the threads that are not yet being knitted in a
tensioned state. The yarn tensioner swivels and holds the
threads tensioned.

In the case of a yarn breakage the side yarn tensioner swivels outwards and
switches off the knitting machine. On the upper end of the yarn tensioner a
magnet is fixed that releases a contact in the lateral safety door without
touching it.

28
 Description of knitting machine 2

Yarn guide

2.2.4 Thread clamping and cutting device *

Thread clamping and cutting device *

Thread clamping and cutting device

Thread clamping and cutting device

1 Clamping
2 Catch hook

The thread clamping and cutting device is mounted next to the front needle
bed. Each one works with 8 or 16 clamps (1). The clamping devices are
actuated by the carriage.
The thread clamping and cutting device holds the thread of a yarn carrier not
used for knitting at the moment. If the yarn carrier is not needed anymore, it is
positioned at its clamping position. The catch hook (2) pulls the thread
downward. Then the thread is clamped and cut off. When the yarn carrier is
used again, the carriage opens the clamping device after knitting a few rows
and the yarn end is released. The number of rows knitted until the clamping
device opens up, is programmed in the knitting program.

Further information:
 Symbols in this document [14]
Intarsia yarn carrier *

29
2 Description of knitting machine

Yarn guide

2.2.5 Intarsia yarn carrier *

Intarsia yarn carriers can be installed to produce intarsia patterns.
Pattern with 21 intarsia yarn carriers

Pattern with 21 intarsia yarn carriers

Depending on the machine type, the intarsia yarn carrier type 1 or 2 will be
inserted.

Intarsia yarn carrier Machine

1 Type 1 CMS 830 C

CMS 520 C
CMS 730 S
CMS 830 S

2 Type 2 CMS 933

CMS 822
CMS 740
CMS 730 T
CMS 530 T
CMS 530
CMS 520

Further information:
 Symbols in this document [14]

30
 Description of knitting machine 2

Carriage assembly

2.2.6 Plating yarn carriers *

Plating yarn carriers *

Plating yarn carrier

Plating yarn carrier

1 Double bow yarn carrier All gauges except E 3, E 4

2 Double eyelet yarn carrier E 3, E 4

It is possible to knit color and quality platings with these yarn carriers.
Colored plating pattern

Colored plating pattern

Further information:
 Plating – the different possibilities [224]
 Symbols in this document [14]
Carriage assembly

31
2 Description of knitting machine

Carriage assembly

2.3 Carriage assembly

Drive, speed and operating path

2.3.1 Drive, speed and operating path

Carriage assembly
assembly_5xx

Carriage assembly

The carriage assembly is driven by the drive motor via a toothed belt. The
speed is infinitely programmable, and can therefore be adapted to the yarn
material, pattern and working step.
Limit switches control the path of the carriage assembly. If the carriage
assembly moves too far outward, the limit switch stops the knitting machine.
The operating path of the carriage is controlled by the knitting program and
may differ for each knitting or transfer row The carriage assembly reverses
when the last working needle leaves the system.
Suction and cleaning row

2.3.2 Suction and cleaning row

Suction_5xx

Suction *
Fluff absorption and lint container

Fluff absorption and lint container

The suction removes the yarn fluff from the upper area of the needle beds. The
fluff is collected in a container.

32
 Description of knitting machine 2

Carriage assembly

Cleaning row
Brushes for cleaning the selection systems

Brushes for cleaning the selection systems

After a programmable number of knitting rows, the carriage assembly carries

out a cleaning row over the entire needle bed during which the fluff is extracted
from the needle bed. Brushes (1) are mounted outside on the needle bed
which clean the selection systems during the cleaning row.

Further information:
 Switching on and off aggregates * [169]
Central lubrication

2.3.3 Central lubrication

All the machines with four or
Central lubrication on carriage, on the right: Oil supply

more knitting systems are

equipped with a central
lubrication as a standard
equipment (not for CMS 822)

Central lubrication on carriage, on the right: Oil supply

It lubricates the working butts of the holding-down jacks, the coupling part and
the intermediate slider with oil. All other lubrication points must be lubricated
manually.
Lubrication points of the central lubrication

Lubrication points of the central lubrication

33
2 Description of knitting machine

Knitting system

2.4 Knitting system

Knitting system

Needle paths and design

2.4.1 Needle paths and design

Knitting system

Knitting system

1 Stitch cam 3 Selection system

2 Raising cam 4 movable cams

Each knitting system can knit using the three-way technique without limitation.
Each needle can be controlled in seven positions:
 Stitch
 Tuck
 out of operation
 Transfer
 Take-over
 Split - stitch/transfer
 Split - stitch/receiving
This results in the following possibilities during stitch formation:
 Stitch
 Tuck
 out of operation
 Transfer of stitches and tuck loops from the front to the rear needle bed or
vice-versa, even simultaneously in both directions
The selection system only selects the needles which knit a stitch or tuck,
transfer or split-stitch. All other needles are not selected and do not sink the
stitches.
Holding-down function

34
 Description of knitting machine 2

Knitting system

2.4.2 Holding-down function

The holding-down jacks hold down the fabric when the needles for stitch
formation are driven out. The holding down jacks are moved by the holding-
down jack control unit on the carriage.
Following stitch formation, the holding-down jacks are opened again
(exception: CMS 830 C, the holding-down jacks remain closed).
Holding-down jack control unit

Holding-down jack control unit

1 Holding-down jack control unit

2 Swiveling brush holder
3 Jack slider
Jack slider

Jack slider

4 Leading jack slider

5 Following jack slider

The leading jack slider (4) is switched upward.

This pivots the holding-down jacks downward into the holding-down position
during needle raising. They hold down the stitches.
The following jack slider (5) is pulled back and the holding-down jacks pivot
back again. The holding-down jacks are open during yarn insertion.
When the carriage reverses, the jack sliders are switched over automatically.

35
2 Description of knitting machine

Control devices

2.4.3 Step motor for adjusting the stitch tension

Step motor for adjusting the stitch tension

Step motor for adjusting the stitch tension (5xx)

Step motor for adjusting the stitch tension

A step motor (1) on each knitting system adjusts the stitch tension. The step
motor is controlled by the knitting program.
The stitch tension can be adjusted individually
 for individual areas in the fabric which are particularly subject to loading,
e.g. narrowing edges or pattern motifs
 for individual stitch cams
 for different yarns (yarn count correction)
During knitting, changes can also be made via the touch screen.
Control devices

36
 Description of knitting machine 2

Control devices

2.5 Control devices

Impulse sensor

2.5.1 Impulse sensor

Impulse sensor

Impulse sensor

The impulse sensor (1) scans the grooves and trick walls on the impulse
sensor rail on the front and rear guide rail for the carriage assembly. It
recognizes the position of the carriage assembly and specifies the time for the
selection of the selection jacks by the selection systems.
Depending on the machine gauge, there is a front and a rear impulse sensor
rail.

Machine gauge Impulse sensor rail

E 18 (E 9.2) front and rear

E 16 (E 8.2)
E 14 (E 7.2)

E 12 (E 6.2)

E 10 (E 5.2)

E8 Back

E 7 (E 3,5.2)

E 5 (E 2,5.2)

E4

E 3.5

E3
Stop resistance

37
2 Description of knitting machine

Needle beds

2.5.2 Stop resistance

If the power consumption of the drive motor differs from a stored value, the
knitting machine is stopped. The reason for a higher power consumption may,
for example, be a sticky needle.
Shock stop

2.5.3 Shock stop

In the case of a shock on the needle bed, e.g. in the case of needle breakage,
the piezo-electric shock stop switches off the knitting machine. The piezo-
electric shock stop is located below the needle beds.
Needle detector

2.5.4 Needle detector

The needle detector (1) checks the height of the fabric in the needle area.
Needle detector

Needle detector

If needles are defective (e.g. latch breakage), there is a danger of the fabric
not being taken down downward and gathering in the needle area. The
machine will then stop automatically to prevent from a major damage.
Needle beds

38
 Description of knitting machine 2

Needle beds

2.6 Needle beds

Structure

2.6.1 Structure
The front needle bed is screwed to the needle bed support tightly. The rear
needle bed can laterally be racked relative to the front needle bed by the
racking device.
Needle bed (schematic representation)

Fig. 27: Needle bed (schematic representation)

1 Holding-down jack 5 Selection jack
2 Needle 6 Selector spring
3 Coupling part 7 Needle bar
4 Intermediate slider 8 Cover rail

The moveable parts (2) to (6) are fixed by several rails in the needle bed. To
replace a part, the corresponding rail must be pulled to the side. This takes
place with the help of the extraction hook. It is included in the accessories.
Racking device

2.6.2 Racking device

The front needle bed is screwed to the needle bed support tightly. The rear
needle bed can laterally be racked relative to the front needle bed by the
racking device.
Racking motor

Racking motor

The racking motor (1) is located on the right-hand side below the needle bed
support. It laterally racks the rear needle bed. It is controlled by the knitting
program. The racking movement is infinitely programmable.

39
2 Description of knitting machine

Fabric take-down

Racking course The racking course may be up to 4 inches (approx. 10 cm). Depending on the
machine gauge, this is a maximum racking course over 12 to 72 needles.
Maximum racking course in dependence on the machine gauge

Machine gauge Maximum racking course

E18 (E9.2) 72 needles

E16 (E8.2) 64 needles

E14 (E7.2) 56 needles

E12 (E6.2) 48 needles

E10 (E5.2) 40 needles

E8 32 needles

E7 (E3,5.2) 28 needles

E5 (E2,5.2) 20 needles

E4 16 needles

E3.5 14 needles

E3 12 needles

Maximum racking course in dependence on the machine gauge

Transfer During transfer the rear needle bed is racked until the needles of the front and
rear needle beds almost touch. The needle dips into the pelerine spring of the
needle opposite.
Overracking The overracking mechanism pre-stretches the stitches prior to transfer so, that
they are somewhat enlarged. Then the needle bed is reset to the programmed
racking. As a result, the stitches are also transferred very reliably even at a
high carriage speed.
Slow racking To protect the yarn, the needle bed can be racked very slowly. The carriage
assembly then waits at the reversing point until the needle bed is racked.
Fabric take-down

40
 Description of knitting machine 2

Fabric take-down

2.7 Fabric take-down

The fabric take-down consists of the three units:
 Main Take-down
 Auxiliary Take-down
 Comb Take-down
- or -
 Belt take-down
Each unit is driven by a separate motor. The motor can individually be adapted
to the knitting situation.
Main take-down

2.7.1 Main take-down

Main take-down (right picture: CMS 502)

Fig. 29: Main take-down (right picture: CMS 502)

1 Take-down rollers
2 Knurled screws
3 Scale

A motor drives the take-down rollers (1). The take-down rollers guide the
finished fabric into the fabric collection chamber. There the fabric is protected
from soiling.
Take-down tension The take-down tension consists of:
 Pre-tensioning when the carriage assembly is at the reversing point
 Take-down tension during knitting
Both tensions are independently set of each other. The optimum value for the
take-down tension is dependent on the working width, yarn material and
pattern.
The pressure of the take-down rollers (1) is individually adjusted with the
knurled screws (2). The regulation acts on two take-down rollers. A scale (3)
simplifies the adjustment of the take-down roller.
On CMS 502:
The pressure of the take-down rollers (1) is individually adjusted with the
knurled screws (2). The knurled screws are placed on the left and right
machine foot. If you change the adjustment you must take care that both the
knurled screws are adjusted by the same value.

41
2 Description of knitting machine

Fabric take-down

Premature wear of the take- The roller rubber of the take-down roller (1) is prematurely worn by:
down roller
 Fabric take-down values too high (roller spins)
 Contact pressure too high
 Yarns harmful to rubber, e.g. abrasive, sanding yarns or yarn finishes such
as greases or oils
 UV radiation
 Cleaning agents harmful to rubber, e. g. ether or fuels.
Recommendation: Use cleaning petrol for cleaning
Auxiliary take-down *

2.7.2 Auxiliary take-down *

Auxiliary take-down

Auxiliary take-down

1 Main take-down
2 Auxiliary take-down

The auxiliary take-down grasps the fabric directly under the needle bed.
The auxiliary take-down supports:
 Stitch formation
 Adjustment of the fabric take-down to requirements typical of the fabric
 Narrowing or widening
If the fabric is only taken down with the main take-down, the rollers of the
auxiliary take-down are pivoted apart.
The take-down force and the take-down speed are programmable.

Further information:
 Symbols in this document [14]

42
 Description of knitting machine 2

Fabric take-down

2.7.3 Comb take-down *

Comb take-down *

Comb take-down
Take-down (5xx)

Comb Take-down

With the comb take-down fabric pieces are automatically started and press off
after completion.
Comb hooks of comb take-down with sliders (left open, right closed)

Comb hooks of comb take-down with sliders (left open, right closed)

When starting a new fabric, a net row is knitted with the elastic thread (comb
thread). The main and auxiliary take-down open and the comb take-down
moves upward. The sliders open the holding-down recesses on the comb
hooks.
The comb thread is automatically laid in the holding-down recesses and the
sliders close the holding-down recesses again.
After two stitch rows, the draw thread is inserted and the knitting machine
begins with the fully fashioned article. The comb take-down adopts the
settings of the main take-down and pulls the fabric off downward.
As soon as the comb hooks are below the main take-down, the take-down
rollers close and the fabric is transferred to the fabric take-down. The sliders
open the holding-down recesses on the comb hooks. The comb take-down
releases the fabric and moves into the home position.
The sliders can open the comb hooks at any point. Therefore, short shape
parts, e. g. collars or trimmings, can only be taken down by the comb take-
down. They are knitted without the main or auxiliary take-down.

Further information:
 Symbols in this document [14]

43
2 Description of knitting machine

Display and operating elements

2.7.5 Control devices (fabric take-down)

Control devices (fabric take-down)

The following parameters are controlled on the fabric take-down:

Control devices on the fabric take-down(1) not in case of machines with comb take-down(2) only in case of machines with belt take-down

Parameter Control

Speed of the take-down roller The rotating speed of the take-down rollers is
constantly measured. If the deviation from the
upper or lower limit is too large, the knitting
machine stops. The limit values are infinitely
programmable.

Speed of The rotating speed of the take-down belts is

take-down belts (2) constantly measured. If the deviation from the
upper or lower limit is too large, the knitting
machine stops. The limit values are infinitely
programmable.

Wrapping around loose threads (1) Four yarn deflectors (accessory) prevent loose
threads from wrapping around the fabric take-
down rollers.

Wrapping around of fabric (1) A winding plate prevents the fabric from
wrapping around the fabric take-down rollers. If
the fabric nevertheless wraps around, the
knitting machine stops.

Throwing off of fabric (1) Four fabric sensors (accessory) scan the fabric
between the needle bed and the fabric take-
down. They can be moved as desired over the
entire working width. If the fabric is ejected, the
knitting machine stops.

Control devices on the fabric take-down

(1) not in case of machines with comb take-down
(2) only in case of machines with belt take-down

Further information:
 Adjusting sensor mechanism * [174]
Display and operating elements

44
 Description of knitting machine 2

Display and operating elements

2.8 Display and operating elements

Main switch

2.8.1 Main switch

Main switch (5xx)

Main switch

The main switch (1) is located on the front of the machine above the right
control unit.
In position "1 - On" the main switch is switched on, in position "0 - Off" it is
switched off.
Switch-off process When the main switch is turned from "1" to "0", the machine is immediately
switched off. Dangerous movements are immediately stopped. However, the
machine data are not lost, as they are saved with a battery. This takes approx.
60 seconds. In the process, messages appear on the touch screen. Once the
process has been completed, the touch screen becomes dark and an alarm
signal sounds.
Even with the main switch switched off, the mains supply up to the main switch
still carries current with extremely high voltage. The mains supply must be
disconnected and secured against being switched on again before working on
the main switch unit.
Emergency-stop The main switch is also the emergency-stop switch.
The main switch has to be locked during maintenance and service work. This
prevents the main switch from being switched on accidentally.

45
2 Description of knitting machine

Display and operating elements

2.8.2 Engaging rod

Engaging rod

Positions of
Engaging Rodthe engaging rod 5xx

Engaging Rod

1 Carriage stopped
2 reduced speed
3 normal speed

The carriage assembly, and therefore also knitting, is started and stopped with
the engaging rod. The engaging rod can be moved into three positions.
Smooth and jolt-free start-up The path of the engaging rod from "0" to the production speed is subdivided in
of the carriage 32 stages. The 32 stages are evaluated using a logarithmic curve.

With the engaging rod half-way pulled-up, 16 percent of the final speed will be
reached. The final speed will be reached in the second half of the path with
increasing steps.
If the engaging rod is pulled upwards only somewhat, the carriage will start
very slowly and without jolting.
 The knitting process can be observed better (stitch forming process,
switching of the intarsia yarn carriers, holding-down jack control)
 After a yarn breakage: Tying in the yarns in the needles is easier.
If the engaging rod is pulled upwards fast, the carriage starts immediately.

46
 Description of knitting machine 2

Display and operating elements

Please observe in position 3 1. When the covers are closed, the engaging rod is held by a magnet
(production at normal speed).

DANGER
Danger by parts of needles which have broken off!
Danger of injury to eyes by parts of needles.
➜ Wear safety glasses.

2. When the covers hoods are open (e.g. during set-up and checking work)
the engaging rod is not held by a magnet and must be held in position 3
by hand. If the engaging rod is released, it immediately falls into position 1
and stops the machine (dead man's switch in accordance with EN 11 111).
The maximum carriage speed with open safety doors can be set.

Further information:
 Setting machine parameters [178]
Signal light

47
2 Description of knitting machine

Display and operating elements

2.8.3 Signal light

Signal light (5xx)

Signal light

The signal light (1) displays the operating status of the knitting machine.
Depending on the machine type, the signal light is mounted either on the left
or on the right machine side.
Signal light colors

Color Status of the knitting machine

green Knitting machine is producing

green (flashes) Knitting machine is stopped with engaging rod

yellow Knitting machine is not producing, as an error has occurred

during knitting

green, yellow Both lamps light up during the shutdown process. Duration
is approximately 60 seconds - from switching off main switch
until machine is completely shut down.

off Main switch is off

Signal light colors

48
 Description of knitting machine 2

Display and operating elements

2.8.4 Input unit

Input unit

Input unit (right: CMS 502)

Input unit (right: CMS 502)

The input unit (1) enables communication with the machine control:
 Display of operating data
 Calling up help information
 Changing machine settings and pattern data
 Input of commands
The input unit can be moved over the entire width of the needle bed. On the
CMS 502 the input unit is mounted tightly (with type 637, type 638: component
type 001 or higher).
To carry out a function, tap one of the symbols (keys) on the touch screen. We
recommend using the touch pen (2) to prevent the touch screen from
becoming dirty or damaged.

49
2 Description of knitting machine

Display and operating elements

2.8.5 User Interface

User Interface

Design of the user interface

Design of the user interface

Design of the user interface

Design of the user interface

Do not touch the touch screen with sharp objects and do not
subject it to direct sunlight, which will destroy the picture tubes.

The user interface displays information on the current operating situation. It is

always divided into three areas:
 Upper area (1)
– Menu
– Input and output of information
 Middle area (2)
– Status display
– Additional input elements
– Selection elements
 Lower area (3)
– Function keys
Functions of user interface

50
 Description of knitting machine 2

Display and operating elements

Functions of user interface The following is possible on the touch screen:

 Calling up pages, menus and input masks
 Calling up help information
 Displaying the operating data of the knitting machine
 Accessing the functions of the knitting machine
 Inputting values for controlling the knitting machine
 Processing the knitting program
These functions are called up with the following keys and elements:
 Function keys
 Input elements
Function keys

Function keys In the following sections two groups of functions keys are shown:
 Standard function keys; these are displayed in standard configuration
 Additional function keys; these can be called up with a switchover key
Function keys in the main menu

51
2 Description of knitting machine

Display and operating elements

Function keys in the main

Function keys in the Main menu

menu

Function keys in the "Main menu"

Function keys in the Main menu

Key Function Key Function

Load/save data Comb Take-down

Editing the knitting Fabric Take-down

program

Carriage Speed Same SEN area size

Racking Correction Stitch tension

Set-up Pattern Yarn Carrier

Setup2 Editor Release clamps

Machine start Service

Machine stop Machine settings

Changeable monitoring Order menu

cycle counters & counters Sequence knitting (see

programming manual)

Manual interventions YLC (special attachment

with its own instructions)

Function keys in the "Main menu"

52
 Description of knitting machine 2

Display and operating elements

Function keys in the main

Function keys
Function keys in
in the
the main
Main menu
menu (with belt take-down)

menu (with belt take-down)

Function keys in the "Main menu"

Function keys in the Main menu

Key Function Key Function

Load/save data Belt take-down

Editing the knitting Same SEN area size

program

Carriage Speed Stitch tension

Racking Correction Yarn Carrier

Set-up Pattern Release clamps

Setup2 Editor Service

Machine start Machine settings

Machine stop Order menu

Changeable monitoring Sequence knitting (see

programming manual)

cycle counters & counters YLC (special attachment

with its own instructions)

Manual interventions

Function keys in the "Main menu"

53
2 Description of knitting machine

Display and operating elements

Standard function keys

Standard function
Standard function keys
keys

Key Function

return to "Main menu"

Return to previous page

Proceed to the next page

Calling up help

Return to previous help page

Display list of the last messages and references

Confirm input

Call up command line and output window for direct

commands

Order menu: Reset counter of already fabrics to "0"

Switch over to 100 % of programmed carriage speed

Switch over to 75 % of programmed carriage speed

Switch over to status line

Switch over to selection/input elements

Confirm message

Switch over to "additional function keys"

Standard function keys

Additional function keys

54
 Description of knitting machine 2

Display and operating elements

Additional function keys The additional function keys can be called up from any window with the
"Additional function keys" key.
These additional function keys are described in the corresponding chapters.
The following additional function keys are displayed in all windows.
Additional function keys in all windows

Key Function

Call up input window for a direct Sintral command. This is

carried out within a menu or window, i.e. you do not need to
leave the menu or call up the "Direct command" window.

Editing the knitting program

Switch over to standard function keys

Additional function keys in all windows

Input elements

Input elements In the following sections three groups of input elements are shown:
 Standard input elements; these are displayed when an input field is
activated by briefly touching in
 Selection elements; these are displayed when a selection field is activated
by briefly touching it
 Virtual keyboard; this can be displayed for inputs
Standard input elements

55
2 Description of knitting machine

Display and operating elements

Standard input elements

Standard input elements

Element Function

Reduce value by one step

Increase value by one step

Undo a change, the last value saved is displayed again

Undo a change, the previous value is displayed again

Confirm input, save changes, end setting process

Delete character to left of cursor

Position the cursor at the start of the line

Position the cursor at the end of the line

Standard input elements

Switches and linear regulators

Element Function

Only one switch can be active at a

time

Position switch (on/off)

Check box (on/off)

Arrow switch (left/right) or (up/down)

Slider

Reduce current value by one step

Increase current value by one step

Switches and linear regulators

56
 Description of knitting machine 2

Display and operating elements

Selection elements
Selection elements

Element Function

Fold open selection field

Fold closed selection field

Move cursor: one line upwards

Move cursor: one line downwards

Move cursor: one character to left

Move cursor: one character to the right

Move cursor: to first input of selection field

Move cursor: to last input of selection field

Selection elements
Virtual keyboard

57
2 Description of knitting machine

Display and operating elements

Virtual keyboard To input letters and numbers, the virtual keyboard can be displayed. Either a
number block appears for inputting numbers or an alphanumeric keyboard
appears for entering letters and numbers.
The virtual keyboard contains three switchover keys:
 SHIFT key
 CPS LCK key
 CTRL key
To use a shift key, e.g. to enter a special character, first press the shift key and
then the key with the special character. To return to normal characters, press
the switchover key again.
Switchover keys

Key Function

Switch on virtual keyboard

Switch off virtual keyboard

SHIFT key: switch over between uppercase and lowercase

letters and between numbers and special characters

CPS LCK key: switch over between uppercase and lowercase

letters; the setting of numbers or special characters is
maintained

CTRL key: switch over to function keys F1 to F10 and

keyboard codes (short cuts)

Switchover keys

58
 Producing with the knitting machine 3

Preparing production and shift changes

3 Producing with the knitting

Producing with the knitting machine

machine
This chapter contains information on:
 Preparing production and shift changes [59]
 Threading up yarn [67]
 Production [75]
 Producing with knitting orders (order menu) [96]
 Eliminating errors in the fabric [101]
 Starting the machine after a fault [107]
Preparing production and shift changes

3.1 Preparing production and shift changes

This chapter contains information on:
 Loading files, libraries and pattern folders [59]
 Entering piece number or number of courses [64]
 Setting touch screen [65]
Loading files, libraries and pattern folders

3.1.1 Loading files, libraries and pattern folders

Files (Sintral, Jacquard, Setup), libraries (Auto-Sintral) and folders can be
loaded from the following sources (data carriers):
 Removable data carrier (on the USB socket)
for example: USB-Memory-Stick, floppy disk drive, CD drive, DVD drive,
external hard disk
 Hard disk of the computer in the knitting machine
 Online
 Network drive

NOTICE
Computer viruses!
Loss of data or production. Computer viruses can creep into
the machine through unscanned data via USB port or network.
➜ Bring in only virus free data on to the knitting machine.
Socket for the USB Memory Stick (5xx, ADF)

59
3 Producing with the knitting machine

Preparing production and shift changes

The socket for the USB-Memory-Stick is located:

 On the left side of the machine above the cover.
 On the right side of the display.
USB-sockets

USB-sockets

Always set these settings before loading:

Key Function

Delete previous pattern

Delete all yarn carrier positions

After the pattern is loaded, the function is automatically executed "Start

Program from Line 1". This means that you need not take the "detour" over
the window "Machine start" in order to start the knitting program with the
"SP from Line 1" key.

The "Activate EALL" function is only executed when a Sintral

file is loaded. Not only the entire previous pattern (Sin, Jac, Set)
is deleted from memory, but also the contents of cycle
counters, counters and NP values are reset to their home
position.

60
 Producing with the knitting machine 3

Preparing production and shift changes

Loading knitting program:

1. From the "Main menu" call up the "Load & Save" window.
2. Set the desired path with one of the "Direct pattern folder selection" keys.
3. Use the PAT/SIN/JAC/SET/LIB keys to select whether the entire pattern
of the current machine (PAT) or individual file types are to be listed.
4. Select a file from the file list by tapping it.
5. Tap the "Load" key.
6. For the following prompt, press the "1" button to confirm,
- or -
➜ tap the "0" key to cancel.
7. Call up "Main menu".

If the "Sintral Editor" window appears, the loaded knitting

program contains an error. Correct this error before you start
the production.

Setup1 or Setup2
Loading the knitting program (difference Setup1-Setup2)

You can quickly recognize whether it is a pattern with Setup1 or Setup2 data

1 Setup1 pattern
2 Setup2 pattern

A Setup2 pattern is saved in a zip file. The icon of compressed (zipped) folder
is displayed in front of the pattern.

61
3 Producing with the knitting machine

Preparing production and shift changes

Load data (Setup2)

Keys for loading a knitting program

Key Function

Call up the "Load & save" window

Load pattern

Load the pattern with selected Setup data

Display the content of the Zip file

Close the zip file

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for loading a knitting program

62
 Producing with the knitting machine 3

Preparing production and shift changes

Load data (Setup1)

"Load & save" window

Keys for loading a knitting program

Key Function

Call up the "Load & save" window

Load pattern

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for loading a knitting program

"Invalid character" error Check the knitting program for special or foreign language characters. Only
message (Setup1, Setup2) the characters of the ASCII character set may be used.
ASCII character set

ASCII character set

Further information:
 Selecting the current folder [257]
 Working with files, libraries and folders [245]
 Go to help in function and error list [268]
 Overview of the Setup2 Editor of the CMS [280]
 KnitLAN connection [269]

63
3 Producing with the knitting machine

Preparing production and shift changes

3.1.2 Entering piece number or number of courses

Entering piece number or number of courses

Keys for entering the piece number or number of courses

Key Function

Call up the "Cycle counters & counters" window

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for entering the piece number or number of courses

Entering piece number or number of courses:

1. Call up the "Cycle counters & counters " window from the "Main menu".
Cycle counters & counters window

"Cycle counters & counters" window

2. If you produce pieces, enter the "piece number".

- or -
➜ If you produce yard goods, set the maximum number of courses with the
"MT" counter to define the length of the fabric.
3. Call up "Main menu".
Setting touch screen

64
 Producing with the knitting machine 3

Preparing production and shift changes

3.1.3 Setting touch screen

Calibrating touch screen

Calibrating touch screen The calibration is particularly important when persons of different heights work
at the same machine. In the case of different viewing angles, the position of
the keys may change. So that you always press the proper keys, calibrate the
touch screen at the beginning of your shift.
Keys for calibrating the touch screen

Key Function

Call up the "Service" menu

Call up the "Set touch screen" window.

"Calibrate" key

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for calibrating the touch screen

Calibrating touch screen:

NOTICE
Incorrect adjustment of the touch screen!
Permanent incorrect adjustment: If you set the touch screen
incorrectly, the keys on the screen are no longer accessible.
The program can only be readjusted with a keyboard (Stoll
helpline).
➜ During calibration, touch the touch screen within the target
circles only!

1. Call up the "Service" menu from the "Main menu".

2. Call up the "Set the touch screen" window from the "Service" menu.
 The "Set touch screen" window appears.
Set touch screen window

"Set touch screen" window

65
3 Producing with the knitting machine

Preparing production and shift changes

3. Tap the "Calibrate" key.

 The setting window appears. A target circle is located on the upper, left
side.
Setting window with target circle

Setting window with target circle

4. Tap exactly on the target circle.

 A second target circle appears on the lower right-hand side.
5. Tap exactly on the target circle.
 A third target circle appears on the upper, right-hand side.
6. Tap exactly on the target circle.
 A message box appears. The request in the message box is not
important, as there is no mouse cursor here.
7. Press on the "Yes" key.
8. Call up "Main menu".
Setting screen brightness

Setting screen brightness

Two key buttons for brightness setting are located on the rear of the input unit.
Setting screen brightness

Setting screen brightness

The screen display is made brighter with key button (1) and darker with key
button (2).

66
 Producing with the knitting machine 3

Threading up yarn

3.2 Threading up yarn

Threading up yarn

Various courses of yarn are provided for threading up the yarn on the knitting
machine. The optimal course of yarn depends on the yarn and pattern.

Further information:
 Courses of yarn [23]
Calling up yarn carrier assignment and allocation

3.2.1 Calling up yarn carrier assignment and allocation

Keys for calling up the assignment and allocation of the yarn carriers

Key Function

Call up "Machine start" window

Call up "Main menu"

Call up the "Yarn carrier" window

Call up "Additional function keys"

Call up "Allocation yarn carrier" window

Keys for calling up the assignment and allocation of the yarn carriers

Calling up the assignment and allocation of the yarn carriers:

1. Call up the window "Machine start" from the "Main menu".
Machine start window

"Machine start" window

2. Type "SP from line 1" key.

 The computer searches in the knitting program to see which yarn
carriers are required.
3. Call up "Main menu".

67
3 Producing with the knitting machine

Threading up yarn

4. Call up the "Yarn carrier" window.

Yarn carrier allocation in the Yarn carrier window

Yarn carrier allocation in the "Yarn carrier" window

5. On tandem machines also call up the allocation of the yarn carriers to both
carriage assembly.
6. Call up "Additional function keys".
7. Call up the "Allocation yarn carrier" window.
Allocation yarn carrier window

"Allocation yarn carrier" window

8. Call up "Main menu".

Putting up bobbins

3.2.2 Putting up bobbins

When the threads of several bobbins are led to one yarn carrier, supply
approximately the same number of threads to the yarn carrier from each side.
➜ Put up the bobbins on the knitting machine or on the additional bobbin
board.
Threading threads through yarn guide bracket

3.2.3 Threading threads through yarn guide bracket

1. Push the yarn guide brackets to the side so that a yarn guide bracket
hangs over each bobbin.
2. Thread each thread through a yarn guide bracket.

68
 Producing with the knitting machine 3

Threading up yarn

3.2.4 Threading threads through yarn control device

Threading threads through yarn control device

Path of the thread through the yarn control device

Fig. 51: Path of the thread through the yarn control device
1. Bring thread break control in work position.
Pull thread break control a little towards left till it is not held by the stopping
cam anymore.
2. Thread each thread through a yarn control device as shown in the picture.
Thread the yarns through the yarn length measuring device *

3.2.5 Thread the yarns through the yarn length measuring

device *
Path of the thread through the yarn length measuring device

Path of the thread through the yarn length measuring device

➜ Push thread upward with both hands through the threading gap and lay it
around the measuring wheel.

Further information:
 Symbols in this document [14]

69
3 Producing with the knitting machine

Threading up yarn

Threading up threads into friction feed wheel *

3.2.6 Threading up threads into friction feed wheel *

Course of yarn

Standard setting Insufficient yarn delivery

Standard setting Greater yarn delivery (grey)

Insufficient yarn delivery (black)

Further information:
 Adjusting yarn delivery on friction feed wheel * [131]
Thread up the yarn into the permanent brake

70
 Producing with the knitting machine 3

Threading up yarn

3.2.7 Thread up the yarn into the permanent brake

The permanent brake (1) will be used together with the friction feed wheel.

Thread-up into the permanent brake only the yarn that is

processed with the friction feed wheel.
Make sure that you thread-up the yarn vertically downwards.
Path of the yarn through the permanent brake

Path of the yarn through the permanent brake

With the thread also running over the friction feed wheel,
threading-up is easier if you activate the friction feed wheel
shortly (60 seconds). For this purpose activate shortly the
corresponding feed wheel ("Manual interventions" window),
see [105].

1. Guide the yarn downwards behind the brake discs.

2. Insert the yarn between the two brake discs.
3. Pull the yarn somewhat towards the machine center to open the brake
discs.
4. Release the yarn tension again.
 The brake discs close and the yarn glides into the open eyelet.
 Threading up thread into yarn carrier [105]

71
3 Producing with the knitting machine

Threading up yarn

3.2.8 Threading threads through safety door

Threading threads through safety door

Make sure that you thread-up the thread vertically through the
lateral safety door.

1. Bring the Lateral yarn tensioner in still position (1) (anchoring). Thereby
the active thread clamp is open.

With the thread also running over the friction feed wheel,
threading-up is easier if you activate the friction feed wheel
shortly (60 seconds). For this purpose activate shortly the
corresponding feed wheel ("Manual interventions" window),
see [105].

2. Thread the thread through one of the eyelets (2) on the lateral safety door.
Use Eyelet number 3 to10 when the thread is coming from the friction feed
wheel. So the clamp positions of the active thread clamp are positioned
exactly under it.
Use Eyelet number 1 and 2 or from eyelet no.11: for the thread if you
working without the feed wheel.
3. Thread the thread vertically downwards in the eyelet (3) of the lateral yarn
tensioner. For quicker orientation a vertically running riffle is attached in
the safety door.
4. Feed the thread through the yarn deflector (4) to the yarn carrier.
5. Bring lateral yarn tensioner in work position (5).
 Threading up thread into yarn carrier [105]
Threading up yarns into yarn deflector (CMS 520 C, CMS 830 C)

72
 Producing with the knitting machine 3

Threading up yarn

3.2.9 Threading up yarns into yarn deflector (CMS 520 C,

CMS 830 C)
Lead the yarns through the yarn deflector (1) to the yarn carrier.

The height of the yarn deflector is adjustable.

Attention: If the yarn deflector is set too deep, then it may collide with the
suction tube of the fluff absorption.
The yarn deflector can be assembled in two positions:
 Opening of the eyelets downwards (standard setting) – easier threading-
up
 Opening of the eyelets upwards – for this, loosen the screws (2), and turn
the front and rear yarn deflectors upwards. Retighten the screws.

With the thread also running over the friction feed wheel,
threading-up is easier if you activate the friction feed wheel
shortly (60 seconds). For this purpose activate shortly the
corresponding feed wheel ("Manual interventions" window),
see [105].

 Threading up thread into yarn carrier [105]

Threading up yarns into yarn carrier

73
3 Producing with the knitting machine

Threading up yarn

3.2.10 Threading up yarns into yarn carrier

Thread-up the threads into the respective next
eyelet on the yarn carrier.

If several yarn carriers of one track are used

and the threads are led to the yarn carriers from
the same side.

If several bobbins are used for one yarn carrier.

◆ Threading-up yarns from left and right.
◆ Make sure that almost the same
number of threads are used from left
and right.

CMS 520 C, CMS 830 C

The yarn carrier has two additional eyelets. Up
to 5 thin yarns can be threaded into each
eyelet.

With the thread also running over the friction feed wheel,
threading-up is easier if you activate the friction feed wheel
shortly (60 seconds). For this purpose activate shortly the
corresponding feed wheel ("Manual interventions" window),
see [105].

 Threading up thread into yarn carrier [105]

74
 Producing with the knitting machine 3

Production

3.3 Production
Production

This chapter contains information on:

 Starting machine [75]
 Calling up report and shift counters [78]
 Stopping machine [85]
 Switch off machine at the end of work [87]
 Monitoring the running time [89]
 Measuring the running time [94]
Starting machine

3.3.1 Starting machine

Keys for starting the machine

Key Function

Call up "Machine start" window

Call up "Additional function keys"

Call up the "Changeable monitoring" menu

Keys for starting the machine

 A pattern is loaded.
1. Call up the window "Machine start" from the "Main menu".
Machine start window

"Machine start" window

2. In "Start" field, tap on "SP from line 1" key.

3. Call up "Additional function keys".
4. Call up the "Changeable monitoring" window.
 Machine data and the program sequence are displayed in the
"Changeable Monitoring" window during production.

75
3 Producing with the knitting machine

Production

5. Start the machine with the engaging rod.

Engaging rod

Engaging rod

1 Carriage stopped 3 normal speed

2 reduced speed

Pattern changes - Apply

Use this function only for the following machines:
shape counters
➜ Machine without comb take-down
➜ Machine with comb take-down but without use of comb

The machine compares automatically the shape counters (old-new) in order to

e able to adjust the new knitting width (widening or narrowing) with the pattern
change. The values of the shape counters of the previous pattern are
necessary for this.

You can enter the values of the previous pattern manually or simply apply
them by the "Apply shape counter" key.
The condition is that the pattern was created as Fully Fashion knitting program
on the M1plus.

Also with a basic pattern (pattern without shape) you can use
this helpful function (see the tip at the end of the section).

76
 Producing with the knitting machine 3

Production

Keys to apply the shape counters

Key Function

Call up "Machine start" window

Call up "Additional function keys"

"Apply shape counter" key

Keys to apply the shape counters

Apply shape counter:

1. Call up the window "Machine start" from the "Main menu".
2. Tap on "Additional function keys".
3. Tap the "Apply shape counter" key.
Confirm the prompt that follows with "YES".
 The values of the shape counter are applied to the new pattern.
4. Tap the "SP from line 1" key.
Converting a basic pattern
A small trick - with an impressive effect
into a shaped pattern
Using a small trick you can easily convert a basic pattern into a
fully fashion pattern on the M1plus.
Converting a basic pattern into a shaped pattern:
➜ Open the basic pattern on the M1plus.
(The technical processing has not yet been done.)
➜ Select the "Generate Pure Shape" function in the "Shape"
menu.
-> An empty, rectangular shape with the size of the pattern
will be opened.
➜ Carry out technical processing
 The basic pattern is automatically converted into a fully
fashion pattern, the corresponding specifications are
entered into the knitting program (PF0, "ff-trans" function,
this function contains the casting-off and widening until the
new knitting width).

Further information:
 Configuring monitoring [153]
Calling up report and shift counters

77
3 Producing with the knitting machine

Production

3.3.2 Calling up report and shift counters

The control collects all operating data recorded since the operating system
was first read in and since the current knitting program was started. These
data help you optimize the performance and loading of the knitting machine.
Report The individual types of operating data (1) are listed on the left side. The left-
hand table (2) shows the continuing listing of all data accrued after loading the
operating system. The data of this table cannot be deleted. The data of the
right table (3) can be deleted with the "Report0" key.
The production data can be listed during a certain period of time. This may
consist of part of a shift, day or week.
Report window

"Report" window

78
 Producing with the knitting machine 3

Production

Data in Report window

Label Data shown

"F" No. of errors or no. of stop motions

"%", "H", "M" Percent, hours, minutes

"SIN" Working time of the control unit (SINTRAL)

"RUN" Production period

"V=V" Stop by stopping at the engaging rod

"/-\" Stop by yarn control device, yarn feed

"000" Stop by piece counter

">!" Stop by stop resistance

"-/)" Stop by position needle sensor

"%" Stop by fabric take-down

"PR" Stop by programming

"MS~" Machine stop (further causes of the stoppage)

"->/" Stop by shock stop motion

"V[ ]" Stop by racking error

"#<>" Total number of strokes

"#ML" Number of strokes at reduced speed

"ST" Number of produced fabric pieces

Data in "Report" window

Keys for calling up the report

Key Function

Call up the "Service" menu

Call up "Statistics" menu

Call up "Report" window

Save report

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for calling up the report

79
3 Producing with the knitting machine

Production

Calling up or saving report:

1. Call up the "Service" menu from the "Main menu".
2. Call up "Statistics" menu.
3. Call up the "Report" window.
4. To delete the operating data in the report, tap the "Report0" key.
- or -
➜ To save the operating data, tap the "Save Report" key.
 The data will be saved on the selected data carrier. It will be saved on
the data carrier that is set in the "Copy service data" window.
File name: STOLL machine number and the file name extension ".rep"
(e. g. "5320081234.rep").
5. Call up "Main menu".

Further information:
 Copying service data [182]
Shift counter

80
 Producing with the knitting machine 3

Production

Shift counter A total of five shift counters are available. A complete report is generated for
each shift. The table has the same structure as the report. Column "F" shows
the number of stop motions during the shift.
Shift counter window

"Shift counter" window

Keys for calling up the shift counter

Key Function

Call up the "Service" menu

Call up "Statistics" menu

Call up "Shift counter" window

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for calling up the shift counter

Calling up or saving shift counter:

1. Call up the "Service" menu from the "Main menu".
2. Call up "Statistics" menu.
3. Call up "Shift counter" window.
4. To activate a shift, tap the corresponding key in the "Shift On" field.
5. If data of an earlier shift are displayed, tap the corresponding key in the
"Delete shift" field (reset shift counter).
- or -
➜ To delete all shift counters at once, tap the key (1).
6. To save the shift data, tap the key (2).

81
3 Producing with the knitting machine

Production

 The data will be saved on the selected data carrier. It will be saved on
the data carrier that is set in the "Copy service data" window.
File name: STOLL machine number, date, time and the file name
extension ".sft" (e. g. "56600101234_31_10_08_1105.sft").
7. Call up "Main menu".

Further information:
 Copying service data [182]
Automatic shift changeover

82
 Producing with the knitting machine 3

Production

Automatic shift changeover Once the start time and the ending time of each shift have been entered, the
shift changeover automatically occurs after the entered time.

Keys for setting the automatic shift change

Key Function

Call up the "Service" menu

Call up "Statistics" menu

Call up "Shift counter" window

Call up "Additional function keys"

Call up the "Automatic shift change" window

Confirm entries

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for setting the automatic shift change

Setting the automatic shift change:

1. Call up the "Service" menu from the "Main menu".
2. Call up "Statistics" menu.
3. Call up "Shift counter" window.
4. Call up "Additional function keys".
5. Call up the "Automatic shift change" window.

83
3 Producing with the knitting machine

Production

6. Turn off the switch (1) so that no checking is carried out during the input
and no error messages are displayed.
7. Set the time.
Tap on the corresponding field and set the desired time using the slider.
8. Activate the checkbox of the desired shift.
9. Set the time for all the shifts; to do so repeat the steps 7 to 8.
10. Confirm entries.
11. Turn on the switch (1).
 The entries are automatically checked.
12. Call up "Main menu".

➜ The shift times may not overlap.

➜ The total time is to be 24 hours.
If the actual working time is less than 24 hours, then an
additional shift that covers the remaining time is to be
determined.
➜ Set the time and the time zone on the knitting machine if
necessary, see page [425].

 Configure machine [425]

 Configure machine [425]
Stopping machine

84
 Producing with the knitting machine 3

Production

3.3.3 Stopping machine

The knitting machine can be stopped in the following ways:
 Disengage the engaging rod
 Actuate the stop motion device, e.g. open a cover
 Stop the machine in the "Machine stop" window
Keys for stopping the knitting machine

Key Function

Call up "Main menu"

Call up "Machine stop" window

Reset conditions to standard values (Reset).

End setting process and save changes

Keys for stopping the knitting machine

Stop the knitting machine in the "Machine stop" window:

1. Call up "Machine stop" window from "Main menu".
Machine stop window

"Machine stop" window

2. If the knitting machine is to stop at the next reversing point of the carriage
assembly, tap the key "Machine stop".

85
3 Producing with the knitting machine

Production

3. If the knitting machine is to stop when a certain condition is fulfilled, select

a condition in the field "Conditional stop".

Stop in minutes Remaining running time in minutes

Stop in Sintral line When the set Sintral line is reached

Stop in Jacquard line When the set jacquard line is reached

Stop with #/RS When the counter or cycle counter has

reached the set value

Stop at fabric end When the fabric is knitted completely

4. Enter corresponding value for the condition. Confirm setting.

When a conditional stop is activated, a stop icon is displayed in

the status line.
Switch off machine at the end of work

86
 Producing with the knitting machine 3

Production

3.3.4 Switch off machine at the end of work

Do not switch-off machine at the main switch, but via the
"Machine Stop" window.
Reason: The computer will be shut down by current of the
battery pack when switching off the main switch.
Machine stop window

"Machine stop" window

Configuration of the automatic switching off in the Machine stop window

Switch in "Switch off machine" field Machine switches off automatically

"If stopped" Each time machine stops

"When piece counter = 0" After completing the set number of

pieces

"If fabric complete" after completing the current fabric

"If stopped: Waiting time" If the machine has stopped, then the
main switch is automatically switched off
at the end of the set time (in hours).

Configuration of the automatic switching off in the "Machine stop" window

Keys for configuring the automatic machine switching off

Key Function

Call up "Machine stop" window

Confirm entries

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for configuring the automatic machine switching off

87
3 Producing with the knitting machine

Production

Configuring automatic machine switching off:

1. Call up "Machine stop" window from "Main menu".
2. In the "Switch off machine" field activate the desired check box.
3. Confirm entries.
 When the machine switches off, the main switch moves from "1" to "0".
While switching off the main switch, the fabric remains tensioned in the fabric
take-down. This can lead to a visible stretching on a delicate fabric. To prevent
this, the fabric take-down can be released.

Further information:
 Setting machine parameters [178]
Monitoring the running time

88
 Producing with the knitting machine 3

Production

3.3.5 Monitoring the running time

In order to display the "Running time control" window it must be
activated in the "Knit report configuration" window. (BootOkc -
> Restart and Configuration -> Knit report configuration ->
Additional function keys)

The running times of sequence lists, sequences or orders, their individual

elements or individual patterns are recorded and displayed in the "Running
time control" window.
This adds extensive knitting process data to the commands MIN, MINSEQ
and MINSEQEL:
 Display of the running time of a pattern (sequence,sequence element,
order).
The current, last, minimum, maximum and average running times are
displayed respectively.
 Display of the expected remaining running time of a pattern (sequence,
sequence element, order).
 Display of the number of pieces that have been knitted and are still to be
knitted.
 Display of running time with or without loading and standby times.
Keys for the Running time control window

Key Function

Call up the "Service" window

Call up "Statistics" window

Call up the "Running time control" window

Call up the "Running time data sequence" window or the

"Running time data pattern" window

Call up the "Catalog running time data" window

Returning to the previous window

Call up the "Main menu"

Keys for the "Running time control" window

89
3 Producing with the knitting machine

Production

Open the "Running time 1. Call up the "Service" window in the "Main menu".
control" window
2. Call up the "Running time control" window in the "Service" window.
The "Running time control" window can alternatively be called up by using the
additional functions keys in the "Sequence menu" or "Sequence list" window.
Running time control window

"Running time control" window

Meaning of the elements in the Running time control window.

Field/ Meaning
Key

1 Total running time Display of the estimated total running time

2 gross Display of the total production time including loading

and standing times as well as manual interventions.

Net Display of the pure machine running time from SP (Start

Program) to piece finished.

3/4 No. Current number

Sequence/ Name of the pattern or the sequence

Sequence
element name

current Previous running time

last Running time of last knitted panel

min. Minimum running time.

max. Maximum running time

Ø Average running time

Fbcs Number of pieces knitted

Total Total number of pieces to be knitted.

Meaning of the elements in the "Running time control" window.

90
 Producing with the knitting machine 3

Production

Functional description for the

"Catalog running time data"
window

"Catalog running time data" window

Keys in the Catalog running time data window

Key Meaning

"Load" selected file and corresponding data

"Save" selected file in the current folder

"Delete file" that was selected

delete all files

"Update": Re-determine the contents of the current

folder

"Select current folder": Dialog box for selecting the

current storage folder

Data older than 6 weeks Delete (activated by default)

The data are deleted automatically when they get
older than 6 weeks. This saves storage space.

Keep:The files are not deleted.

Keys in the "Catalog running time data" window

1. Call up the "Service" window in the "Main menu".

2. Call up the "Running time control" window in the "Service" window.
3. Call up "Additional function keys".
4. Call up the "Catalog running time data" window.

91
3 Producing with the knitting machine

Production

5. Select the desired path with the "Current folder selection" key.
6. Select file.
7. Select action (load, save, delete).
8. If an additional prompt appears, tap the "1" key to confirm.
- or -
➜ Press the key "0" to cancel.
Display of the remaining Display of the expected remaining running time (net) of a pattern (sequence,
running time sequence element, order).
Depending on the file you selected in the "Running time control" window, the
title of the window changes.
 For a sequence, the title is "Running time data sequence".
 For a single pattern or a sequence element, the title is "Running time data
pattern".
Running time data sequence (Running time data pattern) window

"Running time data sequence" ("Running time data pattern") window

Data in the Running time data sequence window or in the Running time data pattern window

Entry Meaning

Name Name of sequence, sequence element or pattern

Remaining running time Display of the remaining running time

(average net remaining running time x fabrics which are still
to be knitted = remaining running time).
Format: Minutes, seconds

End time Display of the end time. Format: Date, time

Possible only after a run-through

Running time piece The shortest and the longest running times are displayed to
facilitate the evaluation of the expected remaining running
time.

Data in the "Running time data sequence" window or in the "Running time data pattern"
window

1. Call up the "Service" window in the "Main menu".

2. Call up the "Running time control" window in the "Service" window.
3. Select sequence, sequence element or pattern.
4. Call up "Additional function keys".

92
 Producing with the knitting machine 3

Production

5. Call up the "Running time data sequence" window or the " Running time
data pattern" window
 The "Running time data sequence" or the "Running time data pattern"
window is displayed with the associated data.
6. Close the window by using the "Return to previous window" key.

Further information:
 Carrying out restart with machine configuration (Restart and
Configuration) [454]
Measuring the running time

93
3 Producing with the knitting machine

Production

3.3.6 Measuring the running time

In order to display the "Running time control" window it must be
activated in the "Knit report configuration" window. (BootOkc -
> Restart and Configuration -> Knit report configuration ->
Additional function keys)

Manual measurements of running time can be carried out (stop watch

function) in the "Measurements of running time" window. The functions start,
stop and backup are deleted with the additional function keys.
Measurement of running time window

"Measurement of running time" window

Keys for the Measurement of running time window

Key Function

Call up the "Service" window

Call up "Statistics" window

Call up "Measurement of running time" window

Start measurement of running time (start)

Stop measurement of running time (Stop)

Set display at 0 (Reset)

Call up the "Main menu"

Keys for the "Measurement of running time" window

94
 Producing with the knitting machine 3

Producing with knitting orders (order menu)

Stopping the running time:

 A pattern file has to be loaded (1).
1. If necessary set display with "Reset" at 0.
2. Tap on "Start".
 In the "Running time" (2) field time that has passed since "Start" was
activated is shown in the format hh:mm.ss.
3. Starting the knitting process.
4. After the knitting process has been completed, tap"Stop".
 The stopped time is displayed in the "Running time" (2) field.

Further information:
 Carrying out restart with machine configuration (Restart and
Configuration) [454]
Producing with knitting orders (order menu)

95
3 Producing with the knitting machine

Producing with knitting orders (order menu)

3.4 Producing with knitting orders (order menu)

This chapter contains information on:
 Creating and managing order menu [96]
 Setting or changing counters for order menu [98]
 Saving/loading order menu [99]
Creating and managing order menu

3.4.1 Creating and managing order menu

Using the order menu, the various making-up sizes of an item (knitting
program) in a list are gather together and processed one after another. The
number of pieces and cycle counters are specified for each making-up size.
A knitting order (line) is processed until the number of fabrics in the "ST1" and
"ST2" columns are the same. The machine automatically switches over to the
next size and produces the set piece number. Knitting is carried out line by line
from top to bottom.
Order menu window

"Order menu" window

Data in the Order menu window

Column Data shown

1 Current order number

2 Name of the order

3 ("ST1") Number of pieces to be produced

4 ("ST2") Piece number already produced

5 to 11 Cycle counters and counters

12 ("#51") left border

13 ("#52") right border

Data in the "Order menu" window

96
 Producing with the knitting machine 3

Producing with knitting orders (order menu)

Keys for processing the Order menu

Key Function

Call up the "Order menu" window

Confirm entries

Call up "Additional function keys"

Reset values in column "ST2" (counter for the previously

produced pieces) to "0".

delete all information in the order menu

"Copy line" contents

"Insert line" contents

"Activate knitting order"

Keys for processing the "Order menu"

Processing the order menu:

1. Call up the "Order menu" window from the "Main menu".
2. Touch the line to be edited.
 The line appears at the bottom edge of the window.
3. Tap the fields of the selected line and enter the desired values and name.
- or -
➜ Call up "Additional function keys", copy contents of a line and insert it at
desired location again.
 If the order is active, "ORDER" appears in the status line.
Status line with active knitting order

Status line with active knitting order

Missing pieces of an order can be knitted afterward by

changing "ST2". When the last order is carried out, a check is
performed to determine whether any parts are still to be knitted.
The machine will not be stopped until all orders have been
completed.

97
3 Producing with the knitting machine

Producing with knitting orders (order menu)

3.4.2 Setting or changing counters for order menu

Setting or changing counters for order menu

In the Sintral program, the knitting of different pieces or sizes can be controlled
from a program via counters.
Keys for setting the counters

Key Function

Call up the "Order menu" window

End setting process and save changes

Keys for setting the counters

Use another cycle counter or counter:

Do not use the counters "#1" to "#39", as they are set to "0"
during start-up!

1. Call up the "Order menu" window from the "Main menu".

 The "Order menu" window appears.
2. Tap the desired column (cycle counter or counter) in the header of the
table.
 The setting window appears.
Setting window for changing cycle counters and counters

Setting window for changing cycle counters and counters

3. Assign a cycle counter or a counter.

4. Confirm entries.
5. The "Order menu" appears again.

The values of the cycle counters and counters are copied from
the machine at the beginning of an order. If they are modified
during knitting, they will take effect starting with the next piece.

98
 Producing with the knitting machine 3

Producing with knitting orders (order menu)

3.4.3 Saving/loading order menu

Saving/loading order menu

The information in the order menu can be saved, loaded and deleted in the
"Catalog order data" window.
Keys for the Catalog order data window

Key Function

Call up the "Order menu" window

Call up "Additional function keys"

Call up the "Catalog order data" window

Keys for the "Catalog order data" window

Functional description for working in the "Catalog order data":

1. Call up the "Order menu" window from the "Main menu".
2. Call up "Additional function keys".
3. Call up the "Catalog order data" window.
Catalog order data window

"Catalog order data" window

4. Set the desired path with one of the "Direct pattern folder selection" keys.
5. Select file.
6. Select action.
7. If an additional prompt appears, tap the "1" key to confirm,
- or -
➜ tap the "0" key to cancel.
8. Call up "Main menu".

99
3 Producing with the knitting machine

Producing with knitting orders (order menu)

Actions in "Catalog order

data" window

"Catalog order data" window

Keys in Catalog order data window

Key Function

"Direct folder selection":

predefined folder selection

"Load" selected file and corresponding pattern

elements

"Save" selected pattern elements in the current

folder

"Delete selected file"

"Display file" which is selected

"Update": Update the contents of the folder

Call up "Direct Help" for the key pressed next

Keys in "Catalog order data" window

Further information:
 Selecting the current folder [257]
 Displaying file in pattern editor [250]

100
 Producing with the knitting machine 3

Eliminating errors in the fabric

3.5 Eliminating errors in the fabric

Eliminating errors in the fabric

If the fabric piece is not to be completed properly, two options in the "Machine
start" window can be used.
Keys to interrupt a fabric

Key Function

Call up "Additional function keys"

The cycle currently being knitted is canceled and the other

cycles will be knitted as programmed.

The machine automatically begins with a new fabric if the

following conditions are met:

The racking device is in the home position

The yarn carriers are in starting position

The carriage direction allows beginning again.

As long as these conditions are not met, cycles will only be

knitted once.

Keys to interrupt a fabric

This chapter contains information on:

 Starting again after pressing off fabric [101]
 Threading up thread into yarn carrier [105]
 Removing fabric winding around fabric take-down [106]
Starting again after pressing off fabric

3.5.1 Starting again after pressing off fabric

Keys for starting again after pressing off fabric

Key Function

Call up "Machine start" window

Confirm entries

Keys for starting again after pressing off fabric

101
3 Producing with the knitting machine

Eliminating errors in the fabric

For machines without a After pressing off fabric, a problem arises where stitches are pressed off and
comb take-down therefore further knitting is not possible. To be able to continue, we
recommend calling up the "Picking-up after pressing-off" function. It allows you
to begin knitting even without fabric.
Normally, each knitting program includes the "Picking-up after pressing-off"
function. With older knitting programs, this function is found from line 950 on;
with the pattern workstation M1, it is activated via "#90".
The machine detects which pattern workstation was used to generate the
pattern. A knitting program of M1 contains the ID "<M1>" on line 1. Likewise,
program point "P.aft. press-off" in the "Machine start" window is adapted
automatically.
"Picking-up after pressing- 1. If threads are broken, thread them up again.
off" function with older
2. Call up "Machine start" window.
knitting programs (e.g.
SIRIX) 3. Call up the "Picking-up after pressing-off" function. Tap the "P.aft. press-
off from line" key for this purpose.
Machine start window

"Machine start" window

4. Start the machine with the engaging rod.

NOTICE
If you notice defective needles while picking-up after pressing-
off:
➜ Stop picking-up after pressing-off and replace the defective
needles.

5. When the fabric is long enough to be placed in the main take-down, or the
belt take-down, stop the machine with the engaging rod.
6. Open the main take-down or the belt take-down, place the fabric in the
main take-down or the belt take-down and close the take-down.
7. To start the knitting program, tap the "SP from line 1" key.
8. Start the machine with the engaging rod.

102
 Producing with the knitting machine 3

Eliminating errors in the fabric

"Picking-up after pressing- Requirements:

off" function with an M1
 The knitting program was generated on M1
pattern
 When the pattern is generated, the "P.aft. press-off" menu item is
activated
Machine start window

"Machine start" window

Setting Function

#90=0 "Picking-up after pressing-off" function is deactivated

#90=1 "Picking-up after pressing-off" function is activated. A specific row

number (gauge x 4) is knitted, depending on the gauge of the machine.
A total of 40 knitting rows are processed for a machine of gauge E10.

#90=n If this is too many knitting rows, "#90" can be set to another number.
Two knitting rows, similar to the " Picking-up after pressing-off"
function, are repeated as often as "#90" is set. Example: #90=15. A
total of 30 knitting rows (2 x 15) are processed.

#L, #R Setting the fabric width for the "Picking-up after pressing-off" function.
Standard setting: Starting width (#L=#51, #R=#52)

1. If threads are broken, thread them up again.

2. Call up "Machine start" window.
3. Call up the "Picking-up after pressing-off" function. Tap the "P.aft. press-
off M1 from line" key for this purpose.
4. Tap on the input fields. Enter values and confirm inputs.
5. Start the machine with the engaging rod.

NOTICE
If you notice defective needles while picking-up after pressing-
off:
➜ Stop picking-up after pressing-off and replace the defective
needles.

103
3 Producing with the knitting machine

Eliminating errors in the fabric

6. When the set number of knitting rows has been processed, the machine
stops automatically.
 The "Place fabric in fabric take-down" message appears.
7. When the fabric is long enough to be placed in the main take-down or the
belt take-down, open the take-down, place the fabric in the take-down and
close the take-down.
8. If the fabric cannot be placed in the main take-down or the belt take-down,
repeat points 2 through 8.
9. Start the machine with the engaging rod. The knitting program is started
automatically.

Further information:
 Threading up yarn [67]
Threading up thread into yarn carrier

104
 Producing with the knitting machine 3

Eliminating errors in the fabric

3.5.2 Threading up thread into yarn carrier

Keys for threading up thread into yarn carrier

Key Function

Call up "Manual interventions" window

Call up "Machine start" window

Keys for threading up thread into yarn carrier

1. Call up "Manual interventions" window.

2. Tap the (1) "YC bolt up" key.
3. Note the position of the yarn carrier and push the yarn carrier outward
below the carriage.
4. Thread-up yarn carrier.

You can switch on shortly the corresponding feed wheel (60

seconds) to ensure that the yarns run easily over the rollers.
Turn on the switch (2) or (3) for this.

5. Push the yarn carrier into its previous position again.

6. Tap the (4) "YC bolt bottom" key.
7. To move the carriage assembly slowly, pull the engaging rod slightly
toward the front.
8. When knitting slowly, make sure that the thread is laid in the needles.
9. To continue knitting, start the machine with the engaging rod.
- or -
➜ If the fabric is defective, call up the "Machine start" window and tap the "SP
from line 1" key to knit the fabric again.

105
3 Producing with the knitting machine

Eliminating errors in the fabric

3.5.3 Removing fabric winding around fabric take-down

Removing fabric winding around fabric take-down

Key for removing fabric winding around fabric take-down

Key Function

Call up "Take-down" window

Key for removing fabric winding around fabric take-down

Fabric winding in main take- 1. To remove the fabric winding, call up the "Take-down" window.
down
Take-down window

"Take-down" window

2. Tap the "Main take-down Op." key (1).

3. Pull the fabric smooth and free the take-down rollers from loose threads
and fabric remainders
- or -
➜ Press the "Main take-down Backw." (2) key until the fabric winding can be
removed.
4. Tap the "Main take-down Clo." key to close the main take-down.
5. To continue knitting, start the machine with the engaging rod.
Fabric winding in auxiliary 1. To remove the fabric winding, call up the "Take-down" window.
take-down
2. Remove needle bed or position it at an angle.
3. Tap the "Auxiliary take-down Op." key (3).
4. Press the "Auxiliary take-down backw." key until the fabric winding can be
removed.
5. Free the take-down rollers from loose threads and fabric remainders.
6. To close the auxiliary take-down, tap the "Auxiliary take-down Clo." key.
7. Screw on the needle bed again tight.
8. To continue knitting, start the machine with the engaging rod.

Further information:
 Remove needle bed or position it at an angle [355]

106
 Producing with the knitting machine 3

Eliminating errors in the fabric

3.6 Starting the machine after a fault

The knitting machine control constantly controls the yarn, the fabric, all
movable parts of machine, the motors and the electronic components. If an
error occurs, the machine stops. The signal light glows yellow, a pictogram
appears on the touch screen and a horn goes off. The most common error
causes are shown in the pictographs on the touch screen. If an error occurs,
one pictograph appears, and in the case of several errors the corresponding
pictographs appear consecutively. Errors which occur seldom (e. g. hardware
errors) are shown with a common pictograph.
Keys for starting machine after a fault

Key Function

"Information on error remedies"

A big and a small mark appear alternatively

Confirm error message

Keys for starting machine after a fault

Starting the machine after a fault:

1. To get detailed information on an error, tap the pictograph.
 The "Current messages" window appears. If the error can be remedied
by changing the settings, a function key appears in the middle of the
lower screen bar.
Current messages window

"Current messages" window

1 Pictograph 3 Text of message

2 Error code

2. To change the settings, tap the function key in the middle of the bottom line
of the screen and eliminate the error.
- or -
➜ If additional information is required, tap the desired error message and tap
the "Information on error remedies" key.
The possible fault causes and their remedy are displayed.

107
3 Producing with the knitting machine

Eliminating errors in the fabric

Further information for an error message

Further information for an error message

3. Eliminate the error.

4. Confirm the error message.
5. To continue knitting, start the machine with the engaging rod.
Message and tip retrospective view

108
 Producing with the knitting machine 3

Eliminating errors in the fabric

3.6.1 Message and tip retrospective view

Message history If an error occurs, it is not only displayed in the "Current messages" window,
it is also written into an additional memory. The error messages for the
respective day are saved in this memory.
A new memory is automatically selected for each day. There are a total of
seven memories so that the error messages of the last 7 days are available.
As a result, you can create an overview of which error messages have
occurred over the past several days.
When switching off the machine main switch, the error messages currently
present in the "Current messages" window are deleted, however the daily
memories with the error messages are not deleted.
Keys for calling up retrospective view of error messages

Key Function

Call up "Info" window

Call up "Additional function keys"

Call up message retrospective view:

Key for daily message retrospective view (the key for the message
retrospective view of the past day is shown in the picture)

Keys for calling up retrospective view of error messages

Call up message retrospective view:

1. Call up "Info" window.
2. Call up "Additional function keys".
3. Call up message retrospective view:
4. Call up "Additional function keys".
 A list of the keys of the message retrospective views appears.
List of message retrospective views

List of message retrospective views

5. Call up the desired daily retrospective view.

109
3 Producing with the knitting machine

Eliminating errors in the fabric

Tips history The tips for the error messages are also saved. As with the message
retrospective view, there are seven daily memories so that the tips of the last
7 days are available. As a result, you can create an overview of which tips
have occurred over the past several days.
Keys for displaying tip retrospective view

Key Function

Call up "Info" window

Call up "Additional function keys"

Display tip retrospective view

Key for daily tip retrospective view (the key for the tip
retrospective view of the past day is shown in the picture)

Keys for displaying tip retrospective view

Displaying tip retrospective view:

1. Call up "Info" window.
2. Call up "Additional function keys".
3. Display tip retrospective view.
4. Call up "Additional function keys".
 A list of the keys of the tip histories appears.
5. Call up the desired daily retrospective view.
Suppressing error messages

110
 Producing with the knitting machine 3

Eliminating errors in the fabric

3.6.2 Suppressing error messages

If, for example, a change is made to a knitting program and an error message
is present, the knitting program or other windows are covered by the current
error message. This may interrupt your work. To prevent this from happening,
the error message can be suppressed. Only the display on the touch screen
is suppressed, not the stop motion of the knitting machine.
Keys for suppressing error messages

Key Function

Call up "Additional function keys"

Suppress error messages ("Activating setting-up operation")

Returning to the previous window

"Setting-up operation active" symbol

Enabling error messages again ("Deactivating setting-up

operation")

Keys for suppressing error messages

111
3 Producing with the knitting machine

Eliminating errors in the fabric

Suppressing error messages 1. If an error message is displayed, call up the "Additional function keys"
button.
Suppressing error messages

Suppressing error messages

2. Press the "Suppress error message" key.

 The "Setting-up operation" message appears. The error messages are
suppressed until this is changed back. You are automatically brought
back to the previous window and can continue working.
3. As a reminder that the error messages are being suppressed, the "Setting-
up operation active" symbol appears in the upper right corner of each
window.
4. The currently active and suppressed error messages can be viewed. Tap
the "Setting-up operation active" symbol for this.
Enabling suppressed error 1. Touch "Setting-up operation active" symbol.
messages again
2. Call up "Additional function keys".
3. Press the "Enable error messages again" key.
Automatic enabling If there are no more stop motions, set-up mode is deactivated automatically.

112
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Basic settings

4 Adjusting knitting machine

Adjusting knitting machine

This chapter contains information on:

 Basic settings [113]
 Advanced adjustments [167]
 Working with files [228]
 Working with the Sintral editor [255]
 KnitLAN connection [262]
 Defining user profile [265]
Basic settings

4.1 Basic settings

This chapter contains the adjustment instructions and other information on:
 Adjusting carriage speed [114]
 Setting stitch tension [117]
 Adjusting yarn carriers [121]
 Staggering yarn carriers [129]
 Adjusting yarn tension [132]
 Adjusting yarn delivery on friction feed wheel * [134]
 Adjusting storage feed wheel MSF 3 * [136]
 Adjusting knitting areas [137]
 Adjusting take-down [138]
 Processing fabric take-down menu [141]
 Setting Cycle Counter and Quantity of Fabrics [145]
 Adjusting shape counters [146]
 Setting counters [148]
 Switch illumination on and off [149]
 Setting value for releasing thread clamp [150]
 Configuration symbol bar [151]
 Configuring monitoring [152]
 Setting up the pattern [156]
 Racking correction [164]
Adjusting carriage speed

113
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Basic settings

4.1.1 Adjusting carriage speed

Different carriage speeds can be entered for different knitting situations. The
indirect carriage speed only becomes effective when it is slower than the
normal speed.
Keys for entering the carriage speed

Key Function

Call up "Carriage speed" window

Confirm entries

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for entering the carriage speed

Adjusting carriage speed:

1. Call up the "Carriage speed" window.
2. Tap the input fields for the carriage speed and enter the desired values.
3. Confirm entries.
4. Call up "Main menu".

Further information:
 Setting machine parameters [176]
 Economic production and the influencing factors [1]

114
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Basic settings

Carriage speed (Setup2)

Carriage speed
Carriage speed window
(Setup2)

"Carriage speed" window

Carriage speed Setup2

Explanation Value range (meters/

second)

MSECK Carriage speed for small knots over m rows, Minimum value: 0.05
standard: 1 row Maximum value: 1.20
Step width: 0.05

MSEC Speed Minimum value: 0.05

(normal speed) Maximum value: 1.20
Step width: 0.05

MSEC0 Speed for empty rows (S0) Minimum value: 0.05

Maximum value: 1.40
Step width: 0.05

MSEC1 Speed for transfer rows Minimum value: 0.05

Maximum value: 1.20
Step width: 0.05

MSECI Speed with Intarsia Yarn Carrier Minimum value: 0.05

(CMS ADF-3: Specification is not taken into Maximum value: 1.00
account) (CMS-C: 0.7)
Step width: 0.05

MSECC Speed outside the needle bed when the Minimum value: 0.05
yarn carrier is brought in the clamp or taken Maximum value: 0.50
out of the clamp. Step width: 0.05

MSEC2-20 Speed for knitting rows Minimum value: 0.05

Maximum value: 1.20
Step width: 0.05

Comment Comment ASCII Characters

115
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Basic settings

Carriage speed (Setup1)

Carriage speed (Setup1)

C
"Carriage speed" window
Input fields in Carriage speed window

Input field Meaning Input values

"Normal MSEC" Carriage speed with normal yarn 0.05 to 1.20 m/s
carriers Step width: 0.05

"Intarsia MSECI" Carriage speed with intarsia yarn 0.05 to 1.00 m/s
carriers Step width: 0.05

"Knot selectable Carriage speed after small knots 0.05 to 1.20 m/s
MSECK" Step width: 0.05

"for row (s)" Number of rows with reduced 1 to 12 rows

carriage speed after small knots Step width: 1

"MSECC" Carriage speed outside the needle 0.05 to 0.50 m/s

bed when the yarn carrier is Step width: 0.05
brought in the clamp or taken out of
the clamp.

"MSECNPJ=n" Display of the carriage speed for

NPJ

"MSEC0=n" Indirect carriage speed "n" with "n" = 0.05 to 1.40 m/s
empty rows ("S0") Step width: 0.05

"MSEC1=n" Indirect carriage speed "n" with "n" = 0.05 to 1.20 m/s
transfer rows Step width: 0.05

"MSEC2=n" to Indirect carriage speed "n" with "n" = 0.05 to 1.20 m/s
"MSEC9=n" knitting rows Step width: 0.05

Input fields in "Carriage speed" window

Setting stitch tension

116
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Basic settings

4.1.2 Setting stitch tension

The stitch tension and thus the stitch size depend on the stitch cam values. It
is possible to specify either the stitch tension as an absolute value or the stitch
length.
Keys for setting the stitch tension

Key Function

Call up "Stitch length" window

Confirm entries

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for setting the stitch tension

Setting stitch tension:

1. Call up the "Stitch length" window.
2. With Setup1: Set the switch in the "NP value/(mm)" field to "NP value" or
"(mm)".
3. With Setup1 and Setup2:
Tap on the input field that is to be edited and enter the value.
4. Confirm entries.
5. Call up "Main menu".

Further information:
 Stitch Tension Range [2]
 Stitch lengths [5]
 Economic production and the influencing factors [1]
Stitch tension (Setup2)

117
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Basic settings

Stitch tension (Setup2)

NP 1-100 (tab) stp

Explanation Value range

NPK Correction for all stitch cams Minimum value: -2

Maximum value: 2
Step width: 0.05

NP1 - Stitch cam position 1 to 100

NP100

Value Stitch length in NP values or mm

Value [mm] Specification in NP values. Minimum value: 6.5

Maximum value: 22.5
Step width: 0.05

Value [mm] Settings in millimeters. Minimum value: 2.20

Setting the yarn length per stitch (Yarn Length Maximum value:
Control). 33.00
Step width: 0.01

Comment Comment ASCII Characters

Further information:
 Stitch Tension Range [2]
 Stitch lengths [5]
 Economic production and the influencing factors [1]
NPR (tab)

118
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Basic settings

NPR (tab) Correction of the stitch cam position for the right carriage (for tandem
operation only)

Explanation Value range

NPR Correction of the stitch cam position for the

right carriage

Front Correction value depending on system in front Minimum value: -2

or rear and on carriage direction to the left or to Maximum value: 2
Rear the right Step width: 0.05
<<

>>

NPxR Correction value for the stitch cam position x

(1-100) of the right carriage

Value Specification in NP values. Minimum value: -2

Maximum value: 2
Step width: 0.05

Value [mm] Specification in millimeters. Minimum value: -5.0

Maximum value: 5.0
Step width: 0.01

Comment Comment ASCII Characters

Further information:
 Table Tools [13]
 File tools [15]
 Helpers for Input [9]
 Overview of the Setup2 Editor of the CMS [7]
 Setup Data [1]
 Comparing Setup1 to Setup2 [3]
Stitch tension (Setup1)

119
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Basic settings

Stitch tension (Setup1)

Stitch length window

"Stitch length" window

Stitch fields
Input lengthfor
(Setup1)
setting the
Normal
stitchand
tension
Tandem machine

Edit box Meaning

"NP#" Stitch cam value (NP1-NP 100). Step width: 0.05.

Call up NP31-NP100 with the help of the additional
function keys.

"NPK" Stitch cam correction value for all stitch cam

positions. Step width: 0.05.

"NPR <<" With tandem operation: Stitch cam correction

values (front - back) from right to left carriage. Step
width: 0.05. Carriage direction to the left.

"NPR >>" With tandem operation: Stitch cam correction

values (front - back) from right to left carriage. Step
width: 0.05. Carriage direction to the right.

"NP value" Setting stitch tension in NP values

"(mm)" Setting the yarn length per stitch

Input fields for setting the stitch tension

Further information:
 Stitch Tension Range [2]
 Stitch lengths [5]
 Economic production and the influencing factors [1]

120
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Basic settings

4.1.3 Adjusting yarn carriers

Adjusting yarn carriers

Adjusting yarn carriers

Adjusting yarn carriers

Keys for adjusting the yarn carriers

Key Function

Call up the "Yarn carrier" window

Call up the "Adjusting yarn carrier" window

Call up "Additional function keys"

Call up desired knitting area

Confirm entries

Keys for adjusting the yarn carriers

Yarn carrier window

"Yarn carrier" window

121
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Basic settings

Data in the Yarn carrier window

Column Data shown

Y Specification of yarn carrier

SEN Specification of SEN area in which yarn carrier works

Y: =n Specification of yarn type

0/1 Yarn type switched on or off

YG Home position of the yarn carrier for needle. . .

YP Current yarn carrier position for needle. . .

Ka Yarn carrier correction value (left) for not swiveled yarn carrier if the
yarn carrier is positioned within the fabric.
Value range: -120...0...120 . Step width: 0.5=1/32 inch=0.8 mm

Kb Yarn carrier correction value (right) for not swiveled yarn carrier if the
yarn carrier is positioned within the fabric.
Value range: -120...0...120 . Step width: 0.5=1/32 inch=0.8 mm

K<I>a Intarsia yarn carrier correction value (left) for swiveled intarsia yarn
carrier
Value range: -120...0...120 . Step width: 0.5=1/32 inch=0.8 mm

K<I>b Intarsia yarn carrier correction value (right) for intarsia swiveled yarn
carrier
Value range: -120...0...120 . Step width: 0.5=1/32 inch=0.8 mm

Type Display of the yarn carrier type:

Normal yarn carrier (N), plating yarn carrier (P), double bow yarn
carrier (PA), intarsia yarn carrier (I)

I<> Swiveling direction of intarsia yarn carrier

Ba Display of the yarn carrier braking value a (left)

Bb Display of the yarn carrier braking value b (right)

Ua Adjust the engaging width a (left) (when plating with normal yarn
carriers).

Ub Adjust the engaging width b (right) (when plating with normal yarn
carriers).

MSEC Carriage speed when this yarn carrier is used (technical fabrics)

V Number of selvedge needles until first knitting needle (technical

fabrics)

YDF Additional distance of yarn carrier from fabric selvedge when fully
fashion knitting.
Value range: 1-20 needles.

Data in the "Yarn carrier" window

122
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Basic settings

Adjusting yarn carriers:

1. Call up the "Yarn carrier" window.
 In the default setting the yarn carriers are displayed in all knitting areas
(SEN areas).
2. If only the yarn carriers of a certain SEN area are to be displayed, then call
up "additional function keys" and tap the desired SEN area.
3. Tap the line (yarn carrier) that is to be processed.
 The number of the yarn carrier appears at the bottom edge of the
window, on the right of the "Adjusting yarn carriers" key.
4. Tap the "Adjusting yarn carriers" key.
5. Tap on the input field that is to be edited and enter the value.
6. Confirm entries.
7. Return to the "Yarn carrier" window.

Further information:
 Intarsia yarn carrier - Adjust stopping point (basic setting, braking value) *
[199]
Adjusting yarn carriers (Setup2)

123
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Basic settings

Adjusting yarn carriers

(Setup2)

Keys for adjusting the yarn carriers

Key Function

Confirm entries

Return to the "Yarn carrier" window

Keys for adjusting the yarn carriers

Setup2-YC/YCI

Explanation Value range

YC Direct yarn carrier correction

Collapse (reduced display)
Expand (expanded display)

YCI Yarn carrier correction index YCI1 to YCI20

Collapse (reduced display)
Expand (expanded display)

Y Corrections of yarn carrier 1A to 8D

Ka Yarn carrier correction value (left) for not Minimum value: -120
swiveled yarn carrier if the yarn carrier is Maximum value: 120
positioned within the fabric. Step width:
0.5=1/32 inch=0.8 mm

Kb Yarn carrier correction value (right) for not Minimum value: -120
swiveled yarn carrier if the yarn carrier is Maximum value: 120
positioned within the fabric. Step width:
0.5=1/32 inch=0.8 mm

K<I>a Intarsia yarn carrier correction value (left) for Minimum value: -120
swiveled intarsia yarn carrier Maximum value: 120
Step width:
0.5=1/32 inch=0.8 mm

K<I>b Intarsia yarn carrier correction value (right) Minimum value: -120
for intarsia swiveled yarn carrier Maximum value: 120
Step width:
0.5=1/32 inch=0.8 mm

MSEC Carriage speed if this yarn carrier is used

(technical fabrics).

124
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Basic settings

Explanation Value range

V Reduce carriage speed (n) for yarn carrier (n

= 0..3). The speed is reduced to 75% from
carriage reversal point until achievement of
the operating range of the yarn carrier.
Finally it can be chosen between the
following possibilities:
◆ 1 = Acceleration up to 100%
◆ 2 = Braking down to 50%, maintain
speed over a fabric width of 2
inches, acceleration up to 100%
◆ 3 = Braking down to 50%, maintain
speed over a fabric width of 5
inches, acceleration up to 100%
◆ 0 = Cancelling out of carriage speed
specific to yarn carrier

Comment Comment ASCII Characters

Change engaging width (Ua, Ub)

For this call up the Y:Ua-b tab.

Further information:
 Intarsia yarn carrier - Adjust stopping point (basic setting, braking value) *
[199]
Adjusting yarn carriers (Setup1)

125
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Basic settings

Adjusting yarn carriers

Adjust yarn carriers window

(Setup1)

"Adjust yarn carriers" window

Key Function

Save changes and end setting process

End setting process without saving changes

Return to the "Yarn carrier" window

Further information:
 Intarsia yarn carrier - Adjust stopping point (basic setting, braking value) *
[199]
Tandem machine: Correction of the yarn carriers in the right carriage (Setup1, Setup2)

126
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Basic settings

Tandem machine: Correction If the carriages have a wide coupling, the stopping positions of the yarn
of the yarn carriers in the carriers in the right carriage can be corrected (column "Right offset"). It may,
right carriage (Setup1, for example, be necessary to carry out corrections at very fine fabrics or at
special intarsia patterns. Possible reasons for a correction:
Setup2)
 different wear of the yarn carriers used in the left and right carriages
 different wear of the yarn carrier rails
 different lubrication
 different directions of the yarn feed in the left and right carriages
Yarn carrier correction window during tandem operation

"Yarn carrier correction" window during tandem operation

Data in the Yarn carrier correction window

Column Data shown

"YL" Specification of the yarn carrier in the left carriage.

"YR" Specification of the yarn carrier in the right carriage.

"Oa" Right carriage during tandem operation: Yarn carrier

correction value a (stopping position on the left).

Value range: -8...0...8 . Step width: 0.5=1/32 inch=0.8 mm

The correction value refers to the stop value of the left

carriage.

"-b" Right carriage during tandem operation: Yarn carrier

correction value b (stopping position on the right).

Value range: -8...0...8 . Step width: 0.5=1/32 inch=0.8 mm

Data in the "Yarn carrier correction" window

127
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Basic settings

Keys for correcting the yarn carriers

Key Function

Call up the "Yarn carrier" window

Call up "Additional function keys"

Call up the "Yarn carrier correction" window

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for correcting the yarn carriers

Enter correction of a yarn carrier:

1. Call up the "Yarn carrier" window from the "Main menu".
2. Call up "Additional function keys".
3. Call up the "Yarn carrier correction" window.
4. Enter new values for the yarn carrier.
5. Confirm entries.
6. Call up "Main menu".

The correction values are not pattern-dependent, but rather

machine-dependent. These data are therefore not deleted
when a new knitting program is loaded. The correction values
always remain saved, even when the operating system is
loaded again. If the correction is no longer required, the
correction values have to be reset to "0" manually.
Staggering yarn carriers

128
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Basic settings

4.1.4 Staggering yarn carriers

Adjust the staggering of the yarn carriers at the fabric selvedge.
Keys for staggering the yarn carriers

Key Function

Call up the "Yarn carrier" window

Call up "Additional function keys"

Call up "YC staggering" window

Confirm entries

Keys for staggering the yarn carriers

Staggering the yarn carriers:

1. Call up the "Yarn carrier" window.
2. Call up "Additional function keys".
3. Call up the "YC staggering" window.
4. Tap on the input field that is to be edited and enter the value.
5. Confirm entries.
Staggering yarn carriers (Setup2)

Staggering yarn carriers

YC staggering window

(Setup2)

"YC staggering" window

129
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Basic settings

The yarn carrier staggering is displayed in the window. If you want to change
the staggering, call up the Setup2 editor.

YD/YDI (Setup2)

Explanation Value range

YD Distance between yarn carriers and fabric

selvedge
Collapse (reduced display)
Expand (expanded display)

YD1 Distance of the yarn carriers on track 1 to 8 Minimum value: 0

: from the left and right fabric selvedge Maximum value: 160
YD8 Step width:
0.5=1/32 inch=0.8 mm

YDI Additional, indirect yarn carrier staggering Minimum value: 0

(YDI1 to YDI20) Maximum value: 160
Collapse (reduced display) Step width:
Expand (expanded display) 0.5=1/32 inch=0.8 mm

Comment Comment ASCII Characters

Staggering yarn carriers

Keys for staggering the yarn carriers

(Setup2) Key Function

Call up the Setup2 Editor

Confirm entries

return to the "YC staggering" window

Keys for staggering the yarn carriers

1. In the "YC staggering" window call up the Setup2 editor

2. Tap on the input field that is to be edited and enter the value.
3. Confirm entries.
4. Return to the "YC staggering" window.

130
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Basic settings

Staggering yarn carriers

Staggering
YC yarnwindow
staggering carriers (Setup1)

(Setup1)

"YC staggering" window

1. Tap the input fields next to the yarn carriers and enter the values.
Value range: 0-160. Step width: 0.5=1/32 inch=0.8 mm
2. Confirm entries.
Adjusting yarn tension

131
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Basic settings

4.1.5 Adjusting yarn tension

Adjustment of yarn tension

Adjustment of yarn tension

The adjustment of yarn tension is done in the following sequence:

1. Lateral yarn tensioner: Adjusting the restoring force on the linear regulator
(2).
2. Opening permanent brake
3. Adjusting yarn control device
4. Adjusting permanent brake
5. Lateral yarn tensioner: Adjusting the yarn tensioning path on the lock
segment (3)

This sequence should help you to find the optimal adjustment

of the yarn tension. Depending upon the type of fabric and the
yarn characteristics it is possible that you may have to change
the adjustments many times before you find the optimal
adjustment.
These adjustments are the easiest to undertake while the
machine is knitting.
Make sure that the braking and restoring force on all elements
is set at the lowest possible.

Adjusting restoring force 1. Remove lateral yarn tensioner (1) from the stay.
2. Linear regulator (2) is to be set in a manner that the lateral yarn tensioner
has enough strength to hold the thread tensioned always.
3. Control the setting while the machine is knitting.
In this case the thread must not sag rather it should always be tensioned
by the yarn tensioner.

132
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Basic settings

Opening permanent brake ➜ Open the rotary knob (5) of the permanent brake (4) as wide as possible.
Adjusting yarn control device 1. Yarn brake (8) to be adjusted in such a manner that the thread break
control does not move too much underneath such that the stop impulse
gets released.

2. Adjust knot detectors for large knots (7) and for small knots (9) depending
on yarn thickness and knots so, that they are triggered by an undesirable
knot size.
Adjusting permanent brake ➜ Adjust the permanent brakes (4) in such a manner that the lateral yarn
tensioner swivels only a bit (approx. 25 degrees), when the yarn guide
achieves it's left or right stopping position.
If a thread loop is formed between the friction feed wheel and the
permanent brake then the thread brake on the yarn control device should
be set a little stronger and the permanent brake should be set a little
weaker.
Set the maximum slack take- If desired the maximum slack take-up path of the yarn tensioner can be set
up path of the yarn tensioner from 80 to 35 degrees. This will be set with the lock segment (3). It has four
lock positions (A – D).

Position max. angle Explanation

A 80 Home position of the lock segment.

Active thread clamp in action
Largest yarn tensioning path

B 65 Active thread clamp in action

C 50 Active thread clamp in action

D 35 Active thread clamp out of action

Smallest yarn tensioning path
Adjusting yarn delivery on friction feed wheel *

133
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Basic settings

4.1.6 Adjusting yarn delivery on friction feed wheel *

The friction rollers have a constant peripheral speed and feed the maximum
amount of thread consumed by the knitting machine. To adjust the yarn
delivery to the actual consumption, the winding angle of the thread is modified.
If the winding angle is enlarged, then the friction force increases and the
friction feed wheel delivers more thread. The friction feed wheel should always
feed somewhat more thread than the yarn carriers consume.
Depending on machine model and component type, there are different models
of friction feed wheels.
Type 1
Adjusting the yarn delivery on the friction feed wheel

Adjusting the yarn delivery on the friction feed wheel

➜ If the yarn delivery is to be reduced, then lead the yarn through the eyelet
(1).
Type 2
Adjusting the yarn delivery on the friction feed wheel

Adjusting the yarn delivery on the friction feed wheel

Adjusting the yarn delivery:

1. Push the fixing device (1) toward the front.
2. If the yarn delivery is to be increased, turn the swivel bow (2) upward.
- or -
➜ If the yarn delivery is to be reduced, turn the swivel bow (2) downward.
3. Push the fixing device (1) toward the rear.
4. Switch on the knitting machine and start knitting.
5. Check the yarn delivery.
6. Set all swivel bows consecutively with the scale (3) as described in steps
1 to 5.

134
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Basic settings

For very coarse yarn (valid The distance between stop motion rail and friction roller is too small so that the
for all types) yarn comes into contact with the stop motion rail and releases a stop impulse,
then the machine stops.

Modifying the distance:

1. Remove the screw (5) and the stop motion rail (4).
Set the distance between stop motion rail and friction roller

Set the distance between stop motion rail and friction roller

2. Turn the stop motion rail by 180 degrees and assembly it again.
 A bigger distance (6) is between the stop motion rail and the friction roller.

Further information:
 Symbols in this document [3]
 Threading up threads into friction feed wheel * [13]
Adjusting storage feed wheel MSF 3 *

135
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Basic settings

4.1.7 Adjusting storage feed wheel MSF 3 *

Storage feed wheel MSF 3

Storage feed wheel MSF 3

The optimal yarn tension depends on the yarn and the pattern. This
adjustment is the easiest to undertake while the machine is knitting.

Adjusting the yarn tension:

1. Adjust the yarn tension at the rotary knob (1):
 The contact pressure of the membrane (2) is changed this way.
2. Check: No thread loop may be formed between the feed wheel and the
safety door.
3. The rotary knob has to engage in the brake (3).
You will find further information on the storage feed wheel MSF 3 in the
operating instructions which are enclosed.

Further information:
 Symbols in this document [3]
Adjusting knitting areas

136
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Basic settings

4.1.8 Adjusting knitting areas

In the Sintral program up to four knitting areas (SEN areas) can be defined and
switched on and off separately. If the knitting areas are not defined in the
Sintral program, they can be adjusted in the "Knitting areas" window.
Keys for adjusting the knitting areas

Key Function

Call up "Knitting areas" window

Confirm entries

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for adjusting the knitting areas

1. Call up the "Knitting areas" window.

Knitting areas window

"Knitting areas" window

2. Assign each knitting area ("SEN") a needle area.

3. Confirm entries.
 The assigned areas are graphically shown.
4. To switch individual knitting areas on or off, tap the switch in the "Selection
(manual)" column.
5. Call up "Main menu".

137
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Basic settings

4.1.9 Adjusting take-down

Adjusting take-down

Setting fabric take-down values

Setting fabric take-down

Keys for setting the fabric take-down values

values Key Function

Call up "Take-down" window

Confirm entries

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for setting the fabric take-down values

Setting the fabric take-down values:

1. Call up the "Take-down" window.
 The current fabric take-down values are shown.
Take-down window

"Take-down" window

2. To enter the fabric take-down values, tap the input fields and enter the
desired values.
3. Confirm entries.

Further information:
 Economic production and the influencing factors [1]

138
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Basic settings

Adjusting the control of the During production, the control of knitting machine compares the current values
fabric take-down: with threshold values. If a threshold value is exceeded, the knitting machine
stops and displays a fault.
Keys for adjusting fabric take-down control

Key Function

Call up "Additional function keys"

Call up "Fabric take-down Control" window

Confirm entries

Return to "Take-down" window

Keys for adjusting fabric take-down control

Adjusting fabric take-down control:

1. Call up the "additional function keys" in the "Take-down" window.
2. Call up the "Fabric take-down Control" window.
Fabric take-down Control window

"Fabric take-down Control" window

3. Enter the threshold values.

4. Confirm entries.
5. Return to the "Take-down" window.
Control comb take-down

139
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Basic settings

Control comb take-down It is always only possible to carry out one comb function.
Keys for controlling comb take-down

Key Function

Call up "Additional function keys"

Call up "Comb" window

Return to "Take-down" window

Keys for controlling comb take-down

Control comb take-down:

1. Call up the "additional function keys" in the "Take-down" window.
2. Call up the "Comb" window.
Comb window

"Comb" window

3. To activate a function, touch a key.

4. Return to the "Take-down" window.
Processing fabric take-down menu

140
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Basic settings

4.1.10 Processing fabric take-down menu

In the fabric take-down menu (WMF menu), the fabric take-down commands
are combined into a single function which concerns a knitting situation.
Keys for adjusting the fabric take-down menu

Key Function

Call up "Take-down" window

Call up "Additional function keys"

Call up "WMF menu" window

Confirm entries

Keys for adjusting the fabric take-down menu

Adjusting fabric take-down menu:

1. Call up the "additional function keys" in the "Take-down" window.
2. Call up the "WMF menu" window.
3. Touch the line to be edited.
 The line appears at the bottom edge of the window.
4. Tap the fields of the selected line and enter the desired values.
- or -
➜ Copy contents of a line and insert at desired location again.
5. Confirm entries.
6. Return to the "Take-down" window.
Save fabric take-down menu If you save the pattern, the changes in the fabric take-down menu are saved
in the setup file.

Further information:
 Working with files, libraries and folders [238]
Fabric take-down menu (Setup2)

141
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Basic settings

Fabric take-down menu

(Setup2)

WMF (Setup2)

Explanation Value range

WMF… Fabric take-down function WMF1 to WMF50

WM min Minimum fabric take-down value Minimum value: 0

(with Fully Fashion) Maximum value: 31.5
Step width: 0.1

WM max Maximum fabric take-down value Minimum value: 0

(value must always be specified) Maximum value: 31.5
Step width: 0.1

N min Minimum quantity of needles Minimum value: 0

(with Fully Fashion) Maximum value: Needle
number of the CMS
Step width: 1

N max Maximum quantity of needles Minimum value: 0

(with Fully Fashion) Maximum value: Needle
number of the CMS
Step width: 1

WMI Fabric take-down impulse Minimum value: 0

Maximum value: 15
Step width: 1

WM^ Open the brake of the active take-down No turning back: 0

system (main take-down or comb take- Minimum value: 9
down) for a maximum of 2.5 seconds, Maximum value: 120
take-down roller or comb take-down turn Step width: 1
back by a maximum number of the
indicated degrees (depending on the
fabric tension and the fabric take-down
value).
CMS 5xx, 7xx, 8xx, CMS ADF-3: 9-60
degrees
CMS 9xx: 9-120 degrees

If either of both the conditions is fulfilled,

then the brake is closed again.
Fabric take-down value (n=0-31.5)
becomes active again at the reversion.

142
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Basic settings

Explanation Value range

WMC Set the speed control of the active take- Minimum value: 0
down system (main take-down or comb Maximum value: 32
take-down) to the value n (0-32). If the Step width: 1
take-down system turns too quickly, the
machine is stopped.
0= no stop motion, 1= insensitive, 32=
very sensitive

WM+C Monitoring of main take-down. If the take- Minimum value: 0

down has not been used after n (0-100) Maximum value: 100
knitting rows, the machine will stop. (0 = Step width: 1
no supervision)

WMK+C Controlling the comb. If the comb has not Minimum value: 0
moved after n (0-100) knitting rows, the Maximum value: 100
machine will stop. (0 = no supervision) Step width: 1

Comment Comment ASCII Characters

Further information:
 Working with files, libraries and folders [238]
Fabric take-down menu (Setup1)

143
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Basic settings

Fabric take-down menu

(Setup1)

Keys for adjusting the fabric take-down menu

Key Function

Delete all information in the fabric take-down menu

"Copy line" contents

"Insert line" contents

Confirm entries

Return to "Take-down" window

Keys for adjusting the fabric take-down menu

Further information:
 Working with files, libraries and folders [238]
Processing fabric take-down menu WBF

144
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Basic settings

4.1.12 Setting Cycle Counter and Quantity of Fabrics

The cycle counter specifies how often a pattern area is to be repeated. Which
cycle counter controls which pattern area is defined in the knitting program.
The piece number specifies how many pieces are to be knitted. During
production, the piece number is decreased by "1" as soon as a complete piece
has been produced.
Keys for adjusting the cycle counter and the piece number

Key Function

Call up the "Cycle counters & counters" window

Confirm entries

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for adjusting the cycle counter and the piece number

Setting cycle counter and piece number:

1. Call up the "Cycle counters & counters" window.
Cycle counters & counters window

"Cycle counters & counters" window

2. Set the cycle counters "RS1" to "RS19".

3. Set the piece number.
4. Confirm entries.
5. Call up "Main menu".
Adjusting shape counters

145
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Basic settings

4.1.13 Adjusting shape counters

During fully fashion knitting the fabric selvedges are controlled by the shape
counters. When the values of the shape counters changes, then the fabric
becomes broader or narrower. The alteration in the fabric width is mentioned
in the knitting program. The shape counters should be changed manually only
in exceptional cases, for example during designing.
Keys for setting the shape counters

Key Function

Call up the "Cycle counters & counters" window

Call up "Additional function keys"

Call up "Shape counters" window

Confirm entries

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for setting the shape counters

Setting the shape counters:

1. Call up the "Cycle counters & counters" window.
2. Call up "Additional function keys".
3. Call up "Shape counters" window.
Shape counters window

"Shape counters" window

4. Set the counters to the desired value.

5. Confirm entries.

146
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Basic settings

6. Call up "Main menu".

In the case of single-piece knitting, up to 4 shape counters can be used, in the
case of double-piece knitting up to 8 shape counters.

Shape Counters for

counter the start-
width

#L #51

#R #52

#LM #53

#RM #54

#L1 #55

#R1 #56

#LM1 #57

#RM1 #58

#L2 #59

#R2 #60

#LM2 #61

#RM2 #62

The counters for start-width can be changed only in the knitting program or in
the pattern preparation unit.
Setting counters

147
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Basic settings

4.1.14 Setting counters

In addition to the piece counter and the cycle counters, there are also other
counters. On the one hand, they can be used in the knitting program, e.g. to
request conditions. On the other hand, they indicate various machine states.
Buttons for setting the counters

Key Function

Call up the "Cycle counters & counters" window

Call up "Additional function keys"

Call up desired counter group

Call up "Main menu"

Buttons for setting the counters

Setting counters:
1. Call up the "Cycle counters & counters" window.
2. Call up "Additional function keys".
3. Tap the key for the desired counter group.
4. Set counter to the desired value.
5. Call up "Main menu".
Switch illumination on and off

148
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Basic settings

4.1.15 Switch illumination on and off

Keys for switching the lighting on and off

Key Function

Call up "Machine start" window

Call up "Additional function keys"

Switch on lighting

Switch off lighting

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for switching the lighting on and off

Switch the lighting on and off:

1. Call up "Machine start" window.
2. Call up "Additional function keys".
3. Switch on the lighting.
- or -
➜ Switch off the lighting.
4. Call up "Main menu".
Automatic switching off of the If the lighting is switched on, then you can set the duty cycle (window "Machine
lighting parameters").
Standard setting: Function active, duty cycle: 10 minutes (standard), value
range: 0...60 minutes

With closed cover hoods If the lighting is switched on, then it will switch off
automatically at the end of the set time.

When opening and closing The lighting is switched on automatically when

the cover hoods opening the covers.

If the covers are closed again, then it is checked

whether the duty cycle has been reached.

Yes The lighting will be switched off.

No The lighting will continue switched on until the

remaining time is finished

Further information:
 Setting machine parameters [176]
Setting value for releasing thread clamp

149
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Basic settings

4.1.16 Setting value for releasing thread clamp

The thread clamping and cutting device holds the thread of a yarn carrier not
used for knitting at the moment. When the yarn carrier is used again, the
carriage opens the clamping device after knitting a few rows and the yarn end
is released. The clamp is released after 19 knitting rows as standard. This
value can be set individually for each yarn carrier in the "Release clamps"
window.
Release clamps window

"Release clamps" window

Keys for entering the value for releasing thread clamp

Key Function

Call up "Release clamps" window

Confirm entries

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for entering the value for releasing thread clamp

Setting value for releasing thread clamp:

1. Call up the "Release clamps" window from the "Main menu".
2. Tap the input field of the corresponding yarn carrier and enter a value. In
the default setting the value "20" which corresponds to 19 knitting rows
(value - 1) is set.
3. Confirm entries.
4. Call up "Main menu".
Configuration symbol bar

150
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Basic settings

4.1.17 Configuration symbol bar

The configurable toolbar allows you to jump directly to the individual windows
without having to take the "Detour" through the main menu or using the
"Additional functions" key. The toolbar is the headline or title bar of a window.
You can include the symbols of those windows which you use most often in
the toolbar.
The symbols can be called up in any window. To do so, tap the symbol on the
top left of the title bar and the symbols are displayed. (Exception: Tap on "Go
to mask" key in SINTRAL editor). To close the symbols again, tap the empty
field next to them.
Configuration toolbar Window

"Configuration toolbar" Window

Field/Key Function

1 List of the windows which can be selected for the toolbar.

2 The toolbar contains the symbols of the selected windows. In the

above figure the carriage speed has been selected.

3 Key used to set a symbol in the toolbar (2).

4 Key used to remove a symbol from the toolbar (2).

5 Change the position of a symbol in the toolbar (2). To do so, tap the
symbol in the toolbar and use the corresponding key to move it
forwards or backwards.

6 If there are more than 11 symbols in the toolbar, the display can be
moved to the left or right with the arrow keys.
Keys for configuring the toolbar

Key Function

Call up the "Service" window

Call up "Configuration toolbar" window

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for configuring the toolbar

151
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Basic settings

Configuring toolbar:
1. Call up the "Service" window.
2. Call up "Configuration toolbar" window.
3. Tap the desired symbol (1).
4. Press the (3) key.
- or -
➜ Double-tap on the symbol.
 The symbol is displayed in the toolbar (2). The character "X" before the
symbol indicates that the symbol has been selected from the list (1) for
the toolbar.
5. Call up "Main menu".
Configuring monitoring

4.1.18 Configuring monitoring

The current Sintral line and the corresponding values for the cycle counters,
Jacquards, stitch tension and counters are displayed in the "Changeable
monitoring" window for each carriage stroke during productions.
You can specify yourself which values are to be displayed or have them
determined automatically. (Exception: Those counters and repeat switches
which are used exclusively in the Auto-Sintral program are not displayed.)
Changeable monitoring window

"Changeable monitoring" window

Field Function

1 Display of the current Sintral line

2 White field with frame. The field can be linked to a value. The value is
then displayed in this field.

A thick frame around the field indicates that it cannot be covered by a

function block (4).

3 Gray field. If a field (2) is limited to a value, the color changes from white
to gray.

4 White field without frame. This is a function block. The display of a

function block can be activated and deactivated.

152
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Basic settings

Linking a field to a value

Keys for linking a field

Key Function

Call up the "Changeable monitoring" window

Call up "Additional function keys"

"Automatic configuration"

"Clear all fields" (reset)

End setting process and save changes

End setting process without saving changes

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for linking a field

Linking a field to a value:

1. Call up the "Changeable monitoring" window from the "Main menu".
2. Touch a white field with a frame. The setting window appears.
Window for linking a field

Window for linking a field

3. Select the type of the value in the left column.

4. Select the value in the right column.
 The selected value is displayed in the lower line.
5. Confirm entries.
6. If necessary, link further fields to a value.
7. Call up "Main menu".

If only one value is to be deleted, select the empty (white) field

above "RS".

153
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Basic settings

Activating the function block Various function blocks can furthermore be displayed for the configurable
values. The selected function blocks are positioned at fixed positions over the
existing fields. They do not delete these, but just cover them, so that the fields
are visible again when the function block is deactivated.
Keys for activating a function block

Key Function

Call up the "Changeable monitoring" window

Call up "Additional function keys"

Activate and de-activate the "Stitch tension" function

block

Activate and de-activate the "SEN area" function

block

Activate and de-activate the "Yarn carrier" function

block

Activate and de-activate the "Function name"

function block

Activate and de-activate the "Fabric take-down

values" function block

(Can only be activated, if the "STIXX" function block

is deactivated.)

Activate and de-activate the "Sintral print line"

function block

Activate/deactivate "STIXX" function block

(Can only be activated, if the "Fabric take-down

values" function block is deactivated.)

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for activating a function block

1. Call up the "Changeable monitoring" window from the "Main menu".

2. Call up "Additional function keys".
3. Activate the desired function blocks.
4. Call up "Main menu".

154
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Basic settings

Saving, loading, deleting The configuration carried out by you can be saved, loaded and deleted.
settings ...
Keys for calling up the Catalog Monitoring window

Key Function

Call up the "Changeable monitoring" window

Call up "Additional function keys"

Call up "Catalog Monitoring" window

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for calling up the "Catalog Monitoring" window

1. Call up the "Changeable monitoring" window from the "Main menu".

2. Call up "Additional function keys".
3. Call up "Catalog Monitoring" window.
Catalog Monitoring window

"Catalog Monitoring" window

4. Select the desired program point (1) (loading, saving, deleting ...).
5. Call up "Main menu".
Setting up the pattern

155
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Basic settings

4.1.19 Setting up the pattern

This menu can be used for fine adjustment of a pattern at the knitting machine.
While the machine is knitting, the corresponding data of the knitting program
are displayed for every carriage stroke. If required, changes can be carried out
directly in this menu via setting windows, or the corresponding menu is opened
for your input. To do so, touch the corresponding field.
Key for calling up the Setting up the pattern menu

Key Function

Call up the "Setting up the pattern" menu

Key for calling up the "Setting up the pattern" menu

The window is structured into various areas:

Setting up the pattern window

"Setting up the pattern" window

Area Explanation

1 Display of: Carriage direction, cycle counters, SEN area, coupling width
(for tandem machine), counters. The active cycle counter is highlighted.
The values cannot be modified.

2 Setting up of the knitting systems: Needle action, stitch tension, yarn

carrier, jacquard line.

3 Current Sintral line

4 Fabric take-down values or fabric take-down function

5 Status line: Here the individual values can be changed or the

corresponding setting menu called up.

6 Actions for yarn carrier plunger, fabric take-down, comb take-down and
auxiliary take-down

7 Call up "Stitch length" window

8 Additional yarn carrier distance for fully fashion knitting

156
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Basic settings

Changing a value The values are changed by means of a virtual keyboard. If a value can be
changed, a keyboard bar which allows a value to be entered, is displayed in
the title bar of the menu.
Numerical keyboard

Numerical keyboard
Input elements

Element Function

End setting process without saving changes

Undo a change, the previous value is displayed

again

End setting process and save changes

Input elements

Changing a value:
1. Tap the corresponding field. The setting window appears, for example:
Yarn carrier window

"Yarn carrier" window

2. The keyboard bar appears in the title bar. Use it to carry out the changes.
3. Confirm input.
Setting up of the knitting systems

157
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Basic settings

Setting up of the knitting The stitch tension, needle action, yarn carrier and jacquard line are displayed
systems for every knitting system. The corresponding menu is opened if the yarn
carrier, stitch tension or jacquard line is touched.
Change NP value window

"Change NP value" window

Area Show Change

1 Stitch tension (rear knitting Value can be changed at indirect

system) specification (NP6=9.2)

2 Needle action (rear knitting

system)

3 Number of the knitting system

4 Yarn Carrier Yarn Carrier Correction

Yarn carrier stopping position

5 Needle action (front knitting

system)

6 Stitch tension (front knitting Value can be changed at indirect

system) specification (NP5=9.2)

7 Jacquard line

158
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Basic settings

Stitch tension Not only the value of the stitch tension is displayed, but also the type of
specification.
Display of the stitch tension window

"Display of the stitch tension" window

Type Explanation Setting possibility

1 Direct specification: "- -"

(NP=12.5)

2 Indirect specification: "5" Value can be changed

(NP5=9.2)

3 Jacquard-controlled stitch
tension: "J1" (NPJ1=12.5).
Presentation at flexible stitch:
J1!

4 Change the stitch tension The "Stitch length"

window appears. All the
values can be changed.

159
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Basic settings

Symbols for the needle The needle actions are represented by symbols so that you know immediately
actions which needle action is being carried out in one knitting system.
Symbols of the needle actions

Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning

Miss-knit Front Stitch

Rear Stitch Front Tuck

Rear Tuck Cast-off

Transfer to Front Transfer to rear

Transfer to the Split-stitch to the front

front and rear

Split-stitch to the Split-stitch to the front and

rear rear

Split-stitch to the Split-stitch to the rear,

front, stitch to the stitch to the front
rear

Stitch to the front, Stitch to the rear, tuck to

tuck to the front the rear

Stitch to the front, Stitch to the rear, tuck to

tuck to the front, the rear, miss-knit
miss-knit

Transfer to the Transfer to the rear, cast

front, cast off to the off to the front
rear

Transfer to the Cast-off, tuck to the front

front and rear, cast (post loop sinking)
off to the front and
rear

Cast-off, tuck to the Transfer to front additional

rear (post loop needle bed
sinking)

Transfer to rear Transfer to rear and front

additional needle additional needle bed
bed

Transfer to front Transfer to front additional

additional needle needle bed, knit at the front
bed, transfer to the
front and rear

Transfer to rear
additional needle
bed to the rear, knit
at the rear

Symbols of the needle actions

Setting up the pattern, yarn carrier (5xx)

160
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Basic settings

Yarn Carrier If this field is touched, the "Yarn carrier" window opens up.
Yarn carrier window

"Yarn carrier" window

Area Explanation

1 Display of the current yarn carrier specification.

After this specification (End character " : ") further information is
available about this yarn carrier:
N = Normal yarn carrier
I = Intarsia yarn carrier
S = Selected
H = Home
C = Yarn carrier is clamped and cut off
! = Yarn carrier is stopped outside the SEN area
PA = Plating yarn carrier (double bow )
P = Plating yarn carrier (double eyelet)
< = Intarsia yarn carrier swivels to the left
> = Intarsia yarn carrier swivels to the right

2 Definition of the yarn carrier (display only)

3 Yarn carrier correction with an application (selected knitting) at

the left or right edge.

4 Correction for swiveled intarsia yarn carrier on the left and on

the right selvedge.

5 Yarn carrier stopping position at the left or right fabric selvedge.

6 Activate or deactivate the yarn carrier plunger.

Jacquard line If this field is touched, the "Sintral editor" window opens up. The cursor is
automatically positioned before the current jacquard line. The jacquard is
displayed by default as compressed.

If the jacquard is unpacked, then depicted uncompressed and

the jacquard line exceeds 1,200 characters, it can no longer be
displayed. An error message indicates this condition.
Window with selection possibilities

161
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Basic settings

Window with selection Actions can be selected in the following windows:

possibilities  Comb actions
 Fabric take-down, auxiliary take-down and yarn carrier plunger
 Status Bar
 Sintral line
Comb actions Various actions for the comb take-down can be selected by tapping the key
(1).
Comb actions window

"Comb actions" window

The "Select comb actions" window appears.

Select comb actions window

"Select comb actions" window

Key Explanation

=^= Comb take-down upwards, grip elastic yarn

=-= Comb take-down in waiting position

=R= Comb take-down reference run

=S= Comb take-down at upper limit switch

=H= Opening the comb hooks

=X= Open the comb brake

=%= Close the comb brake

=0= Comb take-down at lower limit switch

Cancel This key can be used to cancel an action as long as it

is being carried out.

162
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Basic settings

Actions for fabric take-down, The keys (1) can be used to select actions for the fabric take-down, auxiliary
auxiliary take-down, yarn take-down and the yarn carrier plungers. The possible action is always
carrier plunger displayed on the key.
Actions for fabric take-down, ... window

"Actions for fabric take-down, ... " window

Key Explanation

=C= Close Fabric Take-down

=W= Open Fabric Take-down

Y^ De-activate all the yarn carrier plungers

Yv Activate all the yarn carrier plungers

W+1 Close Auxiliary Take-down

W+0 Open Auxiliary Take-down

Status Bar The elements displayed in gray in the status line can be selected. To do so,
tap one of the gray fields.
Status line window

"Status line" window

At some elements the gray field is divided. This means: If the front field is
touched, the complete setting menu for this element appears. If the rear part
of the gray field is touched, the window for changing the value appears.
Sintral line If this field is touched, the "Sintral editor" window opens up. The cursor is
automatically positioned before the current Sintral line.
Racking correction

163
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Basic settings

4.1.20 Racking correction

To achieve the optimum delivering position even with different stitch tensions,
the racking specification can be provided with a correction. Usually, the
correction value is provided with a "?" when writing the knitting program.
During knitting, the machine automatically stops in the reversing position
before the line with the correction specification is knitted. Now the optimum
value can be entered.
Button for calling up the Racking correction window

Key Function

Call up the "Racking correction" window

Confirm entries

Button for calling up the "Racking correction" window

Adjusting racking correction value:

1. Call up the "Racking correction" window from the "Main menu".
2. Press the input field for the racking correction and enter the value.
- or -
➜ If a racking correction is to be changed, then tap the corresponding button
and enter the value in the input field.
3. Confirm input.
Racking correction (Setup2)

164
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Basic settings

Racking correction (Setup2)

Racking correction (machine without additional needle bed)

Explanation Value range

VCI… Racking function VCI1 to VCI50

VK Racking correction by m steps (0-10) Step width: 1/70 of

the needle distance

Dir Direction of the racking correction

< - to the left
> - to the right
? - not defined, will be defined on the machine

VV Racking speed n (1-32), without an instruction

VV=32

V+/- V+ - Overracking, in addition to the racking (n=1-24, step width:

specification 1/8 of the needle
positive value: Overracking in racking direction distance)
negative value: Overracking in opposite to the
racking direction

Comment Comment ASCII Characters

Racking correction (Setup1)

165
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

Racking correction (Setup1)

Racking correction window

"Racking correction" window

Saving/loading racking The racking corrections are not only pattern-dependent, but also machine-
corrections (Setup1) dependent. As a result, these settings can be saved on the hard disk or copied
back from it.
Buttons for saving/loading racking corrections

Key Function

Call up "Additional function keys"

Delete all racking corrections

Save racking corrections on hard disk

Copy back racking corrections from hard disk to

machine memory

Buttons for saving/loading racking corrections

1. Call up the "Additional function keys" in the "Racking correction" window.

2. Tap the desired button.
Advanced adjustments

166
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Advanced adjustments

4.2 Advanced adjustments

This chapter contains information on:
 Switching on and off aggregates * [168]
 Setting language [171]
 Adjusting sensor mechanism * [172]
 Setting needle bed parameters [174]
 Setting machine parameters [176]
 Setting switch-off time when a power failure occurs [178]
 Copying service data [180]
 Carry out the reference run [182]
 Adjusting racking position correction VPK [185]
 Adjusting basic racking correction VGK [187]
 Correcting position of stitch cams [190]
 Adjusting needle brushes [192]
 Adjusting needle detector [193]
 Adjusting yarn carriers [193]
 Adjusting yarn carrier limiters [195]
 Adjusting yarn carrier guide [196]
 Adjusting the brushes of the central lubrication * [196]
 Adjusting intarsia yarn carrier (type 1) * [197]
 Adjusting intarsia yarn carriers (type 2) * [198]
 Shifting intarsia yarn carriers in area of carriage assembly * [199]
 Intarsia yarn carrier - Adjust stopping point (basic setting, braking value) *
[199]
 Intarsia yarn carrier - check the pressure plates * [209]
 Intarsia yarn carrier - Correct stopping point (correction value) * [211]
 Float slider (holding-down jack control) [212]
 Normal yarn carrier type 2 [215]
 Plating – the different possibilities [217]
 Plating - Double bow yarn carrier [219]
 Plating - Plating yarn carrier carriage [221]
 Changing the position of the knock-over wire [224]
 Overview of all machine data [226]

167
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

4.2.1 Switching on and off aggregates *

Switching on and off aggregates *

Keys for calling up the Machine settings window

Key Function

Call up the "Machine settings" window.

Keys for calling up the "Machine settings" window

Machine settings window

"Machine settings" window

Explanation

1 Switch on or off lighting in machine area

2 Switch fabric sensors on and off (not in the case of machines with
comb take-down)

3 Switching right or left feed wheel on or off.

If the feed wheel is not required, we recommend switching it off. This
saves energy.

4 Setting the clamping depth of the cutting needles (only in case of a

Setup1 pattern).

With negative values, the cutting needles will be taken down lower. If
a large NPK correction is carried out, or if several threads are
processed, it may be necessary for the cutting needles to be taken-
down lower to ensure reliable cut-off.

Setting range: -10 to 10. Standard setting: "0".

With a Setup2 pattern:

Setup2 Editor -> "Yarn carrier" menu -> "Y:Ua-b / Y:Ncc" tab

168
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Advanced adjustments

Explanation

5 Switch fluff absorption on or off.

The needle beds in the knitting area are vacuumed off with the fluff
absorption automatically. This does not interrupt ongoing knitting
process. We recommend switching on the fluff absorption
permanently.

The settings for the fluff absorption always remain saved, even when
the operating system is loaded again.

Interval Periodic switch on and off of the suction device.

After n courses: Number of courses without suction

(1 course = 2 rows)
For n courses: Number of courses with suction

Stroke "optimised": The cleaning row is carried out only in

SEN area.
"maximum": The cleaning row is carried out over
the entire needle bed.

169
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

Explanation

6 Clean the selection systems.

Some brushes are fixed on the exterior part of the needle bed. The
carriage runs so far outwards that the brushes can clean the selection
systems. This does not interrupt ongoing knitting process.

After n courses Number of courses till the needle selection systems

get cleaned (1 course = 2 rows)

Carriage "< >": to left and right

Direction "<": to left only

"optimized"

The course of the carriage is being analyzed. If the

carriage runs over the brushes, e.g. when it runs
outwards to the clamping-cutting bed, then this
course and the cleaning course will be carried out
together.
If the brushes are not overrun after the preset
number of carriage strokes, then a cleaning course
will be carried out.

Only with machines with PEP function (Productivity

Enhancement Pack)

Type Component
Type

CMS 530 HP 621 003

627 002

CMS 520 HP 620 002

628

CMS 502 HP 637 000

638

CMS 822 HP 623 002

632

Further information:
 Symbols in this document [3]
 Central lubrication [27]
 Suction and cleaning row [26]
Setting language

170
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Advanced adjustments

4.2.2 Setting language

The windows and the messages on the touch screen can be displayed in
different languages.
Keys for setting the language

Key Function

Call up the "Service" menu

Call up the "Basic settings" menu

Call up the "Language" window

Tap the "Select Path" key.

Confirm input

Save changes and end setting process

End setting process without saving changes

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for setting the language

Set language:
1. Call up the "Service" menu.
2. Call up the "Basic settings" menu.
3. Call up the "Language" window.
Language window

"Language" window

171
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

4. Select a language present in the machine from the column on the left.
Confirm input.
5. If the language has not been loaded yet, it must be reloaded now. The
languages are, for example, saved on a floppy disk, the USB memory stick
or the M1. To select the storage location, the corresponding source
directory must be selected. Tap the "Select path" key. Select the new path.
Save changes and end setting process.
6. Select the language in the right column. If the language is loaded, it
appears in the column on the left. Repeat step 4.
7. Call up the "Main menu".
Adjusting sensor mechanism *

4.2.3 Adjusting sensor mechanism *

Sensors window

"Sensors" window

Field Data shown

1 Stop resistance
Value range: 1-32, 1=not sensitive, 32=very sensitive

2 Carriage speed after small knots

3 Activating/deactivating of horn and selection of volume in

three degrees:
0=off 1=low, 2=middle, 3=loud
Intermittent Tone
Switching on/off an intermittent tone for the horn.
Interval (sec)
The time (pause) between two intervals is adjustable
(max. 60 seconds).

4* If the comb take-down moves upward for fabric transfer,

a light barrier checks whether the previously produced
knitted panel has completely been ejected.

5* Monitoring of main take-down. If the fabric take-down

roller has not turned after "n" (0-100) knitting rows, a stop
motion is carried out (0=monitoring off).

172
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Advanced adjustments

Field Data shown

6* Monitoring of main take-down. If the roller turns too

quickly, a stop motion is carried out (e.g. when the fabric
is ejected). Value range: 1-32, 1=not sensitive, 32=very
sensitive

7* Monitoring of auxiliary take-down. If the auxiliary take-

down has not turned after "n" (0-100) knitting rows, a
stop motion is carried out (0=monitoring off).

* does not apply in case of machines with belt take-down

Keys for adjusting the sensor mechanism

Key Function

Call up the "Machine settings" window.

Call up "Additional function keys"

Call up "Sensors" window

Confirm input

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for adjusting the sensor mechanism

Adjusting sensor mechanism:

1. Call up the "Machine settings" window.
2. Call up "Additional function keys".
3. Call up the "Sensors" window.
4. Enter the value on the appropriate line.
5. Confirm input.
6. Call up "Main menu".

Further information:
 Stop resistance [32]
 Adjusting carriage speed [114]
 Symbols in this document [3]
Setting needle bed parameters

173
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

4.2.4 Setting needle bed parameters

The needle bed parameters are used to make the needle-bed-specific
settings. They serve for the fine adjustment of the needle beds. The needle
bed parameters always remain saved, even when the operating system is
read in again.
Needle bed parameters window

"Needle bed parameters" window

Field Data shown

1 Racking ground correction (VGK)

2 Racking position correction (VPK)

3 Shock stop motion for the front and rear needle beds and
additional needle bed.
Value range: 1-32, 1=not sensitive, 32=very sensitive
Keys for setting the needle bed parameters

Key Function

Confirm input

Call up the "Service" menu

Call up the "Basic settings" menu

Open the "Needle bed parameters" window

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for setting the needle bed parameters

174
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Advanced adjustments

Setting needle bed parameters:

1. Call up "Main menu".
2. Call up the "Service" menu.
3. Call up "Basic Settings" menu.
4. Open the "Needle bed parameters" window.
5. Enter the value on the appropriate line.
6. Confirm input.
7. Call up the "Main menu".
8. Save the change in the machine adjustments on the USB memory stick.

Further information:
 Adjusting basic racking correction VGK [187]
 Adjusting racking position correction VPK [185]
 Shock stop [32]
 Saving all machine data on the USB-Memory-Stick [15]
 Overview of all machine data [226]
Setting machine parameters

175
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

4.2.5 Setting machine parameters

The machine parameters are used to make the machine-specific settings.
They serve for the fine adjustment of the machine. The machine parameters
always remain saved, even when the operating system is loaded again.
Machine parameters window

"Machine parameters" window

Field Data shown

1 Releasing fabric take-down when switching off the main

switch. With a delicate fabric no stitch elongations occur
then.

2 Following a machine stop the machine runs for several

rows at reduced speed. Value range: 0-6, 0=off

3 Automatic deactivation of lighting after a certain time.

Duty cycle: 10 minutes (standard), value range: 0...60
minutes
Recommendation: LED lamp: 0 minutes, fluorescent lamp
10 minutes

4 Speed outside the SEN area (MSECOS)

Standard: 1.2 m/sec (maximal speed)

5 Maximum carriage speed with open cover hoods if the

engaging rod is held in position 3 (production). Value
range in input field "MSECCO": 0.00 to 0.20 m/s,
standard: 0.05, step width: 0.05, 0.00=carriage does not
move.

6 carriage speed, if key is active. Reduction of normal

speed to percentage specification "n". Default: 70 %

176
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Advanced adjustments

Keys for setting the machine parameters

Key Function

Confirm input

Call up the "Service" menu

Call up the "Basic settings" menu

Call up "Machine parameters" window

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for setting the machine parameters

Set machine parameters:

1. Call up "Main menu".
2. Call up the "Service" menu.
3. Call up "Basic Settings" menu.
4. Call up the "Machine parameters" window.
5. Enter the value on the appropriate line.
6. Confirm input.
7. Call up the "Main menu".
8. Save the change in the machine adjustments on the USB memory stick.

Further information:
 Engaging rod [43]
 Saving all machine data on the USB-Memory-Stick [15]
Setting switch-off time when a power failure occurs

177
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

4.2.6 Setting switch-off time when a power failure occurs

The machine is immediately stopped when a power failure (longer than 45
milliseconds) occurs. The knitting program, operating system and the
machine-specific data are not lost. The battery card (with the accumulators)
ensures this. A pictograph indicating the power failure appears on the touch
screen.
Power failure pictograph

"Power failure" pictograph

DANGER
Life-threatening high voltage!
Electrical shock may cause death or serious injuries.
➜ Even in the case of power failure, do not work on the
electrical system of the machine without interrupting the
power supply .

➜ Set machine main switch to "0".

Longer power failure If the power failure lasts more than 30 seconds (standard setting), the
computer of the knitting machine is automatically shut down. The time until the
computer shuts down can be set from 2 to 180 seconds.
If you are sure that the power failure has been in effect for a longer period of
time, you can switch off the main switch with "Switch off main switch".
The set time always remain saved, even when the operating system is loaded
again.
Shorter power failure If the power supply is restored within the set time, confirm the power failure
message with the "Confirm message" key. To continue knitting, start the
machine with the engaging rod.
Conditions If the battery voltage is too low ("Battery voltage low" message appears), it is
not possible to extend the power failure time.
If a STIXX device is used with the machine, a check is automatically performed
to determine which device it is.
 The extension of the power failure time is possible with an ASCON device
and a new STIXX device (ID 236 275).
 This is not possible with an older device, as the STIXX correction values
cannot be saved and are therefore lost during a power failure. The power
failure time is automatically reduced to 2 seconds. If a higher time is set, a
message appears stating that this is not possible.

178
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Advanced adjustments

Keys for adjusting the power failure time

Key Function

Confirm message

Switch off main switch

Call up the "Service" menu

Call up the "Basic settings" menu

Call up "Machine parameters" window

Confirm input

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for adjusting the power failure time

Set power failure time:

1. Call up the "Service" menu from the "Main menu".
2. Call up the "Machine parameters" window from the "Basic settings" menu.

3. Enter the desired time.

4. Confirm input.
5. Call up "Main menu".
Copying service data

179
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

4.2.7 Copying service data

With this menu the service data can be copied on a data carrier.
Copy service data window

"Copy service data" window

Keys in the Copy service data window

Label Explanation

Copy Logfiles If the machine computer has serious problems, e.g. it does not
react to any inputs or the program crashes any longer, the
cause is very important for Stoll. The computer saves the data
up to the fault internally in so-called "Logfiles". These files can
be saved and sent to the Stoll helpline so that Stoll can carry
out an exact error diagnostics.

Copy Dongle The machine settings do not only contain the machine data,
but also the machine options, the machine configuration, the
report and other internal control information. It is important to
back up the data, e.g. when the hard disk is replaced.

Copy Print For the Stoll technician only

Copy Report The operating data are saved with the STOLL machine
number.

Copy Mc The machine data include the machine-specific settings

(correction values). The data will be saved in a zip-file.

When delivering the knitting machine, the machine data was

printed out and put on the right control cabinet.

Machine data sheet at the right control cabinet

Select language with With next switching on of the machine, the language selection
next startup appears. The setting is reset after switching on.

Keys in the "Copy service data" window

180
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Advanced adjustments

Keys for copying the service data

Key Function

Call up the "Service" menu

Call up "Copy service data" window

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for copying the service data

Copy service data:

1. Call up the "Service" menu from the "Main menu".
2. Call up the "Copy service data" window.
3. Select the desired data carrier e.g. . USB memory stick (Drive F:).
4. Tap the desired button.
 The data are saved.
5. Call up "Main menu".

Further information:
 Calling up report and shift counters [21]
 Saving all machine data on the USB-Memory-Stick [15]
 Overview of all machine data [226]
Carry out the reference run

181
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

4.2.8 Carry out the reference run

Following all repair and conversion work on the carriage assembly or on the
needle bed, a reference run must be carried out.
The reference run is carried out with the following steps:
 Calling up and noting the machine data
 Carrying out the reference run
 Calling up and correcting the machine data
 Loading the knitting program and determining the racking reference data
Keys for carrying out a reference run

Key Function

Call up the "Service" menu

Call up the "Basic settings" menu

Returning to the previous window

Call up "Machine parameters" window

Open the "Needle bed parameters" window

Call up "NPK values" window

Call up "Needle selection" window

Call up "Reference runs" window

Call up "Main menu"

Call up "Machine start" window

Keys for carrying out a reference run

182
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Advanced adjustments

Call up and note machine 1. Call up the "Service" menu.

data
2. Call up "Basic Settings" menu.
3. Call up the "Machine parameters" window.
4. Compare the displayed values with the values on the machine data sheet.
If necessary, correct the values on the machine data sheet (see the "Copy
Mc" description [180]).
5. Switch back to the previous window.
6. Call up the "Needle bed parameters" window.
7. Compare the displayed values with the values on the machine data sheet.
If necessary, correct the values on the machine data sheet.
8. Switch back to the previous window.
9. Call up the "NPK values" window.
10. Compare the displayed values with the values on the machine data sheet.
If necessary, correct the values on the machine data sheet.
11. Switch back to the previous window.
12. Call up the "Needle selection" window.
13. Compare the displayed values with the values on the machine data sheet.
If necessary, correct the values on the machine data sheet.
14. Call up "Main menu".
Carry out the reference run 1. If the racking device is not in the home position, cast-off the stitches of a
needle bed.
2. Call up the "Service" menu.
3. Call up the "Reference runs" window.
4. The reference data is determined at the left or right end of the needle bed.
If the carriage is located in the left half of the needle bed, tap the "SR!<"
key.
- or -
➜ If the carriage is located in the right half of the needle bed, tap the "SR!>"
key.

Reference run with older machines (before August 2013):

The reference data is determined at the center of the needle
bed.
The carriage moves automatically in both directions
During the reference run, the carriage can move independently
into both directions.
The carriage stops automatically as soon as the reference data
is determined. The engaging rod falls down.

5. Start the machine with the engaging rod.

 The carriage assembly carries out a reference run and stops as soon
as it has determined the reference data. The engaging rod falls down.
6. The message "Reference run complete" is displayed on the touch screen.

183
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

7. The reference run is complete, the machine is ready to knit.

The carriage is positioned at the correct position for you to be able to start
the production.
8. Switch back to the previous window.
Calling up and correcting 1. Call up the "Basic settings" menu.
machine data
2. Call up the "Machine parameters" window.
3. Compare the displayed values with the target values on the machine data
sheet and if necessary correct the values in the window "Machine
parameter" and confirm them.
4. Switch back to the previous window.
5. Call up the "Needle bed parameters" window.
6. Compare the displayed values with the values on the machine data sheet.
If necessary, correct the values on the machine data sheet.
7. Switch back to the previous window.
8. Call up the "NPK values" window.
9. Compare the displayed values with the target values on the machine data
sheet. If necessary, correct the values in the "NPK values" window and
confirm them.
10. Switch back to the previous window.
11. Call up the "Needle selection" window.
12. Compare the displayed values with the target values on the machine data
sheet. If necessary, correct the values in the "needle selection" window
and confirm them.
13. Call up the "Main menu".
Load knitting program and 1. Load the knitting program.
determine racking reference
2. Call up the "Machine start" window.
data
3. Tap on the key "SP from line 1".
4. Start the machine with the engaging rod.
 The carriage assembly moves slowly and stops in the right reversing
position.
5. Wait until the "Racking finished" Message appears on the touch screen.
6. To switch on the needle selection, tap the needle selection "On" key in the
"Machine start" window.
 The reference run is complete, the machine is ready to knit.
Further information:
 Copying service data [180]
 Copying service data [180]

184
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Advanced adjustments

4.2.9 Adjusting racking position correction VPK

Adjusting racking position correction VPK

The fine adjustment of the transfer racking is carried out by means of the VPK
value. With the "Racking position correction (VPK)" the rear needle bed is
aligned exactly relative to the front needle bed.
The VPK value always remains saved, even if the operating system is
imported again.
Keys for setting VPK value

Key Function

Call up the "Service" menu

Call up the "Service Racking" window

Confirm input

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for setting VPK value

Adjusting VPK:
1. Program an empty row with transfer racking and fix the knitting
specification [4].
2. Push up two opposing needles in the center of the needle bed.
3. Check whether the needle hook of the front needle dips into the pelerine
spring of the rear needle.
4. If this is not the case: Push back needles and correct racking device.
5. Call up "Main menu".
6. Call up the "Service" menu.
7. Call up the "Service Racking" window.
Service Racking window

"Service Racking" window

185
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

8. Enter the value in the "VPK" line using the linear regulator.

-1…-8 Correction to the left (1 step = 0.18 – 0.25 mm, according to the
machine gauge)

+1…+8 Correction to the right (1 step = 0.18 – 0.25 mm, according to the
machine gauge)

9. Confirm input.
 The needle bed moves lightly to the left or right.
10. Repeat steps 2 to 9 until the needle hook of the front needle dips into the
pelerine spring of the rear needle.
11. The NPK values are automatically saved in the data specific to the
machine (dongle data).
 The setting process is complete.

If you want, you can save VPK-value additionally:

➜ on a USB memory stick [15]
➜ on a network drive (button "Copy Dongle") [180]

 Helpful knitting rows [4]

 Copying service data [180]
 Saving all machine data on the USB-Memory-Stick [15]
Adjusting basic racking correction VGK

186
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Advanced adjustments

4.2.10 Adjusting basic racking correction VGK

The position of the rear needle bed relative to the front needle bed is set with
the VGK value (factory setting).
If part of the racking device is replaced, e.g. the racking motor or the racking
belt, the VGK value has to be set anew. During installation, make sure that the
front and rear needle beds are opposite each other.
The VGK value always remains saved, even if the operating system is
imported again.
Keys for setting VGK value

Key Function

Call up the "Service" menu

Call up the "Service Racking" window

Confirm input

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for setting VGK value

Setting VGK:
 Cast-off the stitches on both needle beds.
1. Call up "Main menu".
2. Call up the "Service" menu.
3. Call up the "Service Racking" window.
Service Racking window

"Service Racking" window

4. Enter and confirm the value "0" in the line "VPK".

187
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

5. Tap the "Racking adjusting run" key. A message appears, answer this with
"Yes".
 The needle bed moves to the left and right. The racking will be
synchronized.
6. Tap the "Reference run V>REF" key. A message appears, answer this
with "Yes".
 The needle bed moves to the left and right. The racking is carrying out
a reference run.
7. Program an empty row with half racking and fix the knitting specification
[4].
8. Push up several opposing needles at various positions of the needle bed
(left, center, right) on both needle beds until the needle hooks touch each
other.
9. Check whether the needle hooks of the front and rear needle bed are
exactly in a line.
10. If this is not the case: Push back needles somewhat so that they do not
touch each other anymore. In the "VGK" line, enter the value using the
linear regulator.

-1…-150 Correction to the left (1 step = 0.01 mm)

+1…+150 Correction to the right (1 step = 0.01 mm)

11. Confirm input.

 The needle bed moves lightly to the left or right.
12. Check whether the needle hooks of the front and rear needle bed are
exactly in a line.
13. If this is not the case, repeat steps 10 to 12 until the needle hooks of the
front and rear needle beds are exactly positioned in one line.
14. The VGK value is automatically saved in the data specific to the machine
(dongle data).
15. Adjust VPK value [185].
(To be able to determine the VGK value you had to set the VPK value to
"0" (in step 4). After having determined the VGK value you must set the
VPK value again.)
 The setting process is complete.

If you want, you can save the VGK-value additionally:

➜ on a USB memory stick [15]
➜ on a network drive (button "Copy Dongle") [180]

188
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Advanced adjustments

Wrong selection - individual needles miss-knit

If a wrong selection occurs, then the synchronisation "Impulse
sensor – control – selection system" is not optimal anymore.
This has been caused by the big difference between the old
and new VGK values.
➜ The test "Needle selection displacement" must be carried
out for re-establishing the synchronisation [71].

Further information:
 Helpful knitting rows [4]
 Copying service data [180]
 Saving all machine data on the USB-Memory-Stick [15]
 Needle selection displacement [71]
 Adjusting racking position correction VPK [185]
Correcting position of stitch cams

189
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

4.2.11 Correcting position of stitch cams

Each stitch cam can be corrected for each carriage direction
 for knitting
 for knitting with split-stitch technique
Reduce stitch tension: Value without sign or with "+" sign
Increase stitch tension: Value with "-" sign
The second stitch cam of a system is always corrected, as only it is active.
The stitch cams are numbered consecutively from left to right, regardless of
the carriage direction.

Meaning of displays in NPK values window

Meaning

System 1 - n Number of knitting system counted from left to right

<< Carriage direction to the left

>> Carriage direction to the right

n.n Correction value for knitting

$ n.n Correction value for knitting with split-stitch

technique

Meaning of displays in NPK values window

190
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Advanced adjustments

Keys for correction of stitch cam position (NPK value)

Key Function

Call up the "Service" menu

Call up the "Basic settings" menu

Call up "NPK values" window

Reduce current value by one step

Increase current value by one step

End the setting process and save the changed

values.

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for correction of stitch cam position (NPK value)

Correcting position of stitch cams:

1. Call up "Main menu".
2. Call up the "Service" menu.
3. Call up the "Basic settings" menu.
4. Call up the "NPK values" window.
5. Change the NPK values for knitting and for knitting with split-stitch stitch
and confirm the changes.
 The values are automatically saved in the data specific to the machine
(dongle data).
 The setting process is complete.

If you want, you can additionally save the values:

➜ on a USB memory stick [15]
➜ on a network drive (button "Copy Dongle") [180]

Further information:
 Copying service data [180]
 Saving all machine data on the USB-Memory-Stick [15]
Adjusting needle brushes

191
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

4.2.12 Adjusting needle brushes

The needle brushes must be adjusted when errors occur during stitch
formation, e.g. drop stitches.
The needle brushes open the needle latches for laying in the thread. They are
swivel-mounted so, that they are always inclined in the direction of travel of the
carriage assembly.
Inclination of needle brushes

Inclination of needle brushes

The needle brushes are correctly adjusted when

 the brushes project an equal distance over both sides of the holder The
markings on the brush are visible on both sides.
 the canted surfaces (3) opposite each other
 the brushes do not touch the needle hooks of the fully raised needles (RR).
The distance (4) is to be 0.5 mm to 1 mm.
Key for calling up Manual interventions window

Key Function

Call up "Manual interventions" window

Key for calling up "Manual interventions" window

Adjusting needle brushes:

1. Release hexagon nut (2).
2. Adjust needle brush at screw (1).
3. Retighten hexagon nut (2).
4. Adjust needle brushes on all systems.
5. Call up "Manual interventions" window.
6. Move carriage assembly at low speed. To do this, press "Move stepwise"
button and check the setting of the needle brushes.
Coupling carriage assembly wide or narrow (CMS 822)

192
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Advanced adjustments

4.2.14 Adjusting needle detector

The needle detector is correctly adjusted if:
Adjusting the needle detector

Adjusting the needle detector

 it is near the holding-down jacks of the rear needle bed, however does not
tap them
 the lower end of the needle detector is at the level of the needle hooks

NOTICE
Damage to the needle detector!
If several yarn carriers are stopped at the same place, the
needle detector will be damaged, as the yarn carriers cannot
avoid the needle detector.
➜ Always stagger yarn carriers.

➜ Staggering yarn carriers.

Further information:
 Staggering yarn carriers [129]
Adjusting yarn carriers

4.2.15 Adjusting yarn carriers

The yarn carriers are correctly adjusted if
 the distance between the cam center of the knitting system and the yarn
carrier in each system is identical in both carriage directions
 the thread is laid on the open latch at exactly the same point by each yarn
carrier for both selvedge needles
 the yarn carrier tips move exactly between the needle beds in the needle
cross and the distance between yarn carrier tips and the closed needle
latch is 0.5 mm to 1 mm
 the yarn carrier in the clamping and cutting area does not press the cutting
needle located in the working position
 the yarn carriers of the track 1 and 8 are also set 0.5 mm higher so that
they do not touch the limiters (3)
Key for calling up Manual interventions window

Key Function

Call up "Manual interventions" window

Key for calling up "Manual interventions" window

193
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

Adjusting yarn carriers:

1. Remove needle brushes by loosening screws (1).
Screws of needle brushes

Screws of needle brushes

2. Park the carriage assembly in needle space.

Adjusting yarn carriers

Adjusting yarn carriers

3. Adjust yarn carriers if necessary. When doing so, the carriage assembly
must be stopped in the needle area.
4. Call up "Manual interventions" window.
5. Move carriage assembly at low speed. To do this, press "Move stepwise"
button and check adjustment of yarn carriers.

Further information:
 Replacing yarn carrier [39]
Adjusting yarn carrier limiters

194
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Advanced adjustments

4.2.16 Adjusting yarn carrier limiters

The yarn carrier limiters are correctly adjusted if
 each yarn carrier is positioned after its clamping point and before the
following clamping point.
 the yarn carrier limiter is about 8 mm away from its yarn carrier
(CMS 830 C, CMS 520 C: 15 mm)
Adjusting yarn carrier limiters

Adjusting yarn carrier limiters

Adjusting yarn carrier limiters:

1. Position the yarn carrier (1) on the track 1 exactly between the clamping
point 1 and 2.
2. Loosen the screws (2) on the yarn carrier limiter.
3. Displace the yarn carrier limiter until it is 8 mm away from the yarn carrier
(CMS 830 C, CMS 520 C: 15 mm).
At this distance, the edge of the yarn carrier carriage and the start of the
bevel at the yarn carrier limiter are located at the same height.
4. Retighten the screws (2).
5. Repeat this setting process for all the yarn carriers.
Staggering of yarn carrier limiters

Staggering of yarn carrier limiters

195
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

4.2.17 Adjusting yarn carrier guide

Adjusting yarn carrier guide

The yarn carrier guide must be adjusted if the yarn carrier can be lifted from
the yarn carrier rail or a yarn carrier plunger is not put out of action.

Adjusting yarn carrier guide:

1. To check whether the yarn carrier can be lifted from the yarn carrier rail,
take the left and right sides of the yarn carrier housing in both hands and
move the yarn carrier housing upward and downward.
Adjusting yarn carrier guide

Adjusting yarn carrier guide

2. If necessary push the setting key inwards with the adjusting key from the
accessories till the yarn carrier cannot be raised erect any more.
3. Turn the setting key back by one-eighth of a turn.
Adjusting the brushes of the central lubrication *

4.2.18 Adjusting the brushes of the central lubrication *

The brushes have been adjusted correctly if they touch the working butts
lightly.
Brushes of the central lubrication

Brushes of the central lubrication

Adjusting the brushes of the central lubrication:

1. Release hexagon nut (2).
2. Adjust brushes on hexagon nut (1).
3. Retighten hexagon nut (2).
4. Adjust all brushes.

Further information:
 Symbols in this document [3]
Adjusting intarsia yarn carrier (type 1) *

196
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Advanced adjustments

4.2.19 Adjusting intarsia yarn carrier (type 1) *

The yarn carriers are correctly adjusted if
 an unswiveled yarn carrier passes by a swiveled yarn carrier
 the distance between the cam center of the knitting system and the yarn
carrier in each system is identical in both carriage directions
 the thread is laid on the open latch at exactly the same point by each yarn
carrier for both selvedge needles
 the yarn carrier tips move exactly between the needle beds in the needle
cross and the distance between yarn carrier tips and the closed needle
latch is 0.5 mm to 1 mm
 the yarn carriers of the track 1 and 8 are also set 0.5 mm higher so that
they do not touch the limiters (3)

Adjusting intarsia yarn carriers:

1. Remove needle brushes by loosening screws (1).
Screws of needle brushes

Screws of needle brushes

2. Park the carriage assembly in needle space.

Adjusting the intarsia yarn carriers

Adjusting the intarsia yarn carriers

3. To adjust the height of the yarn carrier, loosen the screw (1).
4. Adjust the height of the yarn carrier and retighten the screw (1).
5. To adjust the position of the yarn carrier head relative to the needle beds,
loosen the screw (2).
6. Adjust the position of the yarn carrier head relative to the needle beds,
retighten the screw (2) and coat it with a screw locking compound (e.g.
Loctite 221).
Further information:
 Symbols in this document [3]
 Intarsia yarn carrier * [23]
 Mount intarsia yarn carrier * [40]

197
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

4.2.20 Adjusting intarsia yarn carriers (type 2) *

Adjusting intarsia yarn carriers (type 2) *

The yarn carriers are correctly adjusted if

 an unswiveled yarn carrier passes by a swiveled yarn carrier
 the distance between the cam center of the knitting system and the yarn
carrier in each system is identical in both carriage directions
 the thread is laid on the open latch at exactly the same point by each yarn
carrier for both selvedge needles
 the yarn carrier tips move exactly between the needle beds in the needle
cross and the distance between yarn carrier tips and the closed needle
latch is 0.5 mm to 1 mm
 the yarn carriers of the track 1 and 8 are also set 0.5 mm higher so that
they do not touch the limiters (4)

Adjusting intarsia yarn carriers:

1. Remove needle brushes by loosening screws (1).
Screws of needle brushes

Screws of needle brushes

2. Park the carriage assembly in needle space.

3. To adjust the height of the yarn carrier, loosen the screw (2).
Adjusting the intarsia yarn carriers

Adjusting the intarsia yarn carriers

4. Adjust the height of the yarn carrier and retighten the screw (2).
5. In order to laterally adjust the position of the yarn carrier tip, bend the yarn
carrier bow carefully (without using force) with the adjusting part (3).

Further information:
 Symbols in this document [3]
 Intarsia yarn carrier * [23]
 Mount intarsia yarn carrier * [40]

198
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Advanced adjustments

4.2.21 Shifting intarsia yarn carriers in area of carriage

Shifting intarsia yarn carriers in area of carriage assembly *

assembly *
Intarsia yarn carriers located in the area of the carriage assembly cannot be
shifted by hand. They are shifted with the shifting device from the accessories.

Shift yarn carriers in area of carriage assembly:

Shifting device

Shifting device

➜ Press the lifters inward with the shifting device from the accessories and
shift one or more yarn carriers out of the area of the carriage assembly.

Further information:
 Symbols in this document [3]
Intarsia yarn carrier - Adjust stopping point (basic setting, braking value) *

4.2.22 Intarsia yarn carrier - Adjust stopping point (basic

setting, braking value) *
With an intarsia yarn carrier it is important that it is stopped exactly above the
last needle of its knitting area. Otherwise the following error possibilities will
be:
 During the knitting it may cause erroneous switchings as the control
calculated the yarn carrier on another position than it is actually located on.
Consequence: The yarn carrier is not swivelled or it is not taken along.
 The yarn can be knitted-in and this way an uncleaned colour edge would
be the result.
Stopping position (on the left: wrong, on the right: correct)

Stopping position (on the left: wrong, on the right: correct)

If the intarsia yarn carrier does not stop exactly above the last needle, you
have to correct the braking value and not the correction value.

Difference: braking value - correction value

Braking value: mechanical adjustment of the yarn carrier
Correction value: knitting-technical and pattern related
correction of the yarn carrier

199
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

An adjusting program is available for controlling the stopping positions. With

this program you can easily check and adjust the braking values of the intarsia
yarn carrier.
When creating the intarsia pattern on the M1plus (starting with version 5.3)
you specify that the adjusting program is to be integrated in the pattern.
On the knitting machine you run the adjusting program before or also during
the production. An embroidery stitch line is knitted with all the Intarsia yarn
carriers used in the pattern for you to be able to check the correct stopping
position quickly and easily.
You can correct the stopping position of the yarn carrier changing the braking
values for the yarn carrier.

Further information:
 Symbols in this document [3]
Which yarn carriers are located on the machine.

200
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Advanced adjustments

Which yarn carriers are Carry out this section:

located on the machine.  with machines without clamping and cutting bed
 if the clamping and cutting bed is switched off

Only with these machines you can change the yarn carrier
equipment.

With all the other machines there is predefined a permanent

yarn carrier equipment that cannot be changed.
The functions "Move", "Delete", "Activate" are deactivated
(grayed out).
-> Skip this section. It continues on Page [204].

Check the yarn carrier equipment before the production starts.

It is possible that the number of the yarn carriers has changed:
 several yarn carriers were removed for the previous pattern
 more (or less) yarn carriers are needed for the new pattern
The computer has to know about the new yarn carrier equipment to be able to
allocate its specific braking value to every yarn carrier and also to a new yarn
carrier.
Keys for calling up the yarn carrier braking values

Key Function

Call up the "Yarn carrier" window

Call up the "Yarn carrier braking values" window

Save changes and end setting process

Call up "Additional function keys"

Reset the default setting of yarn carrier arrangement

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for calling up the yarn carrier braking values

Correcting the stopping position of the yarn carrier:

 The knitting program must not be started (the "SP from line 1" key in the
"Machine start " window must not be activated)
1. Call up the "Yarn carrier" window.

201
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

2. Call up the "Yarn carrier braking values" window.

 The last yarn carrier equipment saved is displayed.
Yarn carrier braking values window

"Yarn carrier braking values window"

Yarn carrier present.

The yarn carrier is not present. It has been deleted

manually.

◆ A maximum of 4 yarn carriers can be located on each yarn carrier track.

The counting is carried out from the left to the right: n.1, n.2, n.3, n.4.
(This is called a physical numbering.)
◆ If a yarn carrier is present, then its braking values are displayed.
◆ In the middle of the window you can see a vertical separating line.
at the left of the separating line: The yarn carriers are positioned on the
left machine side
at the right of the separating line: The yarn carriers are positioned on the
right machine side

3. Check the displayed yarn carrier equipment.

4. If necessary adapt the yarn carrier equipment to the new pattern (yarn
carrier home position).

202
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Advanced adjustments

5. Cick the required yarn carrier.

 The setting window appears.

Moving yarn carriers to the Only possible if no other yarn carrier is located
Left on the left hand-side.

to the Only possible if no other yarn carrier is located

Right on the right hand-side.

Delete yarn carrier Only the rightmost yarn carrier can be deleted.
Delete from the right to the left.

: Delete the yarn carrier only if you really are going to

remove it from the machine. Its braking values are deleted.
If you reassembly the yarn carrier, then the braking values
must be redetermined.

Activate yarn carrier Reactivate a deleted yarn carrier.

Activate from the left to the right.
If two or more yarn carriers are to be activated, then
activate the yarn carrier furthest to the left first.

: If an action is not possible, the key is inactive (gray)

6. Save changes and end setting process for this yarn carrier.
7. Repeat the steps 5 to 6 until all the yarn carriers are located on their
correct positions (yarn carrier home position).
8. Call up "Main menu".

Further information:
 Checking the braking values with the adjusting program [204]
Checking the braking values with the adjusting program

203
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

Checking the braking values An adjusting program is available for controlling the stopping positions. An
with the adjusting program ornamental stitch line is knitted with all the Intarsia yarn carriers used in the
pattern for you to be able to check the correct stopping position quickly and
easily.

1 Adjustment program Part 3 Embroidery stitch lines of the intarsia

1 yarn carriers
(vertical line, one needle wide)
2 Adjustment program Part 4 Pattern
2

When creating the intarsia pattern on the M1plus (starting with version 5.3 or
higher) you specify that the adjusting program is to be integrated in the pattern.
For this purpose activate the "Generate adjusting program" check box
("Pattern parameters" -> "Configuration" -> "Intarsia tab" -> "Valuate braking
values for Intarsia yarn carriers" section).
On the knitting machine you run the adjusting program before or also during
the production.
What is the structure of the  All the intarsia yarn carriers, which are used in the pattern and swivel, are
adjustment program? included in the adjustment program.
 Depending on the number of yarn carriers and the fabric width, the intarsia
yarn carriers will be distributed on one or more partial programs.
 Program start: Set the cycle counter "RS39" ("RS18" with Setup1) to "1"
After the program start the "RS39" is automatically set to the value "99" to
ensure that a sufficient number of knitting rows is knitted for the
adjustment of the yarn carriers.
 Proceed to the next partial program: with the "ctrl W" key
 Program end: set with the "ctrl W" key or the cycle counter "RS39" to "0".

204
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Advanced adjustments

Check the braking values

Keys to check the braking values

Key Function

Call up "Machine start" window

Call up the "Cycle counters & counters" window

Call up the "Yarn carrier" window

Call up the "Yarn carrier braking values" window

Save changes and end setting process

End setting process without saving changes

return to the "Yarn carrier braking values" window

Call up "Additional function keys"

Reset the braking values to standard values (with the

machine stopped only)

◆ proceed to the next partial program.

◆ Exit the adjustment program.

Keys to check the braking values

Checking the braking values:

 If there are yarn carrier correction values entered in the knitting program,
they have to be set to "0" temporarily. The correction value affects the
stopping time and falsifies the checking of the braking value. (Note the
correction values so that they can be entered again later on).
1. The knitting program is loaded and started (the "SP from line 1" key in the
"Machine start " window)
2. Call up the "Cycle counters & counters" window, and set "RS 39" to "1"
(Start adjustment program) (Setup1: RS18=1).
 The adjustment program is called up.
3. Start the machine with the engaging rod.
 The first part of the adjustment program is started.
4. Knit some rows.
5. Check the stopping position of the different yarn carriers.

205
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

1 Wrong stopping 2 Correct stopping position (left color field edge)

position The yarn is located vertically, at the left of the needle
center.
3 Correct stopping position (right color field edge)
The yarn is located vertically, at the right of the
needle center.

6. If the stopping position is wrong correct the braking value for the yarn
carrier.
7. Call up the "Yarn carrier" window.
8. Call up the "Yarn carrier braking values" window.
Yarn carrier braking values window

"Yarn carrier braking values" window

Yarn carrier designation (Y-3A)

(Sintral numbering)
Display of the yarn carrier type (N)
Display of the yarn type (A)
Braking value (YB)
left: 2, right: 3
The yarn carrier is present (is not used in the current knitting
program)

206
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Advanced adjustments

9. Tap on the corresponding yarn carrier.

 The setting window appears.

Ba: braking value Value range: -9...0...9.

left Step width: 1=1/32 inch=0.8 mm
Bb: braking value Default: 0
right
: In case of large deviations from the default value
appears a note prompting you to check the yarn carrier.

10. Enter the braking value (Ba, Bb).

-1…-9: if the yarn carrier is stopped to late (after the needle)
+1…+9: if the yarn carrier is stopped to early (before the needle)

11. Save changes and end setting process for this yarn carrier.
12. If the stopping position of further yarn carriers is wrong repeat the steps 9
to 11.
13. Knit some rows.
14. Check the stopping positions. If necessary, repeat the steps 9 to 11.
15. Repeat several times the checking of both swivel directions of the intarsia
yarn carrier.
16. If there are further yarn carriers to be checked, then proceed to the next
partial program. (Additional function keys ->"ctrl W" key).
17. Repeat the steps 9 to 15.

207
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

18. If all of the yarn carriers are checked, tap the "ctrl W" key. It will be
proceeded to the next partial program automatically.
- or -
➜ If all the partial programs are processed, the adjustment program is
automatically exited and the production is started.
 The checking is completed.

If you have set the yarn carrier correction values to "0", then
enter the noted values in the knitting program.

➜ If some braking values are modified, then the data are

automatically saved in the data specific to the machine
(dongle data).
➜ The braking values do not depend on the patterns, but on
the machine. These data are therefore not deleted when a
new knitting program is loaded.
➜ The braking values always remain saved, even when the
operating system is loaded again.
➜ If the braking values are no longer required, they have to be
reset to "0" manually.
➜ Check the braking values from time to time as the
conditions may change.
➜ With tandem operation: Separate braking values cannot be
entered for the yarn carriers in the right carriage.

Possible reasons for the  Different lubrication

wrong stopping position
 Different cleaning of the yarn carrier rails
 Temperature variation during the production
 Adjusting yarn carrier guide
 Pressure plates are worn
 The yarn carrier is bent (very different braking values for the left and the
right-hand side)

Further information:
 Adjusting yarn carrier guide [196]
 Intarsia yarn carrier - check the pressure plates * [209]
Intarsia yarn carrier - check the pressure plates *

208
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Advanced adjustments

4.2.23 Intarsia yarn carrier - check the pressure plates *

Turning over or replacing the small pressure plates (intarsia yarn carrier type 1)

Turning over or replacing the 1. Dismantle yarn carrier.

small pressure plates
Dismantling of small pressure plate

(intarsia yarn carrier type 1)

Dismantling of small pressure plate

2. Loosen but do not remove the screws (1).

3. Lift the clamping lever (2)out of the locating screw (3) and remove it. When
doing this, make sure that the spring pin (5) remains in the housing (4).
4. Check whether the thickness designation 2.04 or 2.06 is visible on the
built-in pressure plate.
5. Remove the pressure plate from the clamping lever.

NOTICE
Complicated adjustment work is required when replacing the
pressure plates!
If the various thicknesses and positions of the pressure plates
are interchanged, complicated adjustment work is required to
set the stopping point of the yarn carrier correctly.
➜ Do not interchange the various thicknesses and positions
of the pressure plates!

6. If the marking 2.04 or 2.06 was visible on the built-in pressure plate, turn
over the pressure plate and reinsert it.
- or -
➜ If the marking 2.04 or 2.06 was not visible on the built-in pressure plate,
insert a new pressure plate of the same thickness with the marking facing
upward.
7. Press the spring pin (5) into the spring part (4) and insert the clamping
lever (2).
8. Tighten the screws (1).
9. Make sure that the lifter (6) moves smoothly.

Further information:
 Replacing yarn carrier [39]
 Symbols in this document [3]

209
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

Turning over or replacing the 1. Dismantle yarn carrier.

Turning over or replacing the small pressure plates (intarsia yarn carrier type 2)

small pressure plates

Dismantling of small pressure plate

(intarsia yarn carrier type 2)

Dismantling of small pressure plate

2. Remove the screws (1).

3. Remove the parts (2). Make sure that the springs (3) are not lost.
4. Lift the clamping lever (4) out of the locating pin and remove it downwards.
Make sure that the spring pin (5) remains in the housing.
5. Check whether the thickness designation 2, 4 or 6 is visible on the built-in
small pressure plates.
6. Remove the pressure plate from the clamping lever.

NOTICE
Complicated adjustment work is required when replacing the
pressure plates!
If the various thicknesses and positions of the pressure plates
are interchanged, complicated adjustment work is required to
set the stopping point of the yarn carrier correctly.
➜ Do not interchange the various thicknesses and positions
of the pressure plates!

7. If the marking 2, 4 or 6 is visible on the built-in small pressure plate, turn

over the pressure plate and reinsert it.
- or -
➜ If the marking is not visible, the pressure plate is already turned over.
Replace the pressure plate by a new one with the same thickness. When
assembling, make sure that the marking is visible.
8. Press the spring pin (5) into the housing and insert the clamping lever (4).
9. Insert the parts (2) and tighten the screws (1).
10. Make sure that the lifter (6) moves smoothly.

Further information:
 Replacing yarn carrier [39]

210
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Advanced adjustments

4.2.24 Intarsia yarn carrier - Correct stopping point (correction

Intarsia yarn carrier - Correct stopping point (correction value) *

value) *
Keys for correcting the stopping point

Key Function

Call up the "Yarn carrier" window

Call up the "Adjusting yarn carrier" window

Keys for correcting the stopping point

1. Call up the "Yarn carrier" window.

2. Tap the "Adjusting yarn carriers" key.
3. Enter the yarn carrier correction value.
4. Confirm entries.
5. Return to the "Yarn carrier" window.

Further information:
 Adjusting yarn carriers [121]
 Intarsia yarn carrier - Adjust stopping point (basic setting, braking value) *
[199]
 Intarsia yarn carrier - check the pressure plates * [209]
 Adjusting yarn carriers (Setup2) [124]
 Adjusting yarn carriers (Setup1) [126]
 Symbols in this document [3]
Float slider (holding-down jack control)

211
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

4.2.25 Float slider (holding-down jack control)

Valid for: Type Component type (or higher) Gauge

CMS 530 642 Not possible E10 │ E12 │ E14 │

E16
621 002 E18 │ E6.2 │ E7.2 │
E8.2
CMS 822 623 004

Problem When swiveling the Intarsia yarn carrier, thread loops

occur, which lead to errors in the fabric (thread loops,
holes, drop stitches).

Basic At the time of swiveling the Intarsia yarn carrier, the

holding-down jacks are simultaneously closed. With
some yarns this can cause problems - the thread piece
"needle-yarn carrier" is clamped by the holding-down
jacks. This thread piece cannot be bulled back by the
lateral yarn tensioners. A thread loop is built, which can
be knitted-in by the following knitting system.

Rectification Modify the holding-down jack control.

The opening angle of the float slider is adjustable. In the
"open" position the holding-down jacks will no longer
close completely so that the thread will not be clamped.

: Knitting-in the Intarsia yarn carrier.

With longer floats it is possible that the tuck loop will not
be laid-in reliably, for example with tuck {5} - - v - - or
stitch {5} - - o - -.

Rectification
In the "Yarn Field Allocation" select the following for
knitting-in.
◆ Module for knitting-in: Float {0} - knitting-in
◆ Binding or knot at the start: Knot Split

Tip If possible:
◆ knit pattern with half racking (V#)
◆ Adjust the float slider in the "open" position

212
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Advanced adjustments

CMS 530 Change the opening angle of the float slider:

1. Loosen the screw (1) with an Allen key (SW 3).

2. Using the Allen key move the screw and with it the float slider downward.
 The end of the float slider protrudes from the base plate.
3. Tighten the screw (1).
4. Repeat the process on the other side of the holding-down jack control.
5. Repeat this operation with all the holding-down jack controls of the
machine.
CMS 822
Keys for opening the holding-down jacks

Key Function

Call up "Manual interventions" window

Call up the "Service" menu

Call up the "Holding-down jack control" window

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for opening the holding-down jacks

Change the opening angle of the float slider:

1. Program an empty row and fix the knitting specification.
2. From the "Main menu" call up the "Manual interventions" window.
3. Tap the "On" key in the "Carr.revers.outs.n.bed" field.
4. Start the machine with the engaging rod and stop it again when the left
carriage is located shortly after the left reversing position.
5. Start with the conversion of the float sliders at the left carriage.
6. Call up the "Service" menu from the "Main menu".

213
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

7. Call up the "Holding-down jack control" window.

8. In the "Open/Close jacks" box, tap on the "Open" key.
 The holding-down jacks are opened.
9. Lift the lever (1) somewhat and rotate it 90 degrees outwards until it
engages again.
10. Repeat the process on the other side of the holding-down jack control.
11. Loosen the screw (2) with an Allen key (SW 3).

12. Using the Allen key move the screw and with it the float slider to the (B)
position.
13. Tighten the screw (2).
14. Repeat this operation with the holding-down jack controls in the left
carriage.
15. Move the carriage to the right and stop it again, if the right carriage is
located shortly after the right reversing position.
16. Repeat the steps 6 to 14 for the right carriage.
Normal yarn carrier type 2

214
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Advanced adjustments

4.2.26 Normal yarn carrier type 2

Normal yarn carrier type 1 Normal yarn carriers and intarsia yarn carriers cannot be used on the same
track.

Reason: The disengaging arms (1) of the normal yarn carrier collide with the
intarsia yarn carrier or the yarn carrier limiter.
Possible combinations for normal yarn carriers type1 and type2:

Each combination can be used with itself or with another combination.

: Equip the yarn carrier tracks from inward to outward.
Normal yarn carrier type 2 That's why a new normal yarn carrier has been developed.

It has got no disengaging arms but lifters (2), similar to the intarsia yarn carrier.
Thus, this yarn carrier can be used with intarsia yarn carriers on the same
track.
The normal yarn carrier type 2 is used for:
 "normal" knitting
The yarn carrier knits for example the 2x1 fabric start, and some intarsia
yarn carriers are additionally located on the same rail.
You had to use an intarsia yarn carrier for the 2x1 fabric start so far (cost
saving).
 Plating with 2 yarn carriers.
The normal yarn carrier type 2 is used for plating. This was not possible
before.

215
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

The normal yarn carrier can be used with both types of intarsia yarn carriers
on the same yarn carrier rail.

Normal yarn carrier type 2 Intarsia yarn

carrier type 1

Normal yarn carrier type 2 Intarsia yarn

carrier type 2

Normal yarn carrier type 2 Normal yarn

carrier type 2

Plating with the normal yarn

Engaging width (a) Machine
carrier type2
43 mm CMS 933

46 mm CMS 822
CMS 530
29 mm
CMS 520
Standard yarn carrier ("normal"
knitting) CMS 530 T

23 mm CMS 730 T

: only usable under certain

conditions.
Depending on the machine gauge
( ≥ E10) and the machine speed,
the needle latches can be
damaged.
Remedy: Increase the engaging
width.

Further information:
 Adjusting yarn carriers [193]
Plating – the different possibilities

216
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Advanced adjustments

4.2.27 Plating – the different possibilities

Remarks Gauge / Machine

1 yarn carrier Double Bow Plating Yarn ◆ For thin, elastic yarn (e.g. lycra) All gauges, except
(assembled on one Carrier ◆ adjustable engaging width E3, E4
yarn carrier rail) ◆ The left and right engaging widths
Further information
may be different
[219]
◆ Special yarn carrier
◆ Clamping/cutting (setting: 2x8)

2 yarn carriers Yarn carrier carriage with ◆ Engaging width individually All gauges, except
(assembled on two adjustable engaging width adjustable (26 to 46 mm) E3, E4
yarn carrier rails) ◆ The left and right engaging widths
not for:
may be different
CMS 520 C
CMS 830 C

Further information
[221]

Normal yarn carrier type 2 ◆ The only possibility of plating All gauges, except
when intarsia yarn carriers are E3, E4
located on the same rail
not for:
◆ For intarsia yarn carriers of types
CMS 502
1 and 2
CMS 520 C
◆ The yarn carrier is usable for a
CMS 830 C
"normal" knitting with intarsia yarn
carrier Further information
[215]

217
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

Remarks Gauge / Machine

2 yarn carriers 2 yarn carrier carriages ◆ The cheapest solution: E10 │ E12 │ E14
(assembled on two yarn Only one additional yarn carrier E16 │ E18 │ E6.2
carrier rails) carriage (43 or 46 mm) has to be E7.2 │ E8.2 │
bought. The yarn carrier bow will E9.2
be taken from a normal yarn
carrier.
◆ Different yarn thicknesses can be
43 mm: ID 257 241 processed (different yarn carrier
bows are usable).
2 yarn carrier carriages E5 │ E7 │ E8
◆ Non-adjustable engaging width
E2,5.2 │ E3,5.2
E5.2

46 mm: ID 244 998

1 Yarn carrier + ◆ Yarn carrier carriage (35 mm) CMS 520 C

1 yarn carrier carriage The yarn carrier bow will be taken CMS 830 C
from a normal yarn carrier.
◆ Different yarn thicknesses can be
processed.

E7, E8 E10, E12

Track 2+7 ID 258 600 ID 258 603

Track 3+6 ID 258 601 ID 258 604

Track 4+5 ID 258 602 ID 258 605

◆ Non-adjustable engaging width

Further information:
 Plating - Double bow yarn carrier [219]
 Plating - Plating yarn carrier carriage [221]
 Normal yarn carrier type 2 [215]
 Plating - Double bow yarn carrier [219]
 Plating - Plating yarn carrier carriage [221]
 Normal yarn carrier type 2 [215]
Plating - Double bow yarn carrier

218
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Advanced adjustments

4.2.28 Plating - Double bow yarn carrier

Clamping and cutting bed 2x16, plating

Clamping and cutting bed When using 16 times clamping / cutting, every other clamping / cutting point
2x16 has to be deactivated to ensure that both threads are reliably clamped and cut.
Carry out the settings in the "Machine Configuration 2" window.
(BootOkc -> Restart and Configuration -> Machine configuration 2)
Setting: 2x16/8
Adjust the double bow yarn carrier

Adjust the double bow yarn

carrier

1 Central bow (fixed) Plating Yarn

2 Follower bow (movable, following the central bow) Basic Yarn

Central bow (1) - adjust 1. Loosen the screw (3) (turn by 90 degrees).
height:
2. Adjust the central bow the same way as the normal yarn carrier.
3. Retighten the screw.
Follower bow (2) - adjust 1. Loosen both screws (4) (turn by 90 degrees).
height:
2. Adjust the height turning the screw (5).
Standard setting: 2 mm higher than the central bow.
3. Retighten both screws (4).
4. Turn the screw (5) enough to prevent it from touching the upper or lower
edge. If the screw is making contact, then the yarn carrier does not move
smoothly and will be damaged.

219
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

Follower bow (2) - carry out 1. A screw is located in the boring (6). Adjust it with an Allen key (2 mm)
the lateral adjustment: (Setting range: 0 - 2 mm).
2. The distance from the bow (2) to the bow (1) can be set individually on
each side. A scale simplifies the setting of the distance.
Adjusting the distance for the left side (distance visible on the right scale)

Adjusting the distance for the left side (distance visible on the right scale)
Thread the double bow yarn carrier

Thread the double bow yarn

Threading possibilities

carrier

Threading possibilities
Exampleplating
Colored for a plating
patternpattern

Colored plating pattern

The light, visible thread on the fabric front side is the plating yarn (threaded in the fixed
central bow)

The dark thread is the basic yarn (threaded in the movable follower bow)

When an elastic thread is knitted, it is said that it is plated which

is technologically not quite correct. The yarn is actually knitted
with the plating process, and from the technological point of
view, the elastic thread is the basic yarn, and the visible one is
the plating yarn.

220
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Advanced adjustments

4.2.29 Plating - Plating yarn carrier carriage

Plating - Plating yarn carrier carriage

Not for CMS 520 C, CMS 830

Plating yarn carrier - carriage, combination possibilities

Two yarn carriers which differ depending on the engaging width (1) on the yarn
carrier carriage, are used for plating with normal yarn carriers. The engaging
width is adjustable individually (23-46 mm) on this yarn carrier carriage.
Combination possibilities of the yarn carriers:
 2 plating yarn carrier carriages
 1 standard yarn carrier, and 1plating yarn carrier carriage
Example for a plating pattern
Colored plating pattern

Colored plating pattern

The light, visible yarn on the fabric front side is the plating yarn (yarn carrier with the
smaller engaging width)

The dark yarn is the basic yarn (yarn carrier with the larger engaging width)

When an elastic thread is knitted, it is said that it is plated which

is technologically not quite correct. The yarn is actually knitted
with the plating process, and from the technological point of
view, the elastic thread is the basic yarn, and the visible one is
the plating yarn.
Clamping and cutting bed 2x16, plating

Clamping and cutting bed When using 16 times clamping / cutting, every other clamping / cutting point
2x16 has to be deactivated to ensure that both threads are reliably clamped and cut.
Carry out the settings in the "Machine Configuration 2" window.
(BootOkc -> Restart and Configuration -> Machine configuration 2)
Setting: 2x16/8
Setting

221
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

Setting

Adjust engaging width:

1. Loosen both screws (1).
2. Push insert (2) into the desired position.
A scale simplifies the adjustment.
3. Retighten both screws (1).
4. Repeat the setting process for the other side.
The entire engaging width consists of the value for the left (Ua) and the right
(Ub) hand-side.
Both values may be equal (symmetrical setting) or may differ.
Engaging width plating yarn carrier carriage (5xx, 9xx, TC-T)

Recommended engaging width (specifications in millimetres)

Gauge leading Following

E10 │ E12 │ E14 29 43

E16 │ E18 │ E6.2 Ua: 14.5 Ua: 21.5
E7.2 │ E8.2 │ E9.2 Ub: 14.5 Ub: 21.5

E5 │ E7 │ E8 29 46
E2,5.2 │ E3,5.2 Ua: 14.5 Ua: 23.0
E5.2 Ub: 14.5 Ub: 23.0

The engaging width of the standard yarn carrier is 29 mm.

222
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Advanced adjustments

Settings on the knitting If you change the engaging width, you have to enter the changed values (Ua,
machine Ub).
 Setup2: "Yarn carrier" window ->"Adjust yarn carrier" window-> "Y:Ua-b /
Y:Ncc" tab
 Setup1: "Yarn carrier" window -> "Adjust yarn carrier" window

Changing the position of the knock-over wire

223
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

4.2.30 Changing the position of the knock-over wire

Valid for: Type Component type Gauge
(or higher)

CMS 530 621 002 E12

CMS 520 620 001 E16

CMS 502 626 E18

CMS 740 630 E6.2 (E12m.10)

CMS 822 623 E7.2

CMS 933 773 E8.2

The position of the knock-over wire affects the stitch appearance.

 Position 1: Under normal circumstances the position of the knock-over

wire does not need to be changed.
 Position 2: For some patterns it is possible to improve the stitch
appearance if the stitch is taken down from the needle with a steeper
angle.

Application area To be observed

1 Default ◆ all the fabric types

2 Special ◆ Adapt the stitch

Only in case of a problem
with: tension of the net row.
◆ single jersey fabric ◆ with a double jersey
◆ Plating fabric the selvedge
◆ multi-system knitting stitch might tear.

For replacing the knock-over wire you need a small pair of pliers.
1. Cast-off or transfer the stitches of the needle bed, which is converted.
2. Stop the carriage in the left reversing position.

224
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Advanced adjustments

3. Remove screw (3) on left and right-hand sides of jack bed. Use the special
hexagon screwdriver from the accessories for this purpose.

4. Loosen the screw (4) on the left and right-hand sides of the jack bed.
5. Remove the limiter (5) on both sides.
6. Pull out the wire (1) with the pair of pliers.

7. Push in the wire in position (2).

8. Reassemble the needle bed in the reverse order.
Overview of all machine data

225
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Advanced adjustments

4.2.31 Overview of all machine data

In the "Machine data sheet" window, the current values of the machine data
are displayed (NPK, VPK, VGK, CMS ADF-3: Correction values of the yarn
carriers).
The machine data include the machine-specific settings (correction values).

Keys for calling up the Machine data sheet window

Key Function

Call up the "Service" window

Call up "Diagnostics" window

Call up the "Machine data sheet" window

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for calling up the "Machine data sheet" window

Display Machine Data:

1. In the "Main menu", tap on the "Service" key.
 The "Service" window is displayed.
2. Tap on the "Diagnostics" key.
 The "Diagnostics" window is displayed.
3. Tap on the "Machine data sheet" key.
 The "Machine data sheet" window with the current machine data is
displayed.

226
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Working with files

You can compare the current values with the factory settings.
These can be found on the printed data sheet at the right
control cabinet.

Working with files

227
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Working with files

4.3 Working with files

NOTICE
Computer viruses!
Loss of data or production. Computer viruses can creep into
the machine through unscanned data via USB port or network.
➜ Bring in only virus free data on to the knitting machine.

This chapter contains information on:

 Help on working in the windows [229]
 File manager [234]
 Working with files, libraries and folders [238]
 Displaying file in pattern editor [243]
 Clear knitting memory [245]
 Copying files [247]
 Selecting the current folder [250]
 Carrying out a program check [252]
Help on working in the windows

228
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Working with files

4.3.1 Help on working in the windows

The following help items should be heeded so that you may work in the various
windows.
Call up direct help
Direct help key

Key Function

Call up "Direct Help" for the key pressed next

"Direct help" key

➜ To receive direct help on a specific key in the menu, first tap the "direct
help" key and then the key for which you want help.
Positioning cursor The text is entered at the point at which the cursor (insert mark) is located.
➜ To move the cursor to a certain position, touch that position.
Marking text A word or a text block is marked for being copied, moved or deleted.
1. To mark a word, tap the word twice.
2. To mark a line, tap the line three times.
3. To mark a text block, drag your finger from the starting position to the end
position.
- or -
On the 1st level of the SINTRAL editor, use both keys "Set beginning of a
marking" and "Set end of a marking".
Deactivating marking ➜ To cancel a marking, touch any spot.
Setting/deactivating write
Activate write protection and Deactivate write protection key

protection Key Function

"Set Write Protection": Set write protection of the selected file

"Deactivate Write Protection": Deactivate write protection of

the selected file

"Activate write protection" and "Deactivate write protection" key

➜ If a write-protected file is loaded, the information "Write protection"

appears in the status line of the SINTRAL editor.

229
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Working with files

Entries in selection window Selection windows are open when some keys are selected. The following
entry is possible:
 a text can be entered with the virtual keyboard
 a selection occurs manually by tapping a key
The entries must be confirmed by the "Confirm entry" key.
Function keys in the selection windows

Key Function Key Function

Return to the 1st level in Confirm input and run in

the SINTRAL editor the SINTRAL editor

Function keys in the selection windows

Call up "Search" selection The corresponding location is sought when you enter line numbers or text and
window select the keys.
Search and Continue keys

Key Function

"Search": search for a specific term

"Carry on searching": Continue searching for a certain term

"Search" and "Continue" keys

1. Call up the "Search" selection window with the "Search" key.

 The "Search for" window appears.
Search selection window

"Search" selection window

2. Enter the line number or text to be searched for with the virtual keyboard.
3. Select options for uppercase/lowercase letters and the search direction.
4. To start the "Search from begin", select the "Yes" key.
- or -
➜ Select the "No" key if you only want to search from here.
5. To activate the search, tap the top arrow key,
- or -
➜ To exit the window, tap the bottom arrow key.
6. To find other instances of the text, tap the "Continue" key,
- or -
➜ To start the next search, enter a new line number or text with the virtual
keyboard.

230
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Working with files

If the message "Search title not found" appears:

Either the text searched for is not contained in the knitting
program or the options are not set correctly.
➜ Check the text entered.
➜ Change the search direction.

Call up "Replace" selection This is replaced in the loaded file by entering line numbers and commands and
window selecting the keys.
Replace key

Key Function

"Replace": search for a certain term and replace it by a new

one

"Replace" key

1. Call up the "Replace" selection window. Answer the safety prompt.

 The "Replace by" window appears.
Replace selection window

"Replace" selection window

2. Enter the text to be replaced via "Search for" with the virtual keyboard.
3. Enter the text to be inserted via "Replace by" with the virtual keyboard.
4. Selecting the "All" key, the text (without prompt in Item 7) is replaced
throughout the entire file.
5. Select options for uppercase/lowercase letters and the search direction.
6. To activate the search, tap the top arrow key,
- or -
➜ To exit the window, tap the bottom arrow key.

If the message "Search title not found" appears:

Either the text searched for is not contained in the knitting
program or the options are not set correctly.
➜ Check the text entered.
➜ Change the search direction.

7. Answer the question in the newly opened selection window. Press the key
"1" to confirm.
- or -
➜ For repeated prompting, press the "0" key if the term is only to be replaced
once.
➜ Press the "ESC" key to cancel.

231
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Working with files

Call up "Go to" selection You can jump to the corresponding point in the loaded file by entering line
window numbers or names and selecting the keys.
Go to key

Key Function

"Go to" a certain position

"Go to" key

1. Call up the "Go to" selection window with the "Go to" key.
 The "Go to" window appears.
Selection window for Go to function key

Selection window for "Go to" function key

2. Enter the line number or name to be searched for with the virtual keyboard.
3. To go to Sintral line numbers, tap the "Sintral line" key,
- or -
➜ To execute a real line jump, tap the "Editor line" key,
➜ To jump to the named line, tap the "Label" key.
4. To activate the search, tap the right arrow key,
- or -
➜ To exit the window, tap the left arrow key.
Automatic calling of virtual The virtual keyboard is automatically activated when various function keys are
keyboard selected. Either a number block appears for inputting numbers or an
alphanumeric keyboard appears for entering letters and numbers.
The virtual keyboard contains three switchover keys:
 SHIFT key
 CPS LCK key
 CTRL key

232
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Working with files

To use a shift key, e.g. to enter a special character, first press the shift key and
then the key with the special character. To return to normal characters, press
the switchover key again.
Switchover keys

Key Function

Switch on virtual keyboard

Switch off virtual keyboard

SHIFT key: switch over between uppercase and

lowercase letters and between numbers and special
characters

CPS LCK key: switch over between uppercase and

lowercase letters; the setting of numbers or special
characters is maintained

CTRL key: switch over to function keys F1 to F10 and

keyboard codes (short cuts)

Switchover keys
File manager

233
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Working with files

4.3.2 File manager

Files and folders (directories and images) are managed in "File -Manager"
window.
File manager window

"File manager" window

All actions pertaining to folders are mentioned on the left side. A new folder
can be created, for example.
You have access to the following data media:
 USB Memory Stick
 Hard disk of the computer in the knitting machine
 Online
 Network
On the right hand-side the files from the selected folders are displayed. This
list of files appears in alphabetical order (standard setting), and the number of
existing files is displayed on the status line (Total:).
Setting the sort sequence The sort sequence can individually be adjusted. To do so, click on the header
line (1). Select and confirm the sort sequence in the "Sort by" window.
Setting the sort criteria

Setting the sort criteria

234
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Working with files

Keys for the File manager window

Key Function

Call up the "Load & save" window

Call up "Additional function keys"

Call up "File manager" window

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for the "File manager" window

Call up "File manager" window:

1. From the "Main menu" call up the "Load & Save" window.
2. Call up "Additional function keys".
3. Call up the "File Manager" window.

235
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Working with files

Actions in the "File manager"

File manager window

window

"File manager" window

Keys in the File manager window

Key Function Key Function

"Update": Refresh the "Delete all": Delete all

contents of all the files in the selected
folders folder

"Create folder": Create "Display file": Display

folder in the selected selected file
directory

"Copy folder": Copy "Rename file": Change

selected folder, name of selected file
including contents
(subfolders, files) to
the target folder.

"Delete folder": Delete "Set Write Protection":

selected folder, Set write protection of
including contents the selected file
(subfolders, files)

"Rename folder": "Deactivate Write

Change the name of Protection":
the selected folder Deactivate write
protection of the
selected file

"Update": Update the Call up "Direct Help"

contents of the folder for the key pressed
next

"Delete file": Delete

selected file

Keys in the "File manager" window

236
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Working with files

Call up the selection window With the selection of a drive or a folder in the list on the left side, the key
"Create folder" "Create folder " appears.
Create folderkey in window File-Manager

"Create folder"key in window "File-Manager"

1. Tap the desired folder in the list on the left in which the new folder is to be
created.
2. Call up the selection window with the key "Create folder".
 The window "Create new folder" appears
Selection window Create new folder

Selection window "Create new folder"

3. Enter the name of the new folder with the virtual keyboard.
4. To save the new folder, press the right arrow key,
- or -
➜ To exit the window, tap the left arrow key.

Further information:
 KnitLAN connection [262]
 Selecting the current folder [250]
Working with files, libraries and folders

237
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Working with files

4.3.3 Working with files, libraries and folders

Working with files (Sintral, jacquard, setup), libraries (Auto-Sintral) and pattern
folders occurs in the "Load & save".
The file list is divided into machine type, file name, type and changed_on:.
Sorting is possible in each of the 4 columns by pressing the column header. In
the status line of the list, the number of existing files (total:), the file size and
the date/time of the last change to the selected file are displayed.
You have access to the following data media:
 Removable data carrier (on the USB socket)
for example: USB-Memory-Stick, floppy disk drive, CD drive, DVD drive,
external hard disk
 Hard disk of the computer in the knitting machine
 Online
 Network drive

If "EALL" is activated when loading, the previously loaded

pattern is completely deleted.
Keys for Load & save window

Keys Function

Call up the "Load & save" window

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for "Load & save" window

238
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Working with files

Work with files and folders:

NOTICE
Data loss!
Files and folders might be deleted accidentally if you do not
proceed carefully!
➜ Create a back-up copy of each folder!

1. From the "Main menu" call up the "Load & Save" window.
Load & save window

"Load & save" window

2. Set the desired path with one of the "Direct pattern folder selection" keys.
3. Use the PAT/SIN/JAC/SET/LIB keys to select whether the entire pattern
of the current machine (PAT) or individual file types are to be listed.
4. Select file.
5. Select action.
6. If an additional prompt appears, tap the "1" key to confirm,
- or -
➜ Press the key "0" to cancel.
7. Call up "Main menu".

239
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Working with files

Actions in "Load & save"

Load & save window

window

"Load & save" window

240
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Working with files

Keys in Load & save window

Key Function

"Direct folder selection":

predefined folder selection

"Current folder selection":

Open the dialog box for definition of the
current folder

Display the content of the Zip file (for

Setup2)

Close the zip file (for Setup2)

Load selected file and accompanying

pattern elements

Load pattern with selected setup data (for

Setup2)

Save selected pattern parts in the current

folder

Save pattern with selected setup data (for

Setup2)

Delete selected file

Display selected file

"Add": add selected file and corresponding

pattern elements to pattern already loaded

Editing the setup data (for Setup1)

241
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Working with files

Key Function

"Update": Update the contents of the folder

Call up "Direct Help" for the key pressed

next

Activate/deactivate "Entire pattern

selection".

Activate/deactivate "Sintral selection"

Activate/deactivate "Jacquard selection"

Activate/deactivate "Setup selection"

Activate/deactivate "Library selection"

Activate/deactivate "EALL selection"

Activate/deactivate "EAY selection"

Activate/deactivate "SP1 selection"

Activate/deactivate "YLC selection"

Keys in "Load & save" window

Further information:
 KnitLAN connection [262]
 Selecting the current folder [250]
 Copying files [247]
 Displaying file in pattern editor [243]
 Setup2 Editor [6]
 Setup1 - Editing the setup file [34]

242
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Working with files

4.3.4 Displaying file in pattern editor

Displaying file in pattern editor

The selected file from the "Load & save" window is displayed in the "Pattern
editor" window (preview).
Keys for the Pattern editor window

Key Function

Call up the "Load & save" window

"Display file" key

Call up "Pattern editor" window

Keys for the "Pattern editor" window

Displaying file in pattern editor:

1. From the "Main menu" call up the "Load & Save" window.
2. Select the file to be viewed in the file list.
3. Tap the "Display file" key.
4. The "Pattern editor" window is open.
Actions in the "Pattern editor"
Pattern editor window

window

"Pattern editor" window

243
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Working with files

Keys in the Pattern editor window

Key Function

search for a specific term

"Continue": Continue to find a certain term

"Go to" a certain position

Carry out the "Quick jump" corresponding mark (e.g.

from FBEG to FEND)

"Enlarge": Display text enlarged

"Reduce": Display the text decreased

"Function list": Toggle on/off the display of pattern

functions.

Call up "Direct Help" for the key pressed next

Keys in the "Pattern editor" window

Clear knitting memory

244
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Working with files

4.3.5 Clear knitting memory

The current knitting program with which your knitting machine works is saved
in the knitting memory. When you delete the knitting memory, this has no
influence on the saved patterns and files on the data carriers.
Keys for deleting the knitting memory

Key Function

Call up the "Load & save" window

Call up "Additional function keys"

Call up "Delete knitting memory"

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for deleting the knitting memory

Clear knitting memory 1. Call up the "Load & save" window.
Load & save window

"Load & save" window

2. Call up "Additional function keys".

3. Call up "Delete knitting memory".
4. Call up "Main menu".

If the "EALL" key is not selected, individual files (sin, jac or

Autosintral) of the knitting memory can be deleted.

245
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Working with files

Deleting individual files in the 1. Call up the "Load & save" window.
knitting memory:
Load & save window

"Load & save" window

2. Select the file via the SIN or JAC key.

3. Call up "Additional function keys".
4. Call up "Delete knitting memory".
5. Call up "Main menu".
Copying files

246
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Working with files

4.3.6 Copying files

Files are copied from one drive to another in the "Copying catalog" window.
This list of files appears in alphabetical order, the number of existing files is
displayed on the status line (Total:) of the list.
In the following example, the files are copied from the hard disk to the USB
memory stick (backup copy).
Keys for the Copying catalog window

Key Function

Call up the "Load & save" window

Call up "Additional function keys"

Call up the "Copying catalogue" window

Keys for the "Copying catalog" window

Copy file from the hard disk to the USB memory stick :
1. Insert the USB memory stick into the USB socket.
2. From the "Main menu" call up the "Load & Save" window.
3. Call up "Additional function keys".
4. Call up the "Copying catalog" window.
Path specifications in the Copying catalog window

Path specifications in the "Copying catalog" window

5. Check whether the path in the "Source" and "Target" lists is correctly
displayed. The path is displayed at the end of each list.
6. If this is not so, change the path with the "Select current folder" key.
7. Tap the desired file in the left-hand list ("Source").
8. Tap the "Copy file" key.
 When the file is copied, it appears in the right list ("Target").
9. To copy other files, repeat steps 7 and 8.

247
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Working with files

Actions in "Copying catalog"

Path specifications in the Copying catalog window

window

Path specifications in the "Copying catalog" window

Keys in the Copying catalog window

Key Function Key Function

"Copying a file": Copy "Deactivate Write Protection":

file selected in Source Deactivate write protection of
to Target the selected file

"Copy all": Copy all "Current folder selection":

files from Source to Open the dialog box for
Target definition of the current folder

Delete selected file Call up "Direct Help" for the

key pressed next

"Delete all": Delete all "Change content": Exchange

files in the selected contents of Source and Target;
folder Source is always on the left,
Target on the right

"Set Write Protection": "Update": Update the contents

Set write protection of of the folder
the selected file

Keys in the "Copying catalog" window

Execute the action:

1. Tap the list for which the action is to be carried out.
2. Tap the desired button.
3. To carry out additional actions, repeat steps 1 and 2.

248
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Working with files

Setting the sort sequence The sort sequence can individually be adjusted. To do so, click on the header
line (1).
Copying catalog window

"Copying catalog" window

Select and confirm the sort sequence in the "Sort by" window.
Setting the sort criteria

Setting the sort criteria

Further information:
 Selecting the current folder [250]
Selecting the current folder

249
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Working with files

4.3.7 Selecting the current folder

General information Pattern files can be saved to various drives (memory locations) of the knitting
machine or to another computer on the network.
To load a file into the knitting machine from another drive, the entire path must
be specified. By path, we mean the specification of where the file is located,
for example on a drive of the M1 pattern workstation.

A path contains the following information:

1. Drive letter (or computer name) (e. g.: "D:" or "\\SERVER01")
2. Specification of the subdirectories (e. g.: "\PATTERN" or
"Stoll\M1\Extract\")
Standard setting Following drives are set by default in the keys of "Direct folder selection":
Standard settings of the drives

Key Drive Explanation

F:\ USB Memory Stick

D:\ Hard disk

Name:\ Network drive

Standard settings of the drives

Selecting the current folder The selection of the patterns from the "Load & save" window is applied in the
"Catalog order data ", "Catalog Sequence data" and "Catalog Sequence lists"
windows.
(Exception: The specification in the "Copying catalog" window is only effective
for this window.)
Using the "Select current folder" key, you specify the drive to which the 3
"Direct folder selection" keys are linked.

250
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Working with files

Keys for changing a path

Key Function

Call up the "Load & save" window

"Direct folder selection" key

The symbols of the 3 keys "Direct folder

selection" are adapted based on the linked
drive:

◆ USB Memory ◆ Hard disk

Stick ◆ KnitLAN
◆ Network drive ◆ Floppy disk
◆ CD drive drive (USB)
(USB)

"Select the current folder" key

End setting process and save changes

End setting process without saving changes

Keys for changing a path

Change the path of "Direct folder selection" key:

1. From the "Main menu" call up the "Load & Save" window.
2. Tap "Direct folder selection" key for which the path is to be changed.
3. Tap on the "Current folder selection" key.
 The input window "Select new folder " appears.
Select new folder window

"Select new folder" window

4. Select the new path.

251
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Working with files

5. End setting process and save changes.

 In the "Load & Save " window, the display of the key "Direct folder
selection" is adapted to the new path. The path is displayed below it.
Display of the set path

Display of the set path

Carrying out a program check

4.3.8 Carrying out a program check

If you carried out changes in the knitting program you can have your inputs
checked. With it the knitting program will be checked for its knitting ability. If
an error is detected, an error message will be displayed in the lower area of
the window. Tapping the "?" key will display notes about the reason and
remedy of the problem.
Please note that only program errors, so-called syntax errors can be found.
Errors in the jacquard area cannot be detected.
During the program test, the pattern is displayed in the upper area and the TP
messages in the lower area. The window size of both areas can be changed.
Keys for the Program test window

Key Function

Call up "Main menu"

Call up "Editor" window

Call up "Additional function keys"

Call up "Program test" window

Keys for the "Program test" window

Call up "Program test" window:

 A knitting program is being loaded.
1. From the "Main menu" call up the "Editor" window.
2. Call up "additional function keys".
3. Call up the"Program Test" window.

252
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Working with files

Actions in "Program test"

Program test window

window

"Program test" window

253
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Working with the Sintral editor

Keys in the Program test window

Key Function

"Start program test": Start program test from 1st line

"Start program test": Start program test from a certain

line on

"Interrupt program test": Interrupt program test and

restart it

"End program test"

"Go to" a certain position

Carry out the "Quick jump" corresponding mark (e.g.

from FBEG to FEND)

"Display warning": Activate/deactivate presentation

of warnings during a program test

"Enlarge": Display text enlarged

"Reduce": Display the text decreased

"Change size": Change window size of pattern and

error output

Call up "Direct Help" for the key pressed next

Keys in the "Program test" window

Working with the Sintral editor

254
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Working with the Sintral editor

4.4 Working with the Sintral editor

Minor changes or additions to the knitting programs are processed with the
Sintral editor. To be able to process a knitting program with the Sintral editor,
the knitting machine must be stopped. During production you can view the
knitting program only.

Further information:
 Help on working in the windows [229]
Activating Sintral editor

4.4.1 Activating Sintral editor

Key for the Sintral Editor window

Key Function

Call up the "SINTRAL-editor" window

Key for the "Sintral Editor" window

➜ Call up the "SINTRAL-editor" window.

 The window of the first level in the "SINTRAL Editor" appears. The file
currently loaded is shown in this window.
Window of the first level in the SINTRAL editor

Window of the first level in the "SINTRAL editor"

255
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Working with the Sintral editor

Keys of the first level in the SINTRAL editor

Key Function Key Function

"Switch toolbar": Switch search for a specific term

over toolbar to second
level

Display the toolbar for "Continue": Continue to

"Mask jump". find a certain term

"Start of marking": Set the "Replace": search for a

beginning of a marking. certain term and replace it
An existing marking is by a new one
removed.

"End of marking": Set the "Go to" a certain position

end of a selection

"Cut": Cut selected area "Go to" submenu is

opened

"Copy": copy selected Carry out the "Quick jump"

area corresponding mark (e.g.
from FBEG to FEND)

"Insert": reinsert copied or Activate and deactivate

cut area display of "Keyboard"

"Undo action": the Call up "Direct Help" for

previous action is undone the key pressed next
(also possible several
times)

"Redo": Restore an
undone action (also
possible several times).

Keys of the first level in the "SINTRAL editor"

256
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Working with the Sintral editor

2nd level of "SINTRAL Pressing the "Switch over toolbar" key, the window goes to the 2nd level of the
Editor" "SINTRAL Editor".
Window of the second level in the SINTRAL-Editor

Window of the second level in the "SINTRAL-Editor"

Additional keys of the second level of the SINTRAL editor

Key Function Key Function

"Switch toolbar": Switch "Pack and unpack

over toolbar to first level jacquard": Pack or
unpack selected jacquard
lines

"Enlarge": Display text "Set jacquard start": Set

enlarged start of jacquard on
current line

"Reduce": Display the text Switch over between

decreased current pattern and
"Auto-Sintral"

"Remove tile window": "Delete all": delete the

Remove tile window complete pattern
(horizontally or vertically)

"Tile window horizontally": "Delete" submenu is

Tile window horizontally opened

"Tile window vertically": "Sort" marked area

Tile window vertically ascending by line
numbers

"Function list": Toggle on/ "Renumber": Reissue

off the display of pattern line numbers in the
functions. selected area

Activate and deactivate Call up "Direct Help" for

display of Sintral "error the key pressed next
messages"

Additional keys of the second level of the "SINTRAL editor"

257
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Working with the Sintral editor

"Auto-Sintral" function key To activate this key, "Auto-Sintral" must be loaded. In the editor now one can
switch between the currently loaded pattern and "Auto-Sintral".
Auto-Sintral key

Key Function

Switch over between current pattern and "Auto-Sintral"

"Auto-Sintral" key
"Tile window horizontally" This function makes two editors available which work independently of one
function key another. When opening, the jacquard is jumped to in the lower editor. The size
of the division is changed via both arrow keys on the left or right sides at the
bottom edge of the screen.
Window for the function Tile window horizontally

Window for the function "Tile window horizontally"

Function keys for the function Tile window horizontally

Key Function Key Function

enlarge lower part enlarge upper part

Function keys for the function "Tile window horizontally"

258
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Working with the Sintral editor

"Tile window vertically" This function makes two editors available, which both always show the same
function key lines. Vertical scrolling in one editor changes the second editor
simultaneously. Horizontal scrolling only changes one editor, and the start of
a long line can be displayed in the left editor and the rest on the right one.
Selections will immediately be copied in the other editor. The size of the
division is changed via both arrow keys on the left or right sides at the bottom
edge of the screen.
Window for the Tile window vertically function

Window for the "Tile window vertically" function

Function keys for the function Tile window vertically

Key Function Key Function

enlarge right part enlarge left part

Function keys for the function "Tile window vertically"

259
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Working with the Sintral editor

Call up "Go to" submenu Press the arrow key next to the "Go to" key. You can jump to the start or the
end of the file or line using this submenu.
Window Go to submenu

Window "Go to" submenu

Function keys in Go to submenu

Key Function Key Function

Go to the start of the file Go to the start of the line

Go to the end of the file Go to the end of the line

Go to the begin of
jacquard

Function keys in "Go to" submenu

Call up "Delete" - submenu Press the arrow key next to the "Delete" key. Sintral, jacquard or a line from
the loaded file can be deleted via this submenu.
Window Delete submenu

Window "Delete" submenu

Function keys in Delete submenu

Key Function Key Function

Delete Sintral from file Delete specified line

from file

Delete jacquard from

file

Function keys in "Delete" submenu

Go to help in function and error list

260
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

KnitLAN connection

4.4.2 Go to help in function and error list

After loading and checking a file, the corresponding functions and error
messages can be displayed in the "SINTRAL editor". You can jump in these
lists using the following keys.
Keys for go to help

Key Function

"Go to help for next"

"Go to help for previous"

Keys for go to help

➜ To jump to the next function / to the next error in the knitting program, tap
the "Go to help for next" key.
- or -
➜ To jump to the previous function / to the previous error in the knitting
program, press the "Go to help for previous" key.
KnitLAN connection

261
4 Adjusting knitting machine

KnitLAN connection

4.5 KnitLAN connection

Valid for:

This description applies only to machines for which the connection to the Stoll
Nameserver is not active.
If the connection to the Stoll Nameserver is active, the "Network favorites" key is
not available since the KnitLAN connection will be configured on the Stoll
Nameserver.

The KnitLAN connection helps in the transmission of data and patterns

between the machine and an M1 or an FTP-Server (FTP = File Transfer
Protocol, network protocol for data transmission).
The KnitLAN connection takes the place of the previous online program. In this
chapter the setting of the KnitLAN connection is described. The selection of
computers for "My network" is described in the MCNET2 instructions.
You can use the KnitLAN connection for:
 Transmitting knitting programs
 Monitoring production
 Collecting machine data
Requirements:
 Machine and M1 are networking
 Operating system of the machine: V 1.2 (or higher)
 Software version of M1: V 3.9 (or higher)

262
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

KnitLAN connection

Configure the KnitLAN

Keys for setting the KnitLAN connection

connection: Key Function

Call up the "Service" menu

Call up the "Basic settings" menu

Call up the "Network favorites" window

Opens the understructure of the marked network.

Closes the substructure of the marked network.

Transfers the selected computer in the field "KnitLAN / ftp"

Deletes the selected computer

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for setting the KnitLAN connection

1. Call up the "Service" menu.

2. Call up the "Basic settings" menu.
3. Call up the "Network favorites" window.
Network favorites window

"Network favorites" window

1 Display of network environment which machine is integrated in.

2 Opens the understructure of the marked network.
3 Computers which are used for KnitLAN (e. g. pattern workstations) or
computers on which a FTP server is installed.
FTP = File transfer protocol (network protocol for data transmission).

263
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Defining user profile

4. From the entire network (1) select the computer of the M1.
If only the entire network is displayed, then open the substructure with the
(2) key.
5. Transfer the selected computer into the "KnitLAN / ftp" (3) field.
6. If another computer needs to be selected, repeat steps 4 and 5.
7. Call up the "Main menu".

You can apply the KnitLAN connection to one of the "Direct

folder selection" keys. The key is indicated with the symbol
"KnitLAN". You can see the contents of the folder on the M1 in
the selection field.

Working on the M1:

1. The access to the KnitLAN directories ("D:\\Stoll\\M1\\KnitLAN\\Bootfiles"
and "Mc-ReadWrite") must be open to run the online connection from the
M1 to the OKC machines.
Select the directory, call up the Context Menu, Properties, Share tab,
Share Folder
2. In the Windows firewall you have to call up the firewall settings and allow
the Stoll FTP service as an exception. (Start -> Control panel -> Windows
firewall -> Exceptions tab).
The program "Stoll FTP service" can be found under the installation path
of the M1 (e.g. "C:\Program Files\Stoll\M1\Bin\ftpservice.exe")

Further information:
 Selecting the current folder [250]
Defining user profile

264
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Defining user profile

4.6 Defining user profile

In the standard configuration each knitting machine user can open and make
changes to any window of the user interface. However, in some cases this is
not desirable and not every user is to be able to change data and machine
settings. This can be set with the "User profile" window. In this window, rights
as to which changes may be carried out and which may not, can be assigned
to a user or a user group. If a window is blocked, it can be called up and the
data viewed, however changes are not possible (exception: the password is
known to the user and he/she can enable the window).
The operating elements in a blocked window are shown on a light gray
background.
Blocked window Manual interventions

Blocked window "Manual interventions"

The assignment of the rights is reserved for an authorized person and

protected by a password.
Any number of user profiles can be defined, for example for:
 Knitters
 Personnel of the night shift
 Setup personnel (technicians)
 Foremen/Forewomen

NOTICE
The window is protected by a password!
When calling up a window, a password is always requested.
This serves the purpose of security so that no unauthorized
persons have access to this window.
➜ The password must remain secret.
➜ Uppercase and lowercase letters can be used in a
password.

➜ Note the password and keep it in a safe place.

If the password is lost, the Stoll Helpline can help with a special
password.

265
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Defining user profile

The "User profile" window

User profile window

"User profile" window

Field Function

1 Selection list of the window to be enabled or disabled. It is

possible to scroll down/up in the selection list with the scroll bar
(2). Additional windows are then available for selection.

3 Switch for blocking or enabling a window

4 Reset all changes

5 Operations for the selected user profile

6 Select or define user profile

266
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Defining user profile

Defining user profile

Keys for defining User profile

Key Function

Call up the "Service" window

Call up "User profile" window

Confirm password

Return to previous window (cancel process)

Block window

Enable window

Call up "Additional function keys"

Enable all windows

Block all windows

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for defining "User profile"

267
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Defining user profile

Defining user profile:

1. Call up the "Service" window.
2. Call up "User profile" window.
Entering password

Entering password

3. Enter and confirm the password with the keyboard. In the standard
configuration, the first password is "MASK.ACCESS". It is written in
uppercase letters and without quotation marks.
User profile window

"User profile" window

4. Block window: Tap the corresponding window in the selection list (1) and
tap on the "Block window" (3) switch.
- or -
➜ Tap the corresponding window in the selection list with a double click.
5. Enable window: If a window is blocked, then enable it again with a double
click.
- or -
➜ Tap the switch (3).
6. Only enable a few windows: First block all windows ("Additional function
keys" key and "Block all windows" key) and then enable the few windows
again.
7. Enable all windows: Tap the "Additional function keys" key and enable all
windows again with the "Enable all windows" key.
8. Give a name to the user profile and save it.
9. Define another user profile if necessary.
10. For the user profile to become effective, it must be activated with the
"Load" key.
11. Call up "Main menu".

268
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Defining user profile

Saving, loading, deleting The user profile can be saved, loaded and deleted.
user profiles ...
So that the same user profiles are active on all knitting machines, save the
user profiles to USB memory stick or a network drive and load them in each
machine.
Keys for Saving, loading, exporting user profile ...

Key Function

Call up the "Service" window

Call up "User profile" window

Confirm password

Confirm selection

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for "Saving, loading, exporting user profile ..."

Saving, loading, deleting user profiles ...:

1. Call up the "Service" window.
2. Call up "User profile" window.
User profile window

"User profile" window

3. Enter and confirm the password with the keyboard.

4. Select the desired program point (5) (loading, saving, deleting ...).
5. Select a user profile. Tap on the desired user profile in the field (6).
6. Confirm selection.
7. If additional user profiles are to be called up, repeat the steps 4 to 6.
8. Call up "Main menu".

269
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Defining user profile

Enabling blocked window During production it may be necessary to open a blocked window and carry
out a change or action. Or you find that it is necessary for this window to be
enabled for the active user. Naturally, this is only possible for a person who
knows the password.
Keys for Enabling blocked window

Key Function

Call up "Additional function keys"

Tap "Password"

Confirm password

Return to previous window (cancel process)

Call up "User profile" window

Keys for "Enabling blocked window"

Enabling blocked window:

1. Display the "additional function keys" in the blocked window.
2. Tap the "Password" key.
3. Enter the password with the keyboard.
Enabling blocked window window

"Enabling blocked window" window

4. Enable window once by tapping the "Confirm password" key.

- or -
➜ Change the user profile by tapping the "User profile" key.

270
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Defining user profile

Change password From time to time you should change the password to be sure that it has not
become known. Carry out this activity on all knitting machines.
If the knitting machine is connected with the STOLL pattern workstation, the
password can be changed simultaneously on all the knitting machines with the
help of on-line connection (see section "On-line commands" at the end of this
chapter).
Keys for Change password

Key Function

Call up the "Service" window

Call up "User profile" window

Confirm password

Call up "Additional function keys"

"Change password"

Keys for "Change password"

Call up "Main menu"

Modify password:
1. Call up the "Service" window.
2. Call up "User profile" window.
3. Enter and confirm the password with the keyboard.
4. Call up "Additional function keys"
5. Tap the "Change password" key.
Change password window

"Change password" window

6. Type in the new password in the top line.

7. Type in the new password again in the bottom line.
8. Confirm the password.
9. Call up "Main menu".

271
4 Adjusting knitting machine

Defining user profile

Examples of how a user Example 1:

profile can be specified
The machine settings are to be blocked. To do this, block the four windows in
the selection list.
User profile window

"User profile" window

Example 2:
When beginning work with user profiles, there is an uncertainty as to which
windows are required for daily work and which are not. We suggest using the
following procedure:
1. First block all windows.
2. The knitter begins working with the machine.
3. If something needs to be changed in a window, the knitter reports this and
the window is enabled in the user profile.
4. Save the user profile.
5. Continue this stepwise determination of the user profile for a certain period
of time. This may, for example, be for a working day or a week.
Online commands If the knitting machine is connected with the STOLL pattern workstation, the
password and the user profile can be changed simultaneously on all the
machines with the help of the on-line connection. The condition is that the
password is written in uppercase letters.
Commands for activating user profile and password

Commands Function

setuserlevel Password User profile name Activate the same user

profile on all knitting
machines
Example: The password is "JOE", the user profile is "david".
The complete command is: setuserlevel JOE david

setulword OldPassword NewPassword Activate the same

password on all knitting
machines
Example: The old password is "JOE", the new one is
"JOHN". The complete command is: setulpassword JOE
JOHN

Commands for activating user profile and password

272
 Adjusting knitting machine 4

Defining user profile

To enter the commands on the pattern preparation unit the following steps are
necessary:
1. In the "Machine explorer" select the "Private machines" directory tree.
2. Call up the context menu and select the program item "Online extras".
 The "Extra functions" window appears.
3. In the "Direct command" field type-in the corresponding command and
confirm.

273
5 Setup Data

Background

5 Setup Data
Setup Data

The knitting program consists of:

 Sintral program (*.sin)
 Jacquard program (*.jac)
 Information about production:
– Specification of the stitch length
– Distance between yarn carriers and fabric selvedge
– Carriage Speed...

You can handle this information about production as follows:

 define it with every pattern anew
 define it in a separate file which you can reuse with every pattern
This file is called Setup file

Your advantages working with a setup file:

 The setup-data are centralized in one setup-file
 Clear operation of all setup data on the machine.
 Clear separation of variable pattern parameters and constant Sintral
knitting specifications.
 All the parameters that are relevant when knitting-in the pattern are
located in the setup file.
 The complete pattern (Sintral, Jacquard, Setup) can be transferred to
another machine.
You can reduce the machine set-up time of the pattern by this.
 The Setup file can be applied to other pattern.
You can reduce the machine set-up time of the pattern by this.
Background

274
 Setup Data 5

Comparing Setup1 to Setup2

5.1 Background
A short review Setup-data were introduced for CMS machines (starting with ST 711) in 1998.
Following data can be saved to the setup-file:
 WMF(Fabric take-down menu)
 NP (All NP values)
 YD (Position of yarn carriers at the fabric selvedge)
 MSEC (indirect MSEC-setting)
 YLC (Yarn Length Control STIXX/ASCON)
This was the first step to write the pattern related parameters into a separate
file. The purpose is to reduce the time of setting up the machine.
Some pattern related parameters were still written in Sintral functions. Leading
to setup work when converting the pattern for other machines.
You can use the extended setup data from now on.
In order to distinguish them they will be called Setup2 and the previous data
Setup1.
The target of Setup2 Transferring a pattern from one machine to another without changing the
Sintral program.
Setup2 is extended by the following parameters:
 Yarn carrier staggering (YD / YDI)
 Correcting the Normal Yarn Carriers (YC / YCI)
 Cycle Counters
 Racking Corrections
 Correction of the stitch length of the right carriage with tandem operation
(NPR)
 Yarn length control at the left and right-hand side
 Correction value for clamping depth (NCC)
 Comments
Comparing Setup1 to Setup2

275
5 Setup Data

Comparing Setup1 to Setup2

5.2 Comparing Setup1 to Setup2

Setup1 Setup2

Fabric take-down functions 8 functions 50 fabric take-down functions

(WMF) (WMF)

50 Auxiliary take-down functions

(W+F)
Switching auxiliary take-down on
and off (W+1, W+0)

Tabs for WM% and WMK%

Belt take-down functions Not possible 50 belt take-down functions (WBF)

(WBF)

Yarn Carrier Staggering One staggering 21 staggerings

YD (YD) (YD, YDI1-YDI20)

Yarn carrier corrections One correction 20 corrections

(YCI1-YCI20)

Some corrections for all 32 yarn

carriers can be defined with each
function.

◆ The Setup All yarn carrier corrections (normal

file does not and intarsia yarn carriers) are
contain the included in the YCI tab
correction of
the normal with tandem mode:
yarn the correction values for the right
carriers. carriage are part of the Y:Oa-b tab
◆ Correction
of Intarsia
yarn carrier
in the KI /
K<I> tab

Correction values for stitch 100 100

cam position (NP)

Specifications for the 9 20

carriage speed (MSEC)

Correction value for no part of the A correction value per yarn carrier is
clamping depth (NCC) setup-file possible

Yarn length Indications for Indications for yarn length control on

yarn length the right and left
control on the
right

Cycle Counters no indications 39 cycle counters

possible

276
 Setup Data 5

Using Setup1 or Setup2

Setup1 Setup2

Racking Corrections VKA to VKZ, no 50 Indices for racking corrections

part of the setup- (VCI)
file

Comments no indications for each indication possible

possible

Correction of stitch length Not possible possible

for right carriage in tandem
mode (NPR)

Additional information such Not possible possible

as:
◆ Machine Number
◆ Online Number
◆ Hostname

File Extension .set .setx (XML file)

(File Extension)

File extensions for .sin; .jac and .set .sin; .jac and .setx files in a
extracted patterns compressed folder (.zip file)
(File Extension)

Using Setup1 or Setup2

277
5 Setup Data

Using Setup1 or Setup2

5.3 Using Setup1 or Setup2

Setup1 usable for all machines
(OKC, ST 468, ST 268, ST 168, ST 811, ST 711)

Setup2 usable with all OKC machines (starting with V 2.1)

Converting Possible with M1plus (starting with V. 5.2) only.

Setup2 --> 1 Example:

How to convert a Setup2 patter for a CMS 530 to a pattern for a

CMS 330:

1. Load the pattern and call up the "Change Machine/

Gauge/Setup Type..." menu.
2. Set the corresponding setup type for the machine in the
"Machine Explorer".
3. Start technical processing.
or
4. Run the "Generate MC Program..." function.
5. Run the "Extract MC Program..." function.
 The sin; jac and set files will be generated.

Converting Setup1 patterns cannot be converted automatically into Setup2.

Setup1 --> 2
Example:

How to convert a Setup1 pattern for a CMS 330 to a Setup2

pattern for a CMS 530:

1. Load the pattern and call up the "Change Machine/

Gauge/Setup Type..." menu.
2. Set the corresponding setup type for the machine in the
"Machine Explorer".
3. Modify and complete the parameters and functions
corresponding to Setup2.
4. Start technical processing.
or
5. Run the "Generate MC Program..." function.
6. Run the "Extract MC Program..." function.
 The sin; jac and setx-files will be saved to a zip-file.

How to generate a setup-file?

 Generating it together with the pattern on the M1plus.
Starting with the 5.2 version of the M1plus you can choose among Setup
in Sintral, Setup1, Setup2
 Generating it manually (with Setup1 only)

278
 Setup Data 5

Loading knitting program

5.4 Loading knitting program

Loading knitting program

Loading the knitting program (difference Setup1-Setup2)

You can quickly recognize whether it is a pattern with Setup1 or Setup2 data

1 Setup1 pattern
2 Setup2 pattern

A Setup2 pattern is saved in a zip file. The icon of compressed (zipped) folder
is displayed in front of the pattern.
Setup2 Editor

279
5 Setup Data

Setup2 Editor

5.5 Setup2 Editor

Overview of the Setup2 Editor of the CMS

5.5.1 Overview of the Setup2 Editor of the CMS

The Setup2 data will be displayed in the "Setup2 Editor".

Explanation

1 Row

2 Tabs of a menu

3 Table

4 Call-up the individual menus

5 Switch on or off the virtual keyboard

: The menu keys are covered by the active virtual keyboard.
Switch off the virtual keyboard in order to switch to another menu.

6 Activate and deactivate the state line (only display of the values, no window call
up possible)

7 Switch on or off the table tools

8 Activate/deactivate the display of the active "Don't Care" values

9 Apply a change to further patterns

10 Undo the last editing of a line

11 Undo the last editing of a cell

12 Save all values of the actual tab (table)

13 Call up the online help of the selected tab.

: With file mode only

Save the Setup2 file (setx)

280
 Setup Data 5

Setup2 Editor

Calling up the Setup2 Editor How to call up the Setup2 Editor with the Setup data of the actual pattern:
Calling up the Setup2 Editor on the machine

on the machine
Key to call-up the Setup2 Editor window

Key Function

Call up the "Setup2 Editor" window

Key to call-up the "Setup2 Editor" window

1. Call up the "Setup2 Editor" in the "Main menu".

 The "Setup2 Editor" window appears.

How to open the Setup2 file in the Setup2 Editor:

You can edit Setup2 data independently to the running production by the file
mode.
1. Call up the "Load & save" window.
2. Get the Zip file displayed.

3. Tap the Setup2 file (*.setx).

 The "Setup2 Editor" window appears in the file mode.
Helpers for Input

281
5 Setup Data

Setup2 Editor

Helpers for Input Depending on the active input field appears:

 the numeric keyboard
 the alpha-numeric keyboard (for comments)
 the input helper for list fields
 The input helper for NP measure units

Explanation

Switch on the virtual keyboard

Switch off virtual keyboard

Explanation
The numeric keyboard
1 Slider

2 Shows the maximum value of the selected field

3 Shows the minimum value of the selected field

4 Increase or decrease the value by one step

5 Apply value from the previous row

The applied value will not be displayed.
An entry field without entry has the "Don't Care"
property.
An entry field with "Don't Care" is empty.

: "0" does not correspond to "Don't Care"

6 Move cursor: one field to the left

7 Delete the number to the left of the cursor

8 Move cursor: one field to the right

9 Confirm input. The cursor jumps to the next field.

282
 Setup Data 5

Setup2 Editor

Key Function
The alpha-numeric keyboard

TAB Jump to the next field.

CPS LCK Shift between uppercase and lowercase letters; the

setting of numbers or special characters is maintained

SHIFT Shift between uppercase and lowercase letters and

between numbers and special characters

BACKSPACE Move the cursor by one step to left and delete the
character there

ENTER Confirm input

LEFT Move the cursor by one step to left

RIGHT Move the cursor by one step to right

283
5 Setup Data

Setup2 Editor

Element Function
The input helper for list fields
Fold open selection field

Fold closed selection field

Move cursor: one line upwards

Move cursor: one line downwards

Move cursor: one character to left

Move cursor: one character to the right

Move cursor: to first input of selection field

Move cursor: to last input of selection field

Confirm input

Element Function
The input helper for NP
measure units Switch all values to NP

Switch all values to millimeters

Switch a single value to mm

Switch a single value to NP

284
 Setup Data 5

Setup2 Editor

Element Function
The Input Helper for Yarn
Carriers (YLC tab) Enter yarn carrier specification
Example: 3A

Delete entry

Move cursor: one character to left

Move cursor: one character to the right

Confirm input

Adding a table row

285
5 Setup Data

Setup2 Editor

Adding a table row You will find only those entries in the selection list which are not yet part of the
table.
Example:

Some NP are part of the table.

Select NP indices in the "Add Rows" dialog box from those not yet listed in the
table.
Multiple selections are possible.

Apply the selected NP indices to the table with .

You can cancel the procedure with .

Switching on or off the table tools

Switching on or off the table

Explanation
tools
Switch on the table tools

Switch off the table tools

Further information:
 Table Tools [287]
Table Tools

286
 Setup Data 5

Setup2 Editor

Table Tools
Explanation

Go to row.
Select the desired line in the selection list
The cursor jumps to the desired line of the table.
: Active with more than 21 lines.

Adding a table row

Delete the selected line

Copying the values (of a line)

Inserting the copied values

Copying several lines ("Yarn Carrier", "YD/YDI" and "YC/YCI" tab)

Pasting the copied lines ("Yarn Carrier", "YD/YDI" and "YC/YCI" tab)

Activate/deactivate the display of the active "Don't Care" values

Activate/deactivate the
Explanation
display of the active "Don't
Care" values Activate the display of the active "Don't Care" values

Only with the tab: WMF, W+F, YDI, YCI, VCI

Deactivate the display of the active "Don't Care" values

Apply a change to further patterns

Apply a change to further If you made a change, you can apply it additionally to the setup files of the
patterns other patterns or sequence elements.

A dialog box appears.

After confirming with "Yes", the change is saved in the current pattern and in
all patterns of the current folder.

With a sequence, the icon changes its appearance.

A dialog box appears.
If you confirm with "Yes", the change is saved in the current sequence
element and in all the sequence elements of the sequence.

287
5 Setup Data

Setup2 Editor

File tools

File tools
Explanation

Display the content of the Zip file In the "Load &

save" window

Close the zip file

Load pattern

Load the pattern with selected Setup data

Save Pattern

Save the pattern with selected Setup data.

➜ Select the desired Setup data in the "Save

with configuration" dialog box

Deleting file
Delete selected file

Display selected file

With a Setup2 file (.setx) the Setup2 Editor appears
in the file mode

Add
Add selected file and corresponding pattern
elements to pattern already loaded.

Save the setup file In the file mode of

the "Setup2
Editor" only
Take-down

288
 Setup Data 5

Setup2 Editor

5.5.2 Take-down
WMF (tab)

WMF (tab)
WMF (Setup2)

Explanation Value range

WMF… Fabric take-down function WMF1 to WMF50

WM min Minimum fabric take-down value Minimum value: 0

(with Fully Fashion) Maximum value: 31.5
Step width: 0.1

WM max Maximum fabric take-down value Minimum value: 0

(value must always be specified) Maximum value: 31.5
Step width: 0.1

N min Minimum quantity of needles Minimum value: 0

(with Fully Fashion) Maximum value: Needle
number of the CMS
Step width: 1

N max Maximum quantity of needles Minimum value: 0

(with Fully Fashion) Maximum value: Needle
number of the CMS
Step width: 1

WMI Fabric take-down impulse Minimum value: 0

Maximum value: 15
Step width: 1

WM^ Open the brake of the active take-down No turning back: 0

system (main take-down or comb take- Minimum value: 9
down) for a maximum of 2.5 seconds, Maximum value: 120
take-down roller or comb take-down turn Step width: 1
back by a maximum number of the
indicated degrees (depending on the
fabric tension and the fabric take-down
value).
CMS 5xx, 7xx, 8xx, CMS ADF-3: 9-60
degrees
CMS 9xx: 9-120 degrees

If either of both the conditions is fulfilled,

then the brake is closed again.
Fabric take-down value (n=0-31.5)
becomes active again at the reversion.

WMC Set the speed control of the active take- Minimum value: 0
down system (main take-down or comb Maximum value: 32
take-down) to the value n (0-32). If the Step width: 1
take-down system turns too quickly, the
machine is stopped.
0= no stop motion, 1= insensitive, 32=
very sensitive

289
5 Setup Data

Setup2 Editor

Explanation Value range

WM+C Monitoring of main take-down. If the take- Minimum value: 0

down has not been used after n (0-100) Maximum value: 100
knitting rows, the machine will stop. (0 = Step width: 1
no supervision)

WMK+C Controlling the comb. If the comb has not Minimum value: 0
moved after n (0-100) knitting rows, the Maximum value: 100
machine will stop. (0 = no supervision) Step width: 1

Comment Comment ASCII Characters

Further information:
 Table Tools [287]
 File tools [288]
 Helpers for Input [282]
 Overview of the Setup2 Editor of the CMS [280]
 Setup Data [274]
 Comparing Setup1 to Setup2 [276]
W+F (tab)

290
 Setup Data 5

Setup2 Editor

W+F (tab)
W+F (tab) stp

Explanation Value range

W+F… Auxiliary Take-down function W+F1 - W+F50

W+F On Switch on auxiliary take-down.

The auxiliary take-down will be closed.
The speed of the auxiliary take-down
W+=n is active

Switch off the auxiliary take-down.

The auxiliary take-down will be
opened.

W+= Input of the speed of the auxiliary take- Minimum value: 1

down Maximum value: 15
Turning value n (1-15) Step width: 1

W+P Contact pressure n (0-10), only for Minimum value: 0

machines with 72 and 84 inch working Maximum value: 10
width Step width: 1

W+C Monitoring of auxiliary take-down. If the Minimum value: 0

auxiliary take-down has not been used Maximum value: 100
after n (0-100) knitting rows, the Step width: 1
machine will stop. (0 = no supervision)

Comment Comment ASCII Characters

Further information:
 Table Tools [287]
 File tools [288]
 Helpers for Input [282]
 Overview of the Setup2 Editor of the CMS [280]
 Setup Data [274]
 Comparing Setup1 to Setup2 [276]
WM% WMK% (tab)

291
5 Setup Data

Setup2 Editor

WM% WMK% (tab)

WM% WMK% (tab) stp

Explanation Value range

WM% Modify the fabric take-down value by n -80 to 80

percent

WMK% Changing the fabric take-down value -80 to 80

by n percent while the comb take-down
is working. The value is active till the
fabric is taken down by the main take-
down.

Comment Comment ASCII Characters

All characters and

numbers (UTF-8)

Further information:
 Table Tools [287]
 File tools [288]
 Helpers for Input [282]
 Overview of the Setup2 Editor of the CMS [280]
 Setup Data [274]
 Comparing Setup1 to Setup2 [276]
Yarn carrier

292
 Setup Data 5

Setup2 Editor

5.5.3 Yarn carrier

YD / YDI (tab)

YD / YDI (tab) Staggering the yarn carriers at the fabric selvedge.

YD/YDI (Setup2)

Explanation Value range

YD Distance between yarn carriers and fabric

selvedge
Collapse (reduced display)
Expand (expanded display)

YD1 Distance of the yarn carriers on track 1 to 8 Minimum value: 0

: from the left and right fabric selvedge Maximum value: 160
YD8 Step width:
0.5=1/32 inch=0.8 mm

YDI Additional, indirect yarn carrier staggering Minimum value: 0

(YDI1 to YDI20) Maximum value: 160
Collapse (reduced display) Step width:
Expand (expanded display) 0.5=1/32 inch=0.8 mm

Comment Comment ASCII Characters

Further information:
 Table Tools [287]
 File tools [288]
 Helpers for Input [282]
 Overview of the Setup2 Editor of the CMS [280]
 Setup Data [274]
 Comparing Setup1 to Setup2 [276]
YC / YCI (tab)

293
5 Setup Data

Setup2 Editor

YC / YCI (tab) Yarn carrier corrections

Setup2-YC/YCI

Explanation Value range

YC Direct yarn carrier correction

Collapse (reduced display)
Expand (expanded display)

YCI Yarn carrier correction index YCI1 to YCI20

Collapse (reduced display)
Expand (expanded display)

Y Corrections of yarn carrier 1A to 8D

Ka Yarn carrier correction value (left) for not Minimum value: -120
swiveled yarn carrier if the yarn carrier is Maximum value: 120
positioned within the fabric. Step width:
0.5=1/32 inch=0.8 mm

Kb Yarn carrier correction value (right) for not Minimum value: -120
swiveled yarn carrier if the yarn carrier is Maximum value: 120
positioned within the fabric. Step width:
0.5=1/32 inch=0.8 mm

K<I>a Intarsia yarn carrier correction value (left) for Minimum value: -120
swiveled intarsia yarn carrier Maximum value: 120
Step width:
0.5=1/32 inch=0.8 mm

K<I>b Intarsia yarn carrier correction value (right) for Minimum value: -120
intarsia swiveled yarn carrier Maximum value: 120
Step width:
0.5=1/32 inch=0.8 mm

MSEC Carriage speed if this yarn carrier is used

(technical fabrics).

V Reduce carriage speed (n) for yarn carrier (n =

0..3). The speed is reduced to 75% from
carriage reversal point until achievement of the
operating range of the yarn carrier. Finally it
can be chosen between the following
possibilities:
◆ 1 = Acceleration up to 100%
◆ 2 = Braking down to 50%, maintain
speed over a fabric width of 2 inches,
acceleration up to 100%
◆ 3 = Braking down to 50%, maintain
speed over a fabric width of 5 inches,
acceleration up to 100%
◆ 0 = Cancelling out of carriage speed
specific to yarn carrier

Comment Comment ASCII Characters

294
 Setup Data 5

Setup2 Editor

Further information:
 Table Tools [287]
 File tools [288]
 Helpers for Input [282]
 Overview of the Setup2 Editor of the CMS [280]
 Setup Data [274]
 Comparing Setup1 to Setup2 [276]
Y:Oa-b (tab)

Y:Oa-b (tab) Tandem machine: Correction of the yarn carriers in the right carriage

Explanation Value range

Y-1AR Specification of the yarn carrier in the right

: carriage.
Y-8DR

Oa Right carriage during tandem operation: Yarn Minimum value: -8

carrier correction value a (stopping position on Maximum value: 8
the left). Step width:
0.5=1/32 inch=0.8 mm
The correction value refers to the stop value of
the left carriage.

Ob Right carriage during tandem operation: Yarn Minimum value: -8

carrier correction value b (stopping position on Maximum value: 8
the right). Step width:
0.5=1/32 inch=0.8 mm

Comment Comment ASCII Characters

Further information:
 Table Tools [287]
 File tools [288]
 Helpers for Input [282]
 Overview of the Setup2 Editor of the CMS [280]
 Setup Data [274]
 Comparing Setup1 to Setup2 [276]
Y:Ua-b / Y:Ncc (tab)

295
5 Setup Data

Setup2 Editor

Y:Ua-b / Y:Ncc (tab)  Adjusting the engaging width when plating with normal yarn carriers.
 Control the clamping depth of the cutting needles

Explanation Value range

Y Corrections of yarn carrier 1A to 8D

Ua Adjust the engaging width (left) when plating Minimum value: 11.5 mm
with normal yarn carriers. Maximum value: 23 mm
(CMS-C: 35 mm)
Ub Adjust the engaging width (right) when plating Step width: 0.5 mm
with normal yarn carriers.

NCC Only for machines with clamping and cutting Minimum value: -10
bed: Maximum value: 10
Control of the clamping depth of the cutting Step width: 1
needles.

Standard setting: n=0

e.g.: sink the cutting needles by 5 steps
deeper: NCC=5

Comment Comment ASCII Characters

Engaging value for the left and right carriage direction

Further information:
 Table Tools [287]
 File tools [288]
 Helpers for Input [282]
 Overview of the Setup2 Editor of the CMS [280]
 Setup Data [274]
 Comparing Setup1 to Setup2 [276]
Width (tab)

296
 Setup Data 5

Setup2 Editor

Width (tab) The M1plus enters the width of the inlay yarn carrier in the "Yarn carrier
carriage width" field.

Further information:
 Table Tools [287]
 File tools [288]
 Helpers for Input [282]
 Overview of the Setup2 Editor of the CMS [280]
 Setup Data [274]
 Comparing Setup1 to Setup2 [276]
Stitch lengths

5.5.4 Stitch lengths

NP 1-100 (tab)

NP 1-100 (tab)
NP 1-100 (tab) stp

Explanation Value range

NPK Correction for all stitch cams Minimum value: -2

Maximum value: 2
Step width: 0.05

NP1 - Stitch cam position 1 to 100

NP100

Value Stitch length in NP values or mm

Value [mm] Specification in NP values. Minimum value: 6.5

Maximum value: 22.5
Step width: 0.05

Value [mm] Settings in millimeters. Minimum value: 2.20

Setting the yarn length per stitch (Yarn Length Maximum value:
Control). 33.00
Step width: 0.01

Comment Comment ASCII Characters

Further information:
 Table Tools [287]
 File tools [288]
 Helpers for Input [282]
 Overview of the Setup2 Editor of the CMS [280]
NPR (tab)

297
5 Setup Data

Setup2 Editor

NPR (tab) Correction of the stitch cam position for the right carriage (for tandem
operation only)

Explanation Value range

NPR Correction of the stitch cam position for the right

carriage

Front Correction value depending on system in front or Minimum value: -2

rear and on carriage direction to the left or to the Maximum value: 2
Rear right Step width: 0.05
<<

>>

NPxR Correction value for the stitch cam position x (1-

100) of the right carriage

Value Specification in NP values. Minimum value: -2

Maximum value: 2
Step width: 0.05

Value [mm] Specification in millimeters. Minimum value: -

5.0
Maximum value: 5.0
Step width: 0.01

Comment Comment ASCII Characters

Further information:
 Table Tools [287]
 File tools [288]
 Helpers for Input [282]
 Overview of the Setup2 Editor of the CMS [280]
 Setup Data [274]
 Comparing Setup1 to Setup2 [276]
Carriage speed

298
 Setup Data 5

Setup2 Editor

5.5.5 Carriage speed

Different carriage speeds can be entered for different knitting situations. The
indirect carriage speed only becomes effective when it is slower than the
normal speed.
Carriage speed Setup2

Explanation Value range (meters/

second)

MSECK Carriage speed for small knots over m Minimum value: 0.05
rows, standard: 1 row Maximum value: 1.20
Step width: 0.05

MSEC Speed Minimum value: 0.05

(normal speed) Maximum value: 1.20
Step width: 0.05

MSEC0 Speed for empty rows (S0) Minimum value: 0.05

Maximum value: 1.40
Step width: 0.05

MSEC1 Speed for transfer rows Minimum value: 0.05

Maximum value: 1.20
Step width: 0.05

MSECI Speed with Intarsia Yarn Carrier Minimum value: 0.05

(CMS ADF-3: Specification is not taken Maximum value: 1.00
into account) (CMS-C: 0.7)
Step width: 0.05

MSECC Speed outside the needle bed when the Minimum value: 0.05
yarn carrier is brought in the clamp or Maximum value: 0.50
taken out of the clamp. Step width: 0.05

MSEC2-20 Speed for knitting rows Minimum value: 0.05

Maximum value: 1.20
Step width: 0.05

Comment Comment ASCII Characters

Further information:
 Table Tools [287]
 Helpers for Input [282]
 Setup2 Editor [280]
 Setup Data [274]
 Comparing Setup1 to Setup2 [276]
 File tools [288]
Cycle counters

299
5 Setup Data

Setup2 Editor

5.5.6 Cycle counters

The cycle counter specifies how often a pattern area is to be repeated. Which
cycle counter controls which pattern area is defined in the knitting program.

Explanation Value range

RS1 - Cycle counters 1 to 39 1-99999

RS39

Comment Comment ASCII Characters

Further information:
 Table Tools [287]
 File tools [288]
 Helpers for Input [282]
 Overview of the Setup2 Editor of the CMS [280]
 Setup Data [274]
 Comparing Setup1 to Setup2 [276]
Yarn length

300
 Setup Data 5

Setup2 Editor

5.5.7 Yarn length

Basic settings

Basic settings
Explanation

"Operating mode for Determine the yarn length control mode.

patterns" : On the CMS the mode can be changed here.
◆ Production without YLC
◆ Working with mm
◆ Working with original fabric
◆ According to Sintral specification

"Correction data
No correction data was determined yet.
(Working with mm)"

"Original fabric data Correction data was determined.

(Working with original
fabric)"

"Wheel" left device: Select measuring wheel (n=9 to 16).

right device: Select measuring wheel (n=1 to 8).

"Y" Select the yarn carrier (1A to 8D) working with this measuring
wheel.

"Comment" Comment (ASCII Characters)

Further information:
 Helpers for Input [282]
 File tools [288]
 Table Tools [287]
 Setup Data [274]
 Overview of the Setup2 Editor of the CMS [280]
 Comparing Setup1 to Setup2 [276]
Correction Values

301
5 Setup Data

Setup2 Editor

Correction Values
Explanation

"Correction for Enter a correction value for all measuring wheels

all measuring
wheels"

"Maximum Stopping the machine when exceeding the correction value

deviation of (Standard = 15%).
the target
value per
knitting row"

"Wheel" right device: Select measuring wheel (n=1 to 8).

left device: Select measuring wheel (n=9 to 16).

"Y" Select the yarn carrier (1A to 8D) working with this measuring
wheel.

"Correction < Enter correction value for an additional thread from the from the
+/-[%]" right.
The correction value has an effect in the carriage direction to the
left.

"Correction > Enter correction value for an additional thread from the from the
+/-[%]" left.
The correction value has an effect in the carriage direction to the
right.

Only when "Working with original fabric"

"Yarn Change the fabric length without determining once again the
correction for original fabric data. If, for example, the same pattern is to be
original fabric" knitted with another yarn color (not yarn thickness).
Value range: -10%...+10%, step width: 0.1

302
 Setup Data 5

Setup2 Editor

Explanation

"Minimum Change the minimum width only if the error message "YLC:
width for deviation from set value of measuring wheel x too large" is
original fabric" displayed.
Value range: - 2 E…0…+ 2 E (E = Number of needles per inch =
Gauge of the machine)Example for E16: -32…0…+32 needles

: In the "Yarn length control" window execute again the program

item "Record original fabric" afterwards.

"Comment" Comment (ASCII Characters)

Further information:
 Helpers for Input [282]
 File tools [288]
 Table Tools [287]
 Setup Data [274]
 Overview of the Setup2 Editor of the CMS [280]
 Comparing Setup1 to Setup2 [276]
Yarn data

303
5 Setup Data

Setup2 Editor

Yarn data The yarn data are necessary for the calculation of the yarn consumption.

Explanation

"Wheel" right device: Select measuring wheel (n=1 to 8).

left device: Select measuring wheel (n=9 to 16).

"Y" Select the yarn carrier (1A to 8D) working with this measuring
wheel.

"Yarn Quality" "Yarn"

A maximum of 5 yarns can be threaded into one measuring wheel.
for yarn
The yarn data is entered in a separate line for each yarn.
disposition only
"Yarn Quality"
Example:

Enter 28 here

"Number of Yarn Threads"

Enter the number of individual threads.

Example:

Enter 2 here

"Number of Threads "

Enter the number of threads per yarn carrier here

NM; TEX; DTEX; NE/C; NE/W; DEN

Select unit for the yarn thickness.
Enter NM here

"Yarn ID" Yarn ID or comment

Further information:
 Helpers for Input [282]
 File tools [288]
 Table Tools [287]
 Setup Data [274]
 Overview of the Setup2 Editor of the CMS [280]
 Comparing Setup1 to Setup2 [276]

304
 Setup Data 5

Setup2 Editor

NP (Knitting Mode) / Wheel Display showing which stitch cam position works together with which
NP (Knitting Mode) / Wheel

measuring wheel.
The list is filled out automatically (mode "Working with mm", program item
"Determine basic conditions").

Explanation

"front" Stitch cam position on the front needle bed

"Back" Stitch cam position on the rear needle bed

"Wheel" Measuring wheel

"Active" Selection for program item "Production":

The stitch cam position is controlled with YLC.

The stitch cam position is not controlled with YLC.

"Comment" Comment (ASCII Characters)

Further information:
 Helpers for Input [282]
 File tools [288]
 Table Tools [287]
 Setup Data [274]
 Overview of the Setup2 Editor of the CMS [280]
 Comparing Setup1 to Setup2 [276]
Racking

305
5 Setup Data

Setup2 Editor

5.5.8 Racking
The racking instructions are valid for one carriage stroke.
Racking correction (machine without additional needle bed)

Explanation Value range

VCI… Racking function VCI1 to VCI50

VK Racking correction by m steps (0-10) Step width: 1/70 of

the needle distance

Dir Direction of the racking correction

< - to the left
> - to the right
? - not defined, will be defined on the machine

VV Racking speed n (1-32), without an instruction

VV=32

V+/- V+ - Overracking, in addition to the racking (n=1-24, step width:

specification 1/8 of the needle
positive value: Overracking in racking direction distance)
negative value: Overracking in opposite to the
racking direction

Comment Comment ASCII Characters

Further information:
 Table Tools [287]
 Helpers for Input [282]
 File tools [288]
 Overview of the Setup2 Editor of the CMS [280]
 Setup Data [274]
 Comparing Setup1 to Setup2 [276]
Miscellaneous

306
 Setup Data 5

Setup2 Editor

5.5.9 Miscellaneous
General data about the machine are displayed.
Data about the machine cannot be modified here.

Explanation

#137 Needle gauge These data derive

from the "Select
#195 Needle hook gauge Machine" dialog box
of the M1plus
#156 Coupling width (with tandem machines)

Machine Stoll machine number: These data are

-No. entered
automatically at the
Hostnam Name of the computer within the network machine.
e

Online- KnitLAN-ID
ID

Commen General comment about the Setup file ASCII Characters

t

Display only

Further information:
 Table Tools [287]
 File tools [288]
 Helpers for Input [282]
 Overview of the Setup2 Editor of the CMS [280]
 Setup Data [274]
 Comparing Setup1 to Setup2 [276]
Data Mode and File Mode

307
5 Setup Data

Setup1 - Editing the setup file

5.5.10 Data Mode and File Mode

The "Setup2 Editor" of the CMS and of the M1plus differs between the editing
of Setup2 files (.setx) and of data of the loaded pattern (.mdv / .zip).

Data Mode File Mode

Origin of the data Loaded pattern Setup2 files (.setx)

Calling up By the "Pattern Parameters" By the "MC-Program" /

/ "Setup-Data…" menu "Display MC Program..." / "MC-
Setup..." menu

/ .setx

Save Button Menu

"Apply"
"Save"

Effect of editing Direct in the pattern Modified Setup2 file

Direct in the fabric

Difference in editing Restricted possibilities due Restricted possibilities due to

to the situation the situation

File Tools Not available Menus "File" "Edit" "?"

Not available

Title "<pattern name> - <CMS...> "Sintral Editor - <file

- Setup2" name>.setx"
Setup1 - Editing the setup file

308
 Setup Data 5

Setup1 - Editing the setup file

5.6 Setup1 - Editing the setup file

The Setup data editor allows setup data to be edited without loading them into
the machine beforehand. It is thus possible to edit another setup file while the
machine is knitting a pattern. Each group of setup data has its own tab with the
corresponding input fields in the "Setup data editor" window.

If no STIXX device is connected to the machine, the "STIXX"

and "STIXX3" tabs are not displayed although the setup file
contains STIXX data.
The STIXX data cannot be edited.
If the set-up data are saved, then existing STIXX data (not
displayed) are also saved.

The following events can prevent a correct saving of setup data:

 The setup file is write protected.
This is displayed by a touch. The write protection can be deactivated by
the additional function key "Deactivate write protection".
 Limiting values do not agree with each other.
The limiting values of the entered setup data are compared to data of
current machine and checked.
Conflicts may therefore arise if a setup file of a different machine is being
edited on the machine.
 The tabs "NP1..50", "NP51..100", "WMF" and "MSEC" can contain empty
input fields.
This is because of the M1 that only deposits the used NP, WMF and MSEC
data into setup file.
When saving data from setup data editor, only the used NP, WMF and
MSEC data are also saved in setup file.

309
5 Setup Data

Setup1 - Editing the setup file

Keys for the Setup data editor window

Key Function

Call up the "Load & save" window

Activate the "Setup selection"

Call up the "Setup data editor" window

Call up "Additional function keys"

"Activate write protection" key

"Deactivate write protection" key

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for the "Setup data editor" window

Activating the Setup data 1. Call up the "Load & save" window.
editor
Load & save window

"Load & save" window

2. Activate the "Setup selection" key (1).

3. Select the desired setup file (2).
 The "Setup data" editor key is displayed (3).
4. Tap the "Setup data editor" key (3).
 The "Setup data editor" window is open.

310
 Setup Data 5

Setup1 - Editing the setup file

Setup data editor window

"Setup data editor" window

A Total of 8 tabs:
The STIXX and STIXX3 tabs are only displayed if a STIXX device is
connected.
B Working area
changes, depending on the selected card.
C Status bar:
with the file name of the loaded setup file.

The "Setup data editor" window contains a maximum of 8 tabs:

Tabs in the Setup data editor window

Card Meaning

NP 1..50 Stitch cam position with index 1 to 50

NP 51..100 Stitch cam position with index 51 to 100

WMF Specifications for take-down value

YD Distance between yarn carriers and fabric selvedge

KI/K<I> Correction value of yarn carriers in fabric area

MSEC Specifications for carriage speed in m/sec

STIXX Specifications for the STIXX yarn length measuring device (STIXX
menu)

STIXX3 Specifications for the STIXX yarn length measuring device (STIXX3
menu)

Tabs in the "Setup data editor" window

311
5 Setup Data

Setup1 - Editing the setup file

Working with the setup data Set/deactivate write protection:

editor
 The Setup data editor window is open.
1. Call up "Additional function keys".
2. Tap the "Activate write protection" key in order to activate the write
protection.
- or -
➜ Tap the "Deactivate write protection" key in order to deactivate the write
protection.

Editing the setup file:

1. Tap the tab to be edited.
2. Select the desired field.
3. Overwrite the value.
4. Confirm input.
5. Repeat steps 1 or 2 to 4 for further inputs.
- or -
➜ Call up "Main menu".

312
 Maintenance of the knitting machine 6

6 Maintenance of the knitting

Maintenance of the knitting machine

machine
This chapter contains information on:
 Minimize wear [314]
 Cleaning the knitting machine [316]
 Lubricate knitting machine [326]

313
6 Maintenance of the knitting machine

Minimize wear

6.1 Minimize wear

Minimize wear

All parts of the knitting machine have carefully been selected and checked by
Stoll. Nevertheless, they are subject to wear due to wear. You can keep the
wear to a minimum if you lubricate, clean and check the machine regularly.
The following table contains an overview of the wearing parts and the possible
causes for excessive wear.
Wearing parts

Wearing part Possible causes of increased wear

Fabric take-down rollers ◆ Excessive fabric take-down values

◆ Contact pressure too high/low
◆ Yarns harmful for e.g. abrasive, sanding yarns
or yarn finishes like greases or oils
◆ UV radiation (including direct sunlight)
◆ Cleaning agents harmful to rubber, e.g. ether
or fuels. Recommendation: Use cleaning
petrol for cleaning

Belts of the fabric take- ◆ Too high belt speed

down ◆ Fabric winding
(Belt take-down) * ◆ Thread winding
◆ Yarns harmful for e.g. abrasive, sanding yarns
or yarn finishes like greases or oils
◆ UV radiation (including direct sunlight)
◆ Cleaning agents harmful to rubber, e.g. ether
or fuels. Recommendation: Use cleaning
petrol for cleaning

Needle brushes, ◆ Incorrect adjustment

Brushes of the central
lubrication
Brushes of the winding
protection device *

Feed wheel rollers ◆ Sanding yarn

◆ Allowing the feed wheel to run unnecessarily

Needle bed elements, ◆ Excessive fabric take-down values

cams ◆ Yarn too thick
◆ Insufficient lubrication
◆ Insufficient cleaning

Yarn guiding parts ◆ Sanding yarn

(deflectors, yarn control
device, etc.)

Yarn carrier, yarn carrier ◆ Insufficient lubrication

slide block ◆ Sanding yarn

Yarn carrier magnet ◆ Magnet may not come into contact with grease
or oil

314
 Maintenance of the knitting machine 6

Cleaning the knitting machine

Wearing part Possible causes of increased wear

Belt on auxiliary take-down ◆ Following a fault on the auxiliary take-down

(fabric winding device), the residual threads
were not removed carefully

Belts (drive, racking, comb ◆ Belt tension too high: Danger of bearing
take-down, auxiliary take- damage (adjustment with measuring device by
down) Stoll technician)
◆ Belt tension too low: Danger of position errors
(racking, auxiliary take-down)

Energy chain trailing cable ◆ Heavy soiling

◆ Laying down of objects
◆ Damage to depositing gutter
◆ Not moved into position carefully after work at
the rear of the machine

Wearing parts

Further information:
 Adjusting needle brushes [194]
 Yarn table [469]
 Lubricate knitting machine [326]
 Cleaning the knitting machine [316]
 Adjusting the brushes of the central lubrication * [203]
 Symbols in this document [14]
Cleaning the knitting machine

315
6 Maintenance of the knitting machine

Cleaning the knitting machine

6.2 Cleaning the knitting machine

To retain the operability of the knitting machine and ensure the quality of the
fabric, the knitting machine must be cleaned regularly.
Cleaning plan

Cleaning interval Cleaning work

if necessary Cleaning the touch screen

6 to 24 operating hours Cleaning suction and lint container

daily Vacuuming off knitting machine

Cleaning needle bed

Cleaning thread clamping and cutting device

Cleaning the active thread clamp

Cleaning the permanent brakes

Cleaning the friction feed wheel

100 operating hours Cleaning main drive fan

once a month Cleaning fan and radiators in right control unit

Cleaning filter mat of power supply unit

3 to 6 months Thoroughly cleaning needle bed

6 months Clean the knitting systems

Cleaning plan

We recommend the use of following cleaning agent:

Cleaning agent

Cleaning agent Cleaning work

Cloth, suction, compressed air on the entire knitting machine

Special cleaning agent for Touch screen and covers

plexiglas (note the
manufacturer's specifications)

Cleaning petrol (note the Roller rubber of the take-down roller

manufacturer's specifications)

Cleaning agent

NOTICE
Plastics, in particular the transparent covers, may not be
cleaned with alcohol or spirit, but instead only with a special
cleaning agent for plexiglas.

NOTICE
Do not remove metallic parts and fragments (e.g. broken
needle latch or needle hook) with a magnetic tool. There is a
danger that the needle bed or cams can be magnetized,
leading to incorrect selection.

316
 Maintenance of the knitting machine 6

Cleaning the knitting machine

Further information:
 Cleaning the touch screen [317]
 Cleaning suction and lint container * [318]
 Vacuuming off knitting machine [319]
 Cleaning needle bed [320]
 Cleaning thread clamping and cutting device [320]
 Cleaning the active thread clamp [321]
 Cleaning the permanent brakes [321]
 Cleaning the friction feed wheel * [321]
 Cleaning main drive fan * [322]
 Cleaning fan and radiators in right control unit [322]
 Cleaning filter mat of power supply unit [323]
 Thoroughly cleaning needle bed [323]
 Clean the knitting systems [325]
Cleaning the touch screen

6.2.1 Cleaning the touch screen

Use a clean, soft cloth for cleaning. If heavy soiling is present, use a cleaning
agent suitable for plexiglas. To prevent menus and function keys from being
activated when cleaning the touch screen, two options are available:
 Disconnect machine main switch
 Deactivate touch screen using the "Block input" key
Keys for cleaning the touch screen

Key Function

Call up the "Service" menu

"Block input" key

Keys for cleaning the touch screen

Cleaning the touch screen:

1. Call up the "Service" menu from the "Main menu".
2. Tap the "Block input" key.
3. Clean the touch screen.
4. Reactivate the screen again after cleaning. For this purpose, trigger a
manual stop, e.g. by pushing open a cover over the needle bed.
Cleaning suction and lint container *

317
6 Maintenance of the knitting machine

Cleaning the knitting machine

6.2.2 Cleaning suction and lint container *

1. Stop knitting machine when carriage is located on right half of needle bed.
2. Slide on cover over needle bed.
3. Push locking of lint container inwards and pull away container upwards.
Lint container and filter

Lint container and filter

4. Empty the lint container.

5. Clean filter (1) of lint container.
6. Reinstate the lint container.
7. Remove left rear panel segment.
8. Clean motor cover.
Cleaning motor cover

Cleaning motor cover

NOTICE
Damage to the suction tube!
The suction tube will be damaged at the coupling point of the
suction tube and the hose if you lift it by the suction nozzle.
➜ Lift the suction tube always in the middle so that the
coupling point "suction tube - hose" is separated.

318
 Maintenance of the knitting machine 6

Cleaning the knitting machine

9. Lift the suction tube in the middle until the fixing clip is pulled out of the
carriage.
Suction tube

Suction tube

10. Blow out the suction tube with compressed air.

Further information:
 Symbols in this document [14]
Vacuuming off knitting machine

6.2.3 Vacuuming off knitting machine

In order to avoid any dust being deposited on the inaccessible
points of the machine, we recommend that the dust should be
vacuum cleaned and the machine not to be cleaned by
compressed air.

NOTICE
Damage of needles!
The spring-mounted needle latches will be damaged if the
needles are blown out with compressed air.
➜ Always vacuum fluff and dust off the needles, never blow
them out.

1. Stop the knitting machine.

2. Vacuum fluff and dust off the knitting machine.
Cleaning needle bed

319
6 Maintenance of the knitting machine

Cleaning the knitting machine

6.2.4 Cleaning needle bed

The pelerine springs of the needles should be cleaned daily, however at least
once a week. The entire needle bed is cleaned every 12 to 26 weeks.

Cleaning needle bed:

1. Transfer all stitches to the rear needle bed.
2. Slide open all covers over the needle bed.
Cleaning the needle bed

Cleaning the needle bed

3. Push up all needles of the front needle bed completely.

4. Vacuum off dirt in the area of the needle hook/pelerine spring (1) and in
the area of the needle bed (2).
5. Close all covers over the needle bed again.
6. Transfer all stitches to the front needle bed and clean the rear needle bed
in the same way.

Further information:
 Thoroughly cleaning needle bed [323]
 Helpful knitting rows [352]
Cleaning thread clamping and cutting device

6.2.5 Cleaning thread clamping and cutting device

Cleaning thread clamping and cutting device

Cleaning thread clamping and cutting device

1. Push the clamping and cutting needle upward.

2. Clean the clamp and cutting needles and the clamping pinion with a cloth
or a brush.
3. Push the clamping and cutting needle back upward.

320
 Maintenance of the knitting machine 6

Cleaning the knitting machine

6.2.6 Cleaning the active thread clamp

Cleaning the active thread clamp

1. Bring the lateral yarn tensioner in still position. Thereby the active thread
clamp is open.
Cleaning the active thread clamp

Cleaning the active thread clamp

2. Blow the eyelets in the lateral safety door by compressed air.

Cleaning the permanent brakes

6.2.7 Cleaning the permanent brakes

Cleaning the permanent brake

Cleaning the permanent brake

➜ Clean both the brake settings of each permanent brake with a cloth.
Cleaning the friction feed wheel *

6.2.8 Cleaning the friction feed wheel *

Cleaning the friction feed wheel

Cleaning the friction feed wheel

1. Vacuum off the fluff and dust from the friction feed wheel.
2. Remove dirt (e. g. paraffin) from the friction rollers.

Further information:
 Symbols in this document [14]

321
6 Maintenance of the knitting machine

Cleaning the knitting machine

6.2.9 Cleaning main drive fan *

Cleaning main drive fan *

1. Switch off the machine and wait until the machine is currentless.
2. Swing open the cover on the right-hand control unit.
Main drive fan

Main drive fan

3. Clean fan.
4. Close the cover on the right control unit.
5. Switch on machine.

The control checks the motor temperature when switching on

machine main switch. The fan only runs at higher motor
temperature.

Further information:
 Symbols in this document [14]
Cleaning fan and radiators in right control unit

6.2.10 Cleaning fan and radiators in right control unit

1. Switch off the machine and wait until the machine is currentless.
2. Swing open the cover on the right-hand control unit.
Control unit

Control unit

3. Vacuum-off and blow-out the fan (1) and heat sink (2).
4. Close the cover on the right control unit.
5. Switch on machine.

The fan is temperature-controlled.

322
 Maintenance of the knitting machine 6

Cleaning the knitting machine

6.2.11 Cleaning filter mat of power supply unit

Cleaning filter mat of power supply unit

1. Swing open the cover on the control unit.

Fan power supply unit

Fan power supply unit

2. Remove screw (1) and hinge down the housing toward the front.
3. Remove filter mat and blow it out with compressed air.
4. If heavy soiling is present, vacuum off and blow out the radiator (2).
5. Replace filter mat.
6. Swing in the cover on the left control unit.
Thoroughly cleaning needle bed

6.2.12 Thoroughly cleaning needle bed

The needle bed is cleaned daily by the operator. In addition, it must be cleaned
thoroughly every 12 to 26 weeks.

If the needle bed it not cleaned thoroughly and carefully, a non-

uniform stitch appearance results during production due to
needles that do not run smoothly, and the operation of the
machine can no longer be ensured.

Thoroughly cleaning needle bed:

Thorough cleaning of needle bed

Thorough cleaning of needle bed

 No fabric may be hanging on the needle bed.

 The required tools (groove cleaner and extraction hook) are included with
the accessories.
1. Remove needle rail (4) with extraction hook (5).
2. Remove screw (3) on left and right-hand sides of jack bed.

323
6 Maintenance of the knitting machine

Cleaning the knitting machine

3. Take off jack bed (1).

4. Remove needles, coupling part, intermediate slider and selector jacks.
5. In case of CMS 520 C and CMS 830 C take off the selection jack bed
additionally.

NOTICE
Dirt-caked needle channels due to oil or cleaning agent!
When the needle channels are cleaned with oil or cleaning
agent, the dirt swells up and clogs the needle channels.
➜ Do not clean needle channels with oil or cleaning agent.
➜ Push dirt out of needle channels and blow out needle
channels with compressed air.

6. Push dirt out of needle channels with groove cleaner (6).

Groove cleaner

Groove cleaner

7. Clean groove for pelerine spring of needle.

8. Blow out dirt with compressed air from the needle bed.
9. Make sure needles, coupling part, intermediate slider and selector jacks
are undamaged.
10. Clean needles, coupling part, intermediate slider and selection jacks with
oil.
11. Pull out wire (2) to enable jack bed to be guided into holding-down jacks
more easily during assembly.
12. Reassembly needle bed.
13. Lubricate needles, coupling part, intermediate slider and selector jacks. If
a central lubrication is installed, then use the setting "Initial lubrication" for
approx. 15 minutes.

The needle hooks and the holding-down jacks can be cleaned

quickly and easily with the needle bed cleaning apparatus
(special attachment).

Further information:
 Removing selection jack bed (CMS 520 C and CMS 830 C) [371]
 Cleaning needle bed [320]
 Lubrication interval [327]
 Setting of central lubrication [329]

324
 Maintenance of the knitting machine 6

Lubricate knitting machine

6.2.13 Clean the knitting systems

Clean the knitting systems

1. Stop the knitting machine.

2. Move the carriage assembly into the left reversing position.
3. Set the main switch to "0" and wait until the touch screen is switched off.
4. Remove the carriage part.

NOTICE
Damage to the knitting systems!
Dirt will be blown into the guides of the movable parts and the
knitting systems will be damaged if they are blown out with
compressed air.
➜ Always vacuum off the knitting systems, never blow them
out.

5. Vacuum off the knitting systems and selection systems.

NOTICE
Damage to the selection systems and impulse givers!
The selection systems and impulse givers will be damaged if
they are cleaned with acetone or trichlorethylene (Tri).
➜ Clean the selector systems and pulse generators with a
clean cloth.

6. Clean the selector systems and pulse generators with a clean cloth.
7. Check the cams for wear and damage.
8. Apply oil to the cams with a brush.
9. Set the carriage part on the needle bed again.
10. Repeat step 4 to 9 for all carriage parts.
11. Set the main switch to "1".
 The carriage position is re-referenced.

Further information:
 Removing and mounting carriage part [374]
Lubricate knitting machine

325
6 Maintenance of the knitting machine

Lubricate knitting machine

6.3 Lubricate knitting machine

This chapter contains information on:
 Lubrication interval [327]
 Setting lubricating interval for needle bed [328]
 Setting of central lubrication [329]
 Oil needle bed [333]
 Restarting lubricating interval [334]
 Oiling jack bed [334]
 Oiling yarn carrier rods [335]
 Oiling the control of the holding-down jacks [335]
 Oiling carriage guide rail [335]
 Greasing impulse sensor rails [336]
 Greasing butts of the coupling parts and intermediate sliders [337]
 Oiling lifting slide (yarn carrier plunger) [337]
 Greasing racking device [338]
 Grease needle bed support/adjustment pieces [339]
Lubrication interval

326
 Maintenance of the knitting machine 6

Lubricate knitting machine

6.3.1 Lubrication interval

To retain the operability of the knitting machine and ensure the quality of the
fabric, the knitting machine must regularly be lubricated.
Lubrication schedule

Lubrication interval Lubricating work

adjustable Oiling the needle bed

Recommendation: Every 6 - 10 CMS 520 C, CMS 830C:

operating hours; select shorter Greasing the coupling parts and the
interval if necessary intermediate sliders

10 operating hours Oiling the jack bed

Oiling the yarn carrier rods
Oiling the control of the holding-down jacks

100 operating hours Oiling the carriage guide bar

Greasing the impulse sensor rails
Greasing the coupling parts and the
intermediate sliders
Oiling the lifting slide
Greasing the control sliders (CMS 822)

6 months Greasing the racking device

Greasing the needle bed supports/adjustment
pieces

Lubrication schedule

Only the named lubricants or others recommended by Stoll

may be used. Other lubricants may damage the machine, e. g.
due to insufficient lubricating action, rust on metal parts or
damage to the electrical cable insulation and the plastic parts.
We point out here that failure to observe this, will void our
warranty services.
Lubricants OKC machine

Lubricants Use only the lubricants found with the accessories of the machine or those
listed in the lubricating schedule.

Label Gauge ID

Oil Silvertex T46 E3 │ E3,5 │ E4 │ E5 │ E7 │ E8 230 614

│ E2,5.2 │ E3,5.2 │ E5.2 │ E10
│ E12 │ E14 │ E6.2 │ E7.2

Silvertex T32 E16 │ E18 │ E8.2 │ E9.2 005 341

Bold OKS 475 005 351

Klueber Staburags 231 191

NBU 12/300 KP

In the first weeks after setting up the knitting machine, select

shorter lubricating intervals.
Setting lubricating interval for needle bed

327
6 Maintenance of the knitting machine

Lubricate knitting machine

6.3.2 Setting lubricating interval for needle bed

For the needle bed a lubricating interval of between 1 and 65.535 courses can
be set. A mean value for a three-system machine is 25,000 courses. However,
this value depends highly on: Machine speed, temperature and number of
knitting systems. We recommend: Selecting a shorter lubricating interval
instead of a longer one. After the lubricating interval expires, a message
appears stating that the needle bed must be oiled.
Keys for setting the lubricating interval

Key Function

Call up the "Service" menu

Call up the "Lubricating" menu

Call up the "Lubricating - Needle bed" window

Confirm input

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for setting the lubricating interval

Set lubricating interval:

1. Call up the "Service" menu from the "Main menu".
2. Call up the "Lubricating" menu.
3. Call up the "Lubricating - Needle bed" window.
Lubricating - Needle bed window

"Lubricating - Needle bed" window

4. Input "Syst. run through until lubric.".

5. If the machine is to be stopped after reaching the system run-throughs,
then deactivate the check box.
6. Confirm input.
7. Call up "Main menu".

328
 Maintenance of the knitting machine 6

Lubricate knitting machine

6.3.3 Setting of central lubrication

Setting of central lubrication

Central lubrication not for CMS 822 (5xx)

All machines with four or

Lubrication points of the central lubrication

more knitting systems are

equipped with a central
lubrication as a standard
equipment (not for CMS 822)

Lubrication points of the central lubrication

The needle bed and jack bed must be oiled manually before a
new machine has been set up and for a machine which has
been out of operation for a longer period of time or which has
just had a gauge conversion. Then use the "Initial lubrication"
setting for approx. 15 minutes.
Keys for adjusting the central lubrication

Key Function

Call up the "Service" menu

Call up the "Lubricating" menu

Call up the "Central lubrication" window

Confirm input

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for adjusting the central lubrication

329
6 Maintenance of the knitting machine

Lubricate knitting machine

Adjust central lubrication:

1. Call up the "Service" menu from the "Main menu".
2. Call up the "Lubricating" menu.
3. Call up the "Central lubrication" window.
Central lubrication window

"Central lubrication" window

4. Make settings.
5. Confirm input.
6. Call up "Main menu".
Central lubrication window

Field Explanation

1 Switch on/off the central lubrication.

Switch off the central lubrication: Observe the section "Switch off the
central lubrication." [332]

2 Three settings are available for the lubrication interval:

Initial lubrication: This setting is used for the initial lubrication of a new
machine at the Stoll stoll factory. The values cannot be modified. (Caution
- risk of soiling the fabric)

Select this setting for approx. 15 minutes after a gauge conversion or with
a machine, which has been out of operation for a longer period of time.

STOLL inputs: This setting can be used for production. The values cannot
be modified. The values cannot be modified.

User settings: With this setting, the values can be changed by the user.
(Attention: An improper setting could lead to insufficient oiling. Ensure that
the central lubrication applies sufficient oil to the needle bed.)

330
 Maintenance of the knitting machine 6

Lubricate knitting machine

Field Explanation

3 Each setting consists of two values.

Lubricat. process after system run-throughs:

Setting of the number of knitting systems after which lubrication occurs.

The lubrication procedure stretches across the current traversing path of
the carriage.

Lubrication processes until lubricating all needles:

Setting of the number of lubrication procedures after which the entire

needle bed is to be lubricated.

4 Number of system run-throughs since the last lubrication process

5 A lubrication procedure is triggered in the next carriage reversal. The entire

needle bed is lubricated.

6 The oil line is de-aerated with this switch. The oil pump is switched on for
max. 30 seconds. Use this switch for ventilation only, not for lubrication
(Caution - risk of soiling the fabric).

"Central lubrication" window

All lubrication processes and operating actions are logged. The

inputs can be read. For this purpose, call up the "additional
function keys" and the "Central lubrication log" key in the
"Central lubrication" window.

331
6 Maintenance of the knitting machine

Lubricate knitting machine

Error messages If an error occurs in the area of the central lubrication, it is displayed on the
touch screen.
Error messages for central lubrication

Error Message Explanation

Central lubrication oil If a certain level is undershot, this message appears. It is

reservoir almost empty always displayed until the oil is filled up or the oil level
reaches the "Min" mark. The machine then stops and the
"Oil reservoir empty" error message appears.

Central lubrication oil Fill oil reservoir with oil until the "Max" mark has been
reservoir empty reached.

Central lubrication The oil pressure is monitored. If it is too low, this error
pressure switch message appears. Check oil line.

If the oil line is OK, set the "Ventilation" switch to "On" and
then to "Off" again. This switches the oil pump on again.

If the error occurs again, the oil line must be deaerated, see
[394].

Error messages for central lubrication

Further information:
 Switching off Central Lubrication [332]
 Deaerating oil line [394]
Switching off Central Lubrication

Switching off Central The central lubrication can be switched on and off. If it is switched off, observe
Lubrication the following points:
 monitoring of the lubrication interval is automatically activated.
Set lubricating interval [328]
(path: "Central lubrication" window -> additional function keys ->
"Lubricating" window)
Central lubrication switched off: Manual lubricating tasks 5xx, 5inches

 The following lubrication tasks must be performed manually:

– Oil needle bed [333]
– Oil jack bed [334]
Further information:
 Setting lubricating interval for needle bed [328]
 Oil needle bed [333]
 Oiling jack bed [334]

332
 Maintenance of the knitting machine 6

Lubricate knitting machine

6.3.4 Oil needle bed

Oil needle bed

When the lubricating interval for the needle bed expires, a pictograph appears
stating that the needle bed must be oiled.

1. Apply oil with a brush or spray bottle.

Oiling needle bed (top: without central lubrication, center: with central lubrication)

Oiling needle bed (top: without central lubrication, center: with central lubrication)

2. With CMS 520 C, CMS 830 C:

The pictograms "Oil needle bed" and "Grease needle bed" are displayed
alternately.
Start oiling the needle bed elements and then grease the butts of the
coupling parts and intermediate sliders.
3. Brushes are attached at the side of the needle bed. Put some oil in the
upper brush so that the cams near the coupling parts are oiled.
4. Oil the thread clamping and cutting device.
5. Restart lubricating interval. [334].
Further information:
 Restarting lubricating interval [334]

333
6 Maintenance of the knitting machine

Lubricate knitting machine

6.3.5 Restarting lubricating interval

Restarting lubricating interval

1. Tap display for "Lubricate needle bed" message.

 The "Current message" window appears.
2. Tap"624 Lubricate needle bed (OIL)" message.
 The message is marked with a frame. The function key for opening the
"Sensors" window appears at the bottom of the touch screen.
3. Call up the "Sensors" window.
4. Input "Syst. run through until lubric.".
5. Confirm input.
6. Call up "Main menu".
Oiling jack bed

6.3.6 Oiling jack bed

Oiling the jack bed

Oiling the jack bed

NOTICE
If a spray gun is used for oiling, too much oil may be applied!
The suction tube becomes clogged.
➜ Do not use a spray gun for oiling.

➜ Use a brush to apply oil to the jack bed (1).

Oiling yarn carrier rods

334
 Maintenance of the knitting machine 6

Lubricate knitting machine

6.3.7 Oiling yarn carrier rods

Oiling the yarn carrier rods

Oiling the yarn carrier rods

1. Use a brush or a spray bottle to apply oil to the yarn carrier rods (1).
2. If intarsia yarn carriers are used, wipe off the oil with a cloth until the notch
on the yarn carrier rod (2) is only coated with a residual lubricating film.
Oiling the control of the holding-down jacks

6.3.8 Oiling the control of the holding-down jacks

➜ Apply oil on the control of the holding-down jacks with a brush.

Oiling carriage guide rail

6.3.9 Oiling carriage guide rail

Oiling the carriage guide bar

Oiling the carriage guide bar

➜ Use a cloth to apply oil to the carriage guide bar (1).

335
6 Maintenance of the knitting machine

Lubricate knitting machine

6.3.10 Greasing impulse sensor rails

Greasing impulse sensor rails

Depending on the machine gauge, there is a front and a rear impulse sensor
rail.

Machine gauge Impulse sensor rail

E18 (E9.2) front and rear

E16 (E8.2)

E14 (E7.2)

E12 (E6.2)

E10 (E5.2)

E8 Back

E7 (E3,5.2)

E5 (E2,5.2)
E4

E3.5

E3
Greasing the impulse sensor rails

Greasing the impulse sensor rails

➜ Use a brush to apply grease to the impulse giver rails (1).

Greasing butts of the coupling parts and intermediate sliders

336
 Maintenance of the knitting machine 6

Lubricate knitting machine

6.3.11 Greasing butts of the coupling parts and intermediate

sliders
After every tenth "Oil needle bed" note appears a "Grease needle bed"
pictograph.

Greasing the butts of the coupling part and intermediate sliders

Greasing the butts of the coupling part and intermediate sliders

➜ Use a brush to apply grease to the butts of the coupling parts and
intermediate sliders.
Oiling lifting slide (yarn carrier plunger)

6.3.12 Oiling lifting slide (yarn carrier plunger)

1. Apply oil to the lifting slide with a brush.

2. Move the lifting slide several times with the finger so that the guide in the
metal housing is oiled. There are two lifting slides per yarn carrier plunger
Greasing the control sliders (CMS 822)

Greasing racking device

337
6 Maintenance of the knitting machine

Lubricate knitting machine

6.3.14 Greasing racking device

To ensure that the greasing of the racking spindle will not be forgotten, the
"Grease racking spindle" message appears after 180 days.
Greasing racking device

Greasing racking device

1. Position the rear needle bed at an angle.

2. Remove the cover over the racking spindle.
3. Apply grease to the racking strip and to the sliding guidance with a brush.
4. Grease the lubricating nipple (1) with a grease gun (Klueber Staburags
NBU 12/300 KP, ID 231 191)

Further information:
 Remove needle bed or position it at an angle [364]
Confirm the lubrication
Confirm
Keys for the lubrication
confirming the process
lubrication process

process Key Function

Call up the "Service" menu

Call up the "Lubricating" menu

Call up the "Lubricating - Racking" window

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for confirming the lubrication process

Confirm the lubrication process:

1. Call up the "Service" menu from the "Main menu".
2. Call up the "Lubricating" menu.

338
 Maintenance of the knitting machine 6

Lubricate knitting machine

3. Call up the "Lubricating - Racking" window.

4. Confirm the lubrication process.

Tap on the "Confirm greasing" key for this.
5. Call up "Main menu".
6.3.15 Grease needle bed support/adjustment pieces
Grease needle bed support/adjustment pieces

Greasing the needle bed supports/adjustment pieces

Greasing the needle bed supports/adjustment pieces

1. Position the needle beds at an angle.

2. Vacuum off fluff and dust.
3. Apply grease to needle bed supports with a brush.

Further information:
 Remove needle bed or position it at an angle [364]

339
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Supplementary activities during maintenance

7 Repairing the knitting machine

Repairing the knitting machine

This chapter contains information on:

 Supplementary activities during maintenance [340]
 Helpful knitting rows [343]
 Replacing parts [345]
 Eliminating faults in electronics system [387]
 Check fuses [395]
 Needle selection displacement [404]
 Entering the data of the needle selection displacement manually [415]
Supplementary activities during maintenance

7.1 Supplementary activities during

maintenance
This chapter contains information on:
 Switching power supply 40 V off and on [340]
 Central lubrication - mounting and working position [342]
Switching power supply 40 V off and on

7.1.1 Switching power supply 40 V off and on

The power supply of the carriage (step motors, selection systems, yarn carrier
plunger) can be switched off for assembling works. This eliminates the
switching off and on of the main machine switch and thereby the waiting time
until the computer of the knitting machine has shut down and rebooted.
The machine cannot be started with the engaging rod when the power supply
is switched off.
Keys for switching power supply 40 V off / on

Key Function

Call up the "Service" menu

Call up window "Manual interventions Service"

Confirm message

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for switching power supply 40 V off / on

340
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Supplementary activities during maintenance

Switch power supply off and on again:

1. Call up the "Service" menu from the "Main menu".
2. Call up from"Service" window "Manual interventions Service".

Window Manual interventions Service

Window "Manual interventions Service"

3. Tap the "Off" switch if the "40 Volt power supply" is to be switched off.
Answer the message "Switch off?" with "Yes".
- or -
➜ Tap the "On" switch if the "40Volt power supply" is to be switched on. Tap
the "Confirm message" key. The machine is ready for operation.
4. Call up "Main menu".
Central lubrication - mounting and working position

341
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Helpful knitting rows

7.1.2 Central lubrication - mounting and working position

Only on machines with The central lubrication can be swiveled upward for mounting activities, e.g. to
central lubrication remove the carriage part.
Mounting position Swivel central lubrication into mounting position:
1. Swivel central lubrication upward (approx. 100 degrees).
Mounting position of central lubrication

Mounting position of central lubrication

2. Move central lubrication downward somewhat until it stops.

Working position Swivel central lubrication into working position:

DANGER
Central lubrication in mounting position!
If the machine is started and the carriage moves outward, the
side safety door could be thrown open.
➜ Swivel central lubrication into working position.

1. Move central lubrication upward somewhat until the lock is released.

Swiveling central lubrication into working position

Swiveling central lubrication into working position

2. Swivel central lubrication downward until it touches the carriage.

Helpful knitting rows

342
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Helpful knitting rows

7.2 Helpful knitting rows

When carrying out cleaning, adjustments and repair work, it is helpful to set a
certain knitting situation immediately. The following table lists the knitting
specifications mentioned in the operating instructions.
Knitting specifications

Knitting specifications

Empty row < > S0 W0

Or: Tap in window "Machine start" on the

key "SPF S0".

Empty row with transfer racking < > VU S0 W0

Empty row with half racking < > V# S0 W0

Transfer row to the rear (R = all needles) < > S:U^SR; S1

Transfer row to the front < > S:UVSR; S1

Knitting specifications
Keys for entering a knitting row

Key Function

Switch on Sintral editor

Call up "Machine start" window

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for entering a knitting row

Enter and fix a knitting row:

1. Stop the carriage shortly after the left reversing position.
2. Call up the Sintral Editor.
3. Position the cursor accordingly (e.g. on line 998) in the Sintral program.
4. Enter the knitting row using the virtual keyboard.
For example, you may want to enter a transfer row to the rear on line 998.
The specifications are as follows: 998 <> S:U^SR; S1
5. Confirm input and return to the "Main menu".
6. Call up the "Machine start" window.

343
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Replacing parts

7. In the "SPF line fixed" line, tap the "Line: 999" field and enter the line
number "998".
Machine start window

"Machine start" window

8. Fix this line by tapping the "SPF line fixed" key and engaging the machine.
 The knitting specification is carried out after the next reverse.
9. Stop the carriage if it is in the left reverse again.
10. Carry out work on the knitting machine.
11. To resume production tap in the window "Machine start" on the key "SP
from line 1" and engage the machine.

An empty row is entered on line 999 in a STOLL knitting

program.

For the first 2 knitting rows after "SPF", the carriage moves over
the entire needle bed.
Replacing parts

344
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Replacing parts

7.3 Replacing parts

This chapter contains information on:
 Replacing needle and coupling part [346]
 Replacing intermediate slider [348]
 Replacing selection jack [351]
 Replacing holding-down jack [352]
 Remove needle bed or position it at an angle [355]
 Repairing needle bed and additional needle bed [358]
 Removing selection jack bed (CMS 520 C and CMS 830 C) [362]
 Removing and mounting carriage part [365]
 Removing cam plate [373]
 Removing and mounting step motor [374]
 Replacing gear racks in the step motor [375]
 Replacing yarn carrier [379]
 Mount intarsia yarn carrier * [380]
 Replacing yarn control unit [382]
 Replacing drive belts and friction roller of friction feed wheel [382]
 Deaerating oil line [385]
 Replacing comb hook [386]
Replacing needle and coupling part

345
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Replacing parts

7.3.1 Replacing needle and coupling part

Replacing needle and coupling part

Replacing needle and coupling part

with all machines 1. Pull-out the needle rail (1) with the extraction hook (6).
(Exception: CMS 830 C)
2. Pull needle (2) upwards, the coupling part (3) will, with it, also be pulled
upwards.
3. When the butt of the coupling parts (4) bumps into the holding-down jack
bed, press the coupling part downward. Pull out the needle and coupling
part upward.
- or -
➜ With CMS 520 C: The end of the coupling part bumps into the wire (5), and
must therefore be pushed harder.

4. Assemble the new needle and coupling part.

5. To mount the new needle and coupling part, push the butt of the coupling
part through into the needle bed under the jack bed. While doing so, make
sure that the needle is guided in above the knock-over wire.

346
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Replacing parts

Replacing needle 1. Pull needle (2) upwards, the coupling part (3) will, with it, also be pulled
(CMS 830 C) upwards.
Replacing needle and coupling part

Replacing needle and coupling part

2. If needle butt bumps into needle rail, tilt needle laterally so that the
connection needle-coupling part is loosen. Should this be difficult, then
provide help with a knitting hook. Push coupling part downward and return
needle to straight position. Pull out needle upward.
3. Install the new needle in the reverse order. Lift coupling part a little by
means of pliers.
Replacing coupling part 1. If a coupling part must be replaced, then remove the corresponding
(CMS 830 C) needle. Lift upper end of coupling part out of needle bed with a needle or
a knitter hook. Push coupling part upwards by means of pliers and lift it out
of needle bed.
Removing a coupling part

Removing a coupling part

2. Inserting a new coupling part. Put pliers above butt of coupling part and
then push coupling part downwards by means of pliers.
Inserting a coupling part

Inserting a coupling part

3. Reassemble needle.

347
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Replacing parts

Replacing intermediate slider

7.3.2 Replacing intermediate slider

There are different models depending on the machine type and the gauge.
Type 1
Valid for:

CMS 822, CMS 530, CMS 520

E10 │ E12 │ E14 │ E16 │ E18 │ E6.2 │ E7.2 │ E8.2 │ E9.2

To replace the intermediate slider, you need a small pair of pliers.

Replacing the intermediate slider

Replacing the intermediate slider

1. Push the needle and coupling part (1) upward.

2. Using the pliers, pull the lower butt of the intermediate slider (2)
downwards out of the needle bed while pressing the upper butt into the
needle bed and pressing it under the cover rail (3).
3. Install the new intermediate slider in the reverse order.
4. Slide the needle and coupling part into the home position.
Type 2
Valid for:

CMS 822, CMS 530, CMS 520

E5 │ E7 │ E8 │ E2,5.2 │ E3,5.2 │ E5.2

CMS 740, CMS 730 T, CMS 530 T, CMS 502

all gauges

348
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Replacing parts

To replace the intermediate slider, you need a small pair of pliers.

Replacing the intermediate slider

Replacing the intermediate slider

1. Push the needle and coupling part (1) upward.

2. Push the intermediate slider (2) until the lower butt bumps into the cover
rail (3).
3. Pull the upper butt of the intermediate slider out of the needle bed while
pressing the lower butt into the needle bed and under the cover rail.
4. Install the new intermediate slider in the reverse order.
5. Slide the needle and coupling part into the home position.

349
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Replacing parts

Type 3
Valid for:

CMS 830 C, CMS 520 C

all gauges

To replace the intermediate slider, you need a small pair of pliers.

Replacing the intermediate slider

Replacing the intermediate slider

1. Push the needle and coupling part (1) upward.

2. Push the spring wedge (3) to the side.
3. Pull out the intermediate slider (2) upwards.
4. Install the new intermediate slider in the reverse order.
5. Slide the needle and coupling part into the home position.
Replacing selection jack

350
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Replacing parts

7.3.3 Replacing selection jack

Replacing selection jack (right picture: CMS 520 C and CMS 830 C)

Replacing selection jack (right picture: CMS 520 C and CMS 830 C)

1. Push the needle with the coupling part upward.

2. Push the intermediate slider (1) until the lower butt bumps into the spring
wedge (2).
3. Push the selection jack (3) upward until it bumps into the cover rail (4).
4. Press the butt (5) of the selection jack into the needle bed while at the
same time sliding the selection jack further upward.
5. Remove the selection jack.
6. Install the new selection jack in the reverse order.
7. On the CMS 520 C and CMS 830 C, make sure when inserting the new
selection jack that the butt of the selection jack is behind the butt of the
intermediate slider.
8. Slide the intermediate slider in home position.
9. Slide the needle and the coupling part into the home position.
Replacing holding-down jack

351
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Replacing parts

7.3.4 Replacing holding-down jack

Not with CMS 830 C 1. Transfer all stitches of the needle bed in which the jack is replaced to the
other needle bed.
Removing the limiter 3

Removing the limiter (3)

2. Remove screw (1) on left and right-hand sides of jack bed. Use the special
hexagon screwdriver from the accessories for this purpose.
3. Loosen the screw (2) on the left and right-hand sides of the jack bed.
4. Remove the limiter (3) on both sides.
Replacing a jack

Replacing a jack

5. Pull out wire (4) and, with gauges E3,5.2, E5.2, E6.2, E7.2, E8.2, E9.2
(with 72", 84") wire (6) as well, up to the point of repair. When doing so,
always guide in the replacement wire from the accessories after it from the
other side of the machine so that the jacks do not fall out of the needle bed.
6. Pull out the wire (5).
7. Take out the holding-down jack from above and insert a new one.
8. Reassemble the needle bed in the reverse order.

352
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Replacing parts

With CMS 830 C Replacing spring of holding-down jack:

1. Transfer all stitches of the needle bed in which the jack is replaced to the
other needle bed.
Push spring into Position open

Push spring into "Position open"

2. Push all springs (1) of the holding-down jacks into the rear position (2).
3. Remove screw (3) on left and right-hand sides of jack bed.
4. Pull out the wire (4) up to the point of repair.
5. Push defective spring into the front position and pull out upward.
6. Push holding-down jack (5) into "Position closed" and insert new spring.
While doing so, the holding-down jack is pushed into "Position open"
again. Make sure that the spring lies under the spring wedge (6) and is
located in the rear position (2).
Replacing spring

Replacing spring

7. Assemble in reverse order.

- or -
➜ Replace holding-down jack.

353
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Replacing parts

Replacing holding-down jack:

1. Once work has been carried out on the front needle bed, then position the
needle bed at an angle. This enables the wires to be pulled out more
easily.

2. Loosen screws (1) and (2) on the left and right sides of the jack bed. Use
the special hexagon screwdriver from the accessories for screws (1).
3. Remove the limiter (3) on both sides.
4. Push all springs (5) of the holding-down jacks into the rear position (6).
5. Remove screw (7) on left and right-hand sides of jack bed.
6. Pull out the wire (4). Push the springs toward the front carefully until force
is no longer being applied to the holding-down jacks.
Push springs toward the front

Push springs toward the front

7. Pull out the wire (5) and (6) up to the point of repair.
Pulling the wires out

Pulling the wires out

8. Remove the spring of the defective holding-down jack.

9. Take out the holding-down jack (7) together with the support (8) upward.
Insert new holding-down jack and support.
10. Reassemble the needle bed in the reverse order.
Further information:
 Helpful knitting rows [343]
 Remove needle bed or position it at an angle [355]

354
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Replacing parts

7.3.5 Remove needle bed or position it at an angle

Remove needle bed or position it at an angle

This chapter contains instructions on:

 Releasing needle bed
 Removing needle bed
 Positioning the needle bed at an angle
 Screwing on the needle bed tight
Key for calling up Manual interventions window

Key Function

Call up "Manual interventions" window

Key for calling up "Manual interventions" window

Releasing needle bed on all machines (exception: CMS 520 C, CMS 830 C)

Releasing needle bed on all 1. Transfer all stitches of the needle bed to be removed or positioned
machines (exception: CMS vertically to the other needle bed.
520 C, CMS 830 C) 2. When the carriage assembly is in the left reversing position, stop the
machine with the engaging rod. If a central lubrication is present, the
carriage must be in the left reversing position.
3. Tap the "Rel. drive brake" key in the "Manual interventions" window and
slide the carriage assembly to the left up to the stop.
4. Remove two screws (2) on each side of the machine.
Releasing needle bed

Releasing needle bed

5. Releasing the rear needle bed for gauge E 10 - E 18 (CMS 502: E16, E18,
E8.2): Remove the screws (3). Push the connection (4) to the side. While
doing so, the impulse sensor rail is pushed to the side.
Link of the impulse sensor rail

Link of the impulse sensor rail

Remove needle bed or position it at an angle

355
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Replacing parts

Remove needle bed or 1. Front needle bed: Swivel towards the front carefully and lean it against the
position it at an angle machine covering.
2. Rear needle bed: Remove the needle bed from the machine with two
persons.
Screwing on needle bed tight

Screwing on needle bed tight

Installing front and rear needle beds

Installing front and rear needle beds

➜ Reassemble the needle bed in the reverse order. When doing so, make
sure that the needle bed contacts the pin (1) and the roller (2).
Release needle bed CMS 520 C, CMS 830 C

Release needle bed CMS The selection jack bed is fixed on the needle bed. If the needle bed is
520 C, CMS 830 C positioned at an angle, the selection jack bed bumps into the cover (6) of the
carriage guide bar. There is a danger of the selection jack being damaged.
 Spacer (2): 200 x 20 x 40 mm, 1 piece
 Spacer (4): 50 x 20 x 40 mm, 2 pieces
1. Transfer all stitches of the needle bed to be removed or positioned
vertically to the other needle bed.
2. When the carriage assembly is in the left reversing position, stop the
machine with the engaging rod.
3. Tap the "Rel. drive brake" key in the "Manual interventions" window and
slide the carriage assembly to the left up to the stop point.
4. Remove two screws (1) on each side of the machine.

5. Lay the spacer (2) on the carriage guide bar on the left machine side.
6. Lift the needle bed with a lever (3) enough to be able to slide the spacer
(4) under the needle bed support (5).

356
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Replacing parts

7. Lay the spacer (2) on the carriage guide bar on the right machine side.

8. Lift the needle bed with a lever (3) enough to be able to slide the second
spacer (4) under the needle bed support (5).
9. Lay the spacer (2) on the carriage guide bar on the left machine side.

10. Lift the needle bed with a lever (3) enough to be able to slide the spacer
(4) completely under the needle bed support (5).
11. Position the needle bed at an angle and secure against tilting.

357
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Replacing parts

Remove needle bed or 1. Front needle bed: Swivel towards the front carefully and lean it against the
Remove needle bed or position it at an angle

position it at an angle machine covering.

2. Rear needle bed: Remove the needle bed from the machine with two
persons.
Screwing on needle bed tight

Screwing on needle bed tight

Installing front and rear needle beds

Installing front and rear needle beds

➜ Reassemble the needle bed in the reverse order. When doing so, make
sure that the needle bed contacts the pin (1) and the roller (2).
Repairing needle bed and additional needle bed

7.3.6 Repairing needle bed and additional needle bed

Damaged needle bed

Damaged needle bed

If the carriage is blocked, the needle bed may be damaged. This means that
the movable parts (needles, coupling part, intermediate slider and selection
jack) do not move smoothly or are blocked. This damage must be eliminated
carefully and conscientiously before the machine is started up again. If it is not,
a risk of the carriage blocking again immediately and damaging the needle bed
again is present.
When performing repairs, the needle bed types must be determined. There
are two different versions: milled and combined needle beds. The additional
beds are always milled.

Needle bed Description

Milled The grooves for the moving parts have been cut out of the
needle bed.

Combined The needle bed is composed of individual stays. They are

inserted into a base plate and screwed down.

Repairs must be carried out very carefully and without the use
of force.

358
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Replacing parts

Milled needle bed 1. If the carriage blocks, then separate the connection of the carriage part to
the carriage. Move carriage to the next reversal point. Lift carriage part
from needle bed. Check cam parts for damage and remove broken
working butts from the moving parts.
2. Find the channel chisel and channel file accessories.
3. Remove the movable parts (needle, coupling part etc.) at the point of
damage.
4. Set damaged stays into a vertical position again using the channel chisel
and straighten them. The chisel may only be struck with light hammer
blows in the damaged groove. Do not strike the chisel in too deep, as the
needle bed foundation will be damaged.
Positioning stays vertically

Positioning stays vertically

5. Take a needle or selector jack from this machine and place it into the
repaired groove. Push the needle up and down in the groove. If it moves
easily, check whether the moving parts of the neighboring grooves move
easily as well.
6. If this is not the case, repeat Steps 4 and 5.
7. Do this for all damaged grooves. The grooves to the left and right of the
point of damage must move easily as well.
8. If the damaged stays are bent upward, knock them even (smooth) again
using the channel chisel.
Smoothing surface

Smoothing surface

9. Check whether the needle bed elements move easily in the grooves.
Repeat step 5.

359
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Replacing parts

NOTICE
The needle bed may be damaged if the channel file is used
improperly!
If too much of a stay is filed off, the needle bed is defective at
this point and can only be repaired by a Stoll technician.
➜ Use the channel file for the removal of burrs only.
➜ The grooves must be cleaned carefully after the channel
file is used.

10. Check whether the edges of the damaged stays have burrs. If this is the
case, carefully remove these burrs with the channel file.
Removing burrs

Removing burrs

11. Check whether the needle bed elements move easily in the grooves.
Repeat step 5.
12. If everything is in order, carefully polish the needle bed with the channel
file. Place the channel file flat on the needle bed and lightly move it back
and forth perpendicular to the needle channel.
13. The metal debris must be removed from the needle channels. For this
purpose, clean the area of repair with a brush.
14. If everything is in order, reinsert the moving parts into the needle bed.

Further information:
 Removing and mounting carriage part [365]
 Replacing needle and coupling part [346]
 Replacing intermediate slider [348]
 Replacing selection jack [351]
Combined needle bed

360
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Replacing parts

Combined needle bed If a stay of a combined needle bed is slightly damaged, it can be repaired as
described above. It must be replaced if it is heavily damaged, though.
1. If the carriage blocks, then separate the connection of the carriage part to
the carriage. Move carriage to the next reversal point. Lift carriage part
from needle bed. Check cam parts for damage and remove broken
working butts from the moving parts.
2. Remove needle bed. Place the needle bed on a level surface (e.g.
workbench or table).
3. Remove the movable parts (needle, coupling part etc.) at the point of
damage.
4. Remove the holding-down jacks at the point of damage.
5. Remove safety device and pull out wire (1).
Repairing a combined needle bed

Repairing a combined needle bed

6. Remove the bar (2) at the point of damage.

7. Lift the damaged stay at the rear end (3) and carefully pull it out toward the
back.
8. Remove the debris near the removed stay.
9. Spare stays are found among the machine accessories. Use a new stay
from the accessories.
10. Reassemble the needle bed in the reverse order. Tighten the screws used
to secure the bar (2) to a torque of 2.6 Nm. Return the needle bed to the
machine.

Further information:
 Removing and mounting carriage part [365]
 Remove needle bed or position it at an angle [355]
 Replacing needle and coupling part [346]
 Replacing intermediate slider [348]
 Replacing selection jack [351]
 Replacing holding-down jack [352]

361
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Replacing parts

7.3.7 Removing selection jack bed (CMS 520 C and

Removing selection jack bed (CMS 520 C and CMS 830 C)

CMS 830 C)
with CMS 520 C 1. Stop the carriage assembly into the left reversing position.
2. Remove two screws (1) on each side of the machine.
Releasing the selection jack bed

Releasing the selection jack bed

3. Remove the screws (2) over the entire length of the selection jack bed.
4. Push the intermediate sliders (3) into its highest position.
Lifting selection jacks

Lifting selection jacks

5. Push the selection jacks (4) into their highest position.

6. Starting from one side, lift the selection jacks at their top end while
simultaneously pushing the wire (5) out of the accessory between the
selection jack bed and the selection jack. Carry this out over the entire
length of the selection jack bed. The wire must be pushed in so that the
working butts of the selection jacks stick out so high that they touch neither
the intermediate slider nor the needle bed.
7. Push the selection jack bed to the side. The front bed to the left and the
rear bed to the right. (Use a rubber mallet, if necessary.)
8. Take off the selection jack bed.
9. When mounting the selection jack bed, make sure that it rests on the pin
(6).
Installing selection jack bed

Installing selection jack bed

362
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Replacing parts

with CMS 830 C 1. Stop the carriage assembly into the left reversing position.
2. Remove needle bed. Lay the needle bed on a flat surface (e.g. workbench
or table).
3. Push the intermediate sliders (1) into their highest position.
Lifting selection jacks

Lifting selection jacks

4. Remove two screws (2) on each side of the machine.

Releasing the selection jack bed

Releasing the selection jack bed

5. Remove the screws (3) of the clamping pieces (4) over the entire length of
the selection jack bed.
6. loosen both grub screws (5) at each clamping piece. Move clamping piece
to the side and remove it.
7. Push the selection jacks (6) into their highest position.
8. Starting from one side, lift the selection jacks at their top end while
simultaneously pushing the wire (7) out of the accessory between the
selection jack bed and the selection jack. Carry this out over the entire
length of the selection jack bed. The wire must be pushed in so that the
working butts of the selection jacks stick out so high that they touch neither
the intermediate slider nor the needle bed.
9. Take off the selection jack bed.

363
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Replacing parts

10. When mounting the selection jack bed, make sure that it rests on pin (8).
Installing selection jack bed

Installing selection jack bed

11. Mounting the clamping pieces: Insert clamping piece and push it to the
side. Secure it with the screw (3) and then tighten the grub screws (5).

Further information:
 Remove needle bed or position it at an angle [355]
Removing and mounting carriage part

364
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Replacing parts Remove the carriage part to replace the cams

7.3.8 Removing and mounting carriage part

Removing carriage part

Removing carriage part The carriage part is removed when:

 the cams must be replaced (e.g. wide or narrow coupling of tandem
machines)
 a carriage part blocks, e.g. when working butts of the movable parts
(needle, coupling part, intermediate slider, and selection jack) are broken.
This chapter contains information on:
 Remove the carriage part to replace the cams [365]
 Remove the carriage part when the carriage assembly is blocked in the
needle bed [367]
 Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly [370]
Remove the carriage part to replace the cams

Remove the carriage part to

Key for calling up Manual interventions window

replace the cams Key Function

Call up "Manual interventions" window

Key for calling up "Manual interventions" window

1. If a central lubrication is present, swivel it into mounting position.

2. Move the carriage assembly outward up to the support surface.
3. Switch off 40 V power supply.
4. Remove the carriage assembly panelling (1).
Panelling of carriage assembly

Panelling of carriage assembly

5. If the rear carriage part is removed, the needle detector is to be removed

as well.
Needle detector

Needle detector

6. Mark the position of the needle detector so that it can be reassembled in

the same position.

365
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Remove the carriage part to replace the cams Replacing parts

7. Remove the suction tube on the carriage assembly.

8. Unscrew the shoulder screws (2) and screws (4) on the left and right sides.
Swiveling plate

Swiveling plate

9. Swivel left and right swiveling plates (5) inward.

Opened carriage assembly

Opened carriage assembly

10. Loosen the screws on the plugs (3) and pull out the plugs.
11. To release the drive brake, tap the "Rel. drive brake" key.
("Main menu" -> "Manual interventions service" window, "Release drive
brake" key)
12. Push away the carriage assembly.

If the carriage assembly is blocked:

The drive brake has automatically closed.
➜ Release the drive brake again and continue pushing the
carriage assembly in the original direction.

13. Lift the carriage part off the support surface.

- or -
➜ Open the side safety door hood and lift out the carriage part to the side.
14. To replace the cams, turn the cam plate upward.

Further information:
 Switching power supply 40 V off and on [340]
 Central lubrication - mounting and working position [342]
 Removing cam plate [373]

366
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Replacing parts Remove the carriage part when the carriage assembly is blocked in

Remove the carriage part

Remove the
Carriage carriage
assembly part when
blocked the carriage assembly is blocked in the needle bed
- causes

when the carriage assembly In the case of a shock on the needle bed, e.g. in the case of needle breakage,
is blocked in the needle bed the piezo-electric shock stop switches off the knitting machine. On the touch
screen a pictograph appears showing on which needle bed the fault occured.

Front shock stop motion Rear shock stop motion

Possible causes:
 Working butts of the movable parts (needle, coupling part, intermediate
slider, and selection jack) are broken
 Thereby it is possible that trick walls got damaged as well.
Before starting to operate the machine, you have to eliminate the fault.
Otherwise, the carriage assembly might block again immediately.
To eliminate the fault you need to remove the corresponding carriage part from
the needle bed. Check the cams and the needle bed for possible damage.
Remove the carriage part
On tandem machines both carriage parts (front or rear) are
from the needle bed
raised, even if only one is blocked.
Key for calling up Manual interventions window

Key Function

Call up "Manual interventions" window

Key for calling up "Manual interventions" window

1. Call up "Manual interventions" window.

2. To switch off the needle selection, set the "Needle selection" switch to
"Off".
3. To switch off all yarn carriers, tap the "YC bolt Up" key.
4. Push all yarn carriers outward.
5. If a central lubrication is present, swivel it into mounting position.
6. Switch off 40 V power supply.
7. Remove the carriage assembly panelling (1).
Panelling of carriage assembly

Panelling of carriage assembly

367
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Remove the carriage part when the carriage assembly is blocked in the needle bed

8. If the rear carriage part is removed, the needle detector is to be removed

as well.
Needle detector

Needle detector

9. Mark the position of the needle detector so that it can be reassembled in

the same position.
10. Remove the suction tube on the carriage assembly.
11. Loosen the shoulder screws (2) and screws (4) on the left and right sides.
Swiveling plate

Swiveling plate

12. Swivel left and right swiveling plates (5) inward.

13. Tighten shoulder screws (2) and screws (4) evenly; the carriage part is
raised off the needle bed in the process.
14. Loosen the screws on the plugs (3) and pull out the plugs.
Opened carriage assembly

Opened carriage assembly

15. To lower the carriage part again, loosen the shoulder screws (2) and
screws (4) on the left and right-hand sides.
16. Remove the shoulder screws (2) and screws (4).

368
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Replacing parts Remove the carriage part when the carriage assembly is blocked in

17. To release the drive brake, tap the "Rel. drive brake" key.
("Main menu" -> "Manual interventions service" window, "Release drive
brake" key)

NOTICE
Damage to needles and knitting system!
There are still needles in the knitting system. If the direction is
changed when moving the carriage assembly, the needles and
knitting system will be damaged.
➜ Never change the pushing direction of the carriage
assembly.

18. Push away the carriage assembly.

If the carriage assembly is blocked:

The drive brake has automatically closed.
➜ Release the drive brake again and continue pushing the
carriage assembly in the original direction.

19. Lift carriage part from needle bed.

With CMS 520 C, CMS 830 C there is a danger of the selection

jacks being damaged if the carriage part is lifted off directly
from the needle bed.
The reason for this: The carriage part engages under the upper
end of the selection jacks.
➜ Lift the carriage part in the direction of the "Yarn carrier
rods".
➜ Lift carriage part from needle bed.

20. Check the carriage part and the needle bed.

Check the carriage part and the needle bed

Check the carriage part and

Do not remove metallic parts and fragments (e.g. broken
the needle bed
needle latch or hook) with a magnetic tool. There is a danger
that the needle bed or cams can be magnetized, leading to
incorrect selection.

1. Check the cams for damage.

Remove broken working butts of the movable parts (needle, coupling part,
intermediate slider, and selection jack).
2. Check the needle bed for damage.
Remove broken working butts of the movable parts (needle, coupling part,
intermediate slider, and selection jack).
If trick walls are damaged, they have to be repaired.

Further information:
 Central lubrication - mounting and working position [342]
 Switching power supply 40 V off and on [340]

369
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly Replacing parts

Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly

Assembling carriage part Please observe with a machine with clamping and cutting bed:
and carriage assembly
If the front carriage part is returned to the machine, it needs to be pushed from
outside on to the support surface (1). The reason for this: The movable parts
in the clamping and cutting bed will be pushed by the carriage part (more
exactly: by the cam box curve) into their correct positions.
Support surface of carriage part

Support surface of carriage part

Preparations, machine with Please observe the following procedure:
and without clamping and
cutting bed Procedure

Front needle bed with clamping and ◆ Open the lateral safety door (on
cutting bed the left or right side)
◆ Push the carriage part from
outside on to the support surface
(1).
◆ Push the carriage part inward
enough to position it above the
clamping and cutting bed.

without clamping ◆ Position the carriage part on the

and cutting bed support surface (1) (on the left or
right side)

Rear needle bed ◆ Open rear panel segments

◆ Position the carriage part on the
support surface (1) (on the left or
right side)

370
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Replacing parts Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly

Keys for assembling carriage part and carriage assembly

Key Function

Call up "Manual interventions" window

Confirm the repair

Call up "Machine start" window

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for assembling carriage part and carriage assembly

1. Switch on 40 V power supply.

2. Call up "Manual interventions" window.
3. To release the drive brake, tap the "Rel. drive brake" key.
4. Push the carriage assembly directly over the carriage part.
5. Switch off 40 V power supply.
6. Screw in the shoulder screws (3) until the carriage assembly is raised
somewhat.
Fastening carriage assembly on carriage part

Fastening carriage assembly on carriage part

7. Swivel the left and right swiveling plates outward below the carriage
assembly.
8. Tighten both shoulder screws (3) for fastening the carriage assembly.
Assembly of the rear carriage part: pull the upper area of the carriage
part (needle brushes) away from the needle bed to ensure that the
shoulder screw does not cant.
9. Tighten screws (4) evenly.
10. Plug in the plugs (2) while watching the plug coding.
11. Tighten the safety screws on the plugs.
12. Place the yarn carriers in their starting positions.
13. Mount the carriage assembly panelling.
14. Mount the suction tube on the carriage assembly.

371
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly Replacing parts

15. If a central lubrication is present, swivel it into working position.

16. Switch on 40 V power supply.
17. Call up "Main menu".
18. Call up "Machine start" window.
19. Tap the "SPF line fixed" key.
20. Start the machine with the engaging rod.
21. Only if the carriage assembly was blocked: If the carriage stops after the
left reversion, set the needle selection to "On" in the "Machine start"
window.
22. Tap in "Machine start" window on key "SP from line 1" to start production.

Further information:
 Switching power supply 40 V off and on [340]
 Central lubrication - mounting and working position [342]
Removing cam plate

372
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Replacing parts Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly

7.3.9 Removing cam plate

The cam plate is removed for cleaning, checking or replacing cams or step
motors.
1. Switch off 40 V power supply.
2. Remove the carriage part.
Plugs of the selection systems

Plugs of the selection systems

3. Disconnect the plugs of the step motors (1) and selection systems (2).
4. Remove the screws (3).
Screws for cast body on cam plate

Screws for cast body on cam plate

5. Loosen screws (4). Pull control (5) of holding-down jacks a little bit to the
front. Thus, the cam plate is not blocked by control (5) anymore.
Control of holding-down jacks

Control of holding-down jacks

6. Turn over the carriage part so that the cam plate is located at the bottom,
making sure that the cam plate and the carriage part (cast body) do not
separate.
7. Remove the carriage part.
8. Carry out work on cams or step motors.
9. Reassemble the cam plate and carriage part in the reverse order.
Further information:
 Switching power supply 40 V off and on [340]
 Removing and mounting carriage part [365]
 Remove the carriage part to replace the cams [365]

373
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly Replacing parts

7.3.10 Removing and mounting step motor

Removing and mounting step motor

Each knitting system contains a step motor which controls the stitch cam
position.
1. Remove the carriage part.
2. Remove the cam plate.
Removing step motor

Removing step motor

3. Move defective step motor to home position: Turn the scale (2) until the
pointer (1) is positioned exactly on the zero point (3).

NOTICE
Adjusting screws!
If adjusting screws are released, the step motor must be
readjusted at STOLL.
➜ Do not loosen any adjusting screws (5).

4. Remove the screws (4).

5. Take off the defective step motor.
6. Move new step motor to home position: Turn the scale (2) until the pointer
(1) is positioned exactly on the zero point (3).
7. Press the mechanics (pressure part tuck) downward to be able to insert
the roller (6) in the gear rack of the step motor.

374
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Replacing parts Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly

8. Mount the step motor. If this is not possible, repeat step 7.

9. Screw on the screws (4) tight.
10. Reassemble the cam plate and carriage part in the reverse order.

Further information:
 Removing cam plate [373]
 Removing and mounting carriage part [365]
Replacing gear racks in the step motor

7.3.11 Replacing gear racks in the step motor

There are different models depending on the machine type and the gauge.
Type 1
Valid for:

CMS 530, CMS 520, CMS 822, CMS 933, CMS ADF-3

E10 │ E12 │ E14 │ E16 │ E18 │ E6.2 │ E7.2 │ E8.2 │ E9.2

Replacing gear racks:

1. Take off the step motor.
2. Rotate positioning disk (1) to the mounting position (5 o'clock).

3. Turn over the step motor and check the mounting position.
The adjustment is correct if
The upper gear rack (2) and the boring are aligned.
The lower gear rack (3) and the boring are aligned.

2 upper gear rack Control of the stitch tension

3 lower gear rack Control of the pressure parts for tuck and stitch
take over

375
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly Replacing parts

4. Remove the screws (4) for the defective gear rack.

5. Remove carefully the guide strip (5) and the gear rack.
6. Replace defective gear rack.
7. Mount the new gear rack and the guide bars.
8. Check whether the gear racks are positioned correctly. For this purpose,
turn the positioning disk (1) to the home position (6 o'clock).
 The gear racks must be aligned.

9. If this is not the case, repeat steps 2 till 8.

 The gear rack is replaced.
Type 2
Valid for:

CMS 530, CMS 520, CMS 822, CMS 933, CMS ADF-3

E5 │ E7 │ E8 │ E2,5.2 │ E3,5.2 │ E5.2

CMS 740, CMS 730 T, CMS 530 T, CMS 502, CMS 830 C, CMS 520 C

all gauges

Replacing gear racks:

1. Take off the step motor.
2. Rotate positioning disk (7) to the home position (6).
Step motor home position

Step motor home position

376
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Replacing parts Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly

3. Set at the rear the left pin of the lower gear rack guide.
Pin of gear rack guide

Pin of gear rack guide

4. Push lower gear rack manually to the left until all gear racks can be
removed.
5. Replace defective gear rack.
6. Set the installation position. For this purpose, turn the serrated lock
washer (1) in such a way that the right edge is positioned somewhat in
front of the light barrier (2). (visually expressed: if this setting were on a
clock, the time would be: 11:58)
Built-in position

Built-in position

7. In this installation position, push in the gear rack (3) from the left until light
resistance can be felt.
 The gear rack contacts the pinion.
8. Push in gear rack (5) as well.
9. Push in gear rack (4) from the right until light resistance can be felt.
 The gear rack contacts the pinion.
10. Push gear racks (3) and (4) inward evenly.
 Gear rack (5) is automatically pulled inward when gear rack (4) is
pushed.
11. Check whether the gear racks are positioned correctly. For this purpose,
turn the positioning disk (7) to the home position (6).

377
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly Replacing parts

12. The gear racks must be aligned.

Monitoring of built-in position

Monitoring of built-in position

13. If this is not the case, repeat step 3 through 11.

14. Move pin of the lower gear rack guide at the rear to the home position.
 Replacement of the gear racks is complete.

Further information:
 Removing and mounting step motor [374]
Replacing yarn carrier

378
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Replacing parts Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly

7.3.12 Replacing yarn carrier

When replacing the yarn carrier bow, ensure that the punch
mark is located on the inside when mounting shim (2).

1. Stop the carriage assembly into the left reversing position.

Screws of the yarn carrier limiter

Screws of the yarn carrier limiter

2. Loosen the screws (1) of the yarn carrier limiter.

3. To remove the yarn carrier limiters, turn the screws (1). The yarn carrier
limiters can be removed and mounted in any position.
4. Shift yarn carrier to the right or left to the replacement point (A) and remove
it.
5. Place new yarn carriers on the rails.
6. Place the yarn carrier limiters of yarn carriers on the rails, position them in
a staggered way and screw them on tight.
7. Check the adjustment the yarn carrier.

Further information:
 Adjusting yarn carriers [201]
Mount intarsia yarn carrier *

379
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly Replacing parts

7.3.13 Mount intarsia yarn carrier *

Combination possibilities for normal and Intarsia yarn carriers:

Normal yarn carrier Normal and intarsia yarn carriers can be used side by side but
type 1 not on the same track.

Reason: The disengaging arms (1) of the normal yarn carrier

collide with the intarsia yarn carrier or the yarn carrier limiter.

The combination possibilities:

Each combination can be used with itself or with another

combination.

: Equip the yarn carrier tracks from inward to outward.

With the allocation from inward to outward no track must be kept
empty when using intarsia and normal yarn carriers.

Normal yarn carrier Normal yarn carriers type2 and intarsia yarn carriers can be
type 2 used together on the same track.

The combination possibilities:

You can equip the yarn carrier rails as desired.

You can equip all the tracks.

380
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Replacing parts Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly

Mount intarsia yarn carrier:

1. Stop the carriage assembly into the left reversing position.
Yarn carrier limiter

Yarn carrier limiter

2. Loosen the screws (3) of the yarn carrier limiter.

3. To remove the yarn carrier limiters, turn the screws (3). The yarn carrier
limiters can be removed and mounted in any position.
4. Shift normal yarn carrier to the right to replacement point (A) and remove it.
5. Mount the intarsia yarn carriers and push them into their starting positions.
To do this, press the clamp (1) outward or the lifter (2) inward.
Intarsia yarn carrier

Intarsia yarn carrier

6. Place the yarn carrier limiter on the rails so that the ramp faces outward.

7. Position the yarn carrier limiters of yarn carriers in a staggered way and
screw them on tight.
8. Check the adjustment the yarn carrier.

Further information:
 Symbols in this document [14]
 Intarsia yarn carrier * [30]
 Adjusting intarsia yarn carrier (type 1) * [204]
 Adjusting intarsia yarn carriers (type 2) * [205]

381
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly Replacing parts

7.3.14 Replacing yarn control unit

Replacing yarn control unit

Dismantling a yarn control unit

Dismantling a yarn control unit

1. Mark the position of the old yarn control unit.

2. Remove the screw (1).
3. Lift the yarn control unit in the front until the contact pins are free. Push the
yarn control unit to the rear and remove it.
4. Mount the new yarn control device exactly at the position (marking) of the
old yarn control device.
- or -
➜ Mount an additional yarn control unit at a distance of 90 mm (minimum 75
mm) from the next yarn control unit.
5. Hook in the new yarn control unit in the rear guide rail. Pull the yarn control
unit to the front and press it downwards simultaneously.
6. Pull the yarn control unit to the front and screw it tightly with the screw (1).
Replacing drive belts and friction roller of friction feed wheel

7.3.15 Replacing drive belts and friction roller of friction feed

wheel
The drive belts and the friction roller of the friction feed wheel are replaced with
the following steps:
 Preparations
 Replace the drive belt
 Change position of friction roller
 Replacing the friction roller

382
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Replacing parts Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly

Preparations 1. Remove the lug (1) by loosening the knurled screws somewhat.
Friction feed wheel

Friction feed wheel

2. Remove screws (2) and take off the stop motion rails.
3. Release the couplings of the arms (3) so that they can swing downward.
4. Remove the screws (4) and take off the housing cover (5).
Replace the drive belt 1. Turn the V-ribbed belt pulley (6) by hand until both Allen screws can be
released through the holes (7).
Drive belt

Drive belt

2. Remove the belt (8).

3. Mount the new belt in such a way that it runs in the grooves of the drive
pulley.
4. Press the motor (9) upward and tighten the screws of holes (7)
5. Check the belt tension.
 The belt can be pushed through by approx. 2 to 4 mm when light pressure
is applied.

383
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly Replacing parts

Change position of friction The surface of the friction roller is worn over the course of time by the yarn.
roller Then the friction roller does not need to be replaced immediately, but its
position can be shifted by 11 mm. This doubles its service life.
1. Remove the screws (12).
Screws for friction rollers

Screws for friction rollers

2. Remove the spacer (11).

3. Take off both friction rollers (10).
4. To assemble: Push the spacer (11) onto the axis of the friction roller (10)
5. Reinstate the friction rollers (10).
6. Retighten the screws (12) without the spacers.
Replacing the friction roller 1. Remove the screws (12).
2. Take off the friction rollers (10).
3. Lay down the new friction roller.
4. Tighten the screws (12).
Deaerating oil line

384
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Replacing parts Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly

7.3.16 Deaerating oil line

Only on machines with
Central lubrication window

central lubrication

"Central lubrication" window

Keys for deaerating the central lubrication

Key Function

Call up the "Service" menu

Call up the "Central lubrication" window

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for deaerating the central lubrication

Deaerate oil line:

1. Stop carriage outside needle bed.
2. Loosen vent screw (7) somewhat.
Deaerating central lubrication

Deaerating central lubrication

3. Swivel central lubrication into mounting position. Recommendation: Place

a cleaning cloth under the central lubrication, as oil will be fed.
4. From the "Main menu" call up the "Service" window.
5. Call up the "Central lubrication" window.
6. Set "Ventilation" switch to "On".
 The pump feeds oil into the oil line.

385
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly Replacing parts

7. If oil comes out of the hole of the vent screw, set "Ventilation" (6) switch to
"Off".
8. Tighten vent screw again (9.5 Nm).
9. Repeat the ventilation process at all lubrication units.
10. Call up "Main menu".
Replacing comb hook

7.3.17 Replacing comb hook

Keys for replacing comb hooks

Key Function

Call up "Main menu"

Call up "Comb" window

Keys for replacing comb hooks

1. Open the comb cover plate.

2. Call up the "Comb" window from the "Main menu".
3. Tap on the "Release brake (=X=)" key.
4. Push the comb take-down manually upwards (about 8 cm).
 The cover rails of the comb take-down are located above the left and
right control unit.
5. Push the cover rails (1) to the side only until an open area results at the
repair point.
For this purpose, push the upper cover rails to the left until the repair point.
Push the lower cover rails to the right until the repair point.

6. Remove the comb hook.

7. Insert the new comb hook.
8. Close the cover rails.
9. Close the comb cover plate.
10. Tap the "Reference run (=R=)" key.
 The belt take-down is disassembled.

386
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Replacing parts Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly

7.4 Eliminating faults in electronics system

This chapter contains information on:
 Overview of the electronic control (control cabinet right) [387]
 Overview of the electronic control (control cabinet right) [390]
 Power supply unit [393]
 Control of yarn carrier magnets [393]
 Replacing electronic card [394]
Overview of the electronic control (control cabinet right)

7.4.1 Overview of the electronic control (control cabinet right)

Valid for:

Type

CMS 530 642

643

CMS 520 C 647

CMS 502 645

646

The machine control is located in the right control cabinet under the cover. The
card for controlling the yarn carrier magnets is located in the carriage.

387
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly Replacing parts

Right control cabinet

Right control cabinet

Electronic cards

Card Function

1 301 000 Drive and racking control unit

Controlling the drive and racking motor. Passing on the error
messages from the motors to card 009.

2 301 023 Input card, output card, fuse for (1)

The card ensures that the machine cannot be started as long as
an error is present.

Switching off main switch:

◆ if the automatic switching off of the machine is activated
◆ in case of extreme overvoltage
◆ if the servos are not ready for operation
Controlling the fluff absorption and fault lamp.

Ballast fuse for servo drive and racking.

Controlling horn, lighting, piezo elements, and central lubrication.

3 301 018 Fabric take-down card

Controlling the fabric take-down motors (main take-down,
auxiliary take-down, comb, comb hook motor, belt take-down).
Passing on the error messages from the fabric take-down motors
to board 009.

Controlling the feed wheel.

4 Fan

Electronic cards

388
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Replacing parts Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly

Right control cabinet

Right control cabinet

Electronic cards

Card Function

5 039 Controlling the input unit and the touch screen.

(ID 301 039) Controlling the SSD hard disk (Solid-State-Drive). The SSD
hard disk is integrated on the board.

6 009 Main computer; collecting all messages from the other cards.
(ID 301 009) Output of instructions to the other cards. Control of the
knitting sequence.
Controlling the carriage (main drive) and the racking position
of the rear needle bed.

7 965 Monitoring of the carriage assembly positions. Actuation of

(ID 300 965) the selection systems and the step motors. Forwarding of the
information to the board 943.

8 040 Motor driver of the step motors of the stitch cams.

(ID 30 040) Cooperation with the card 965.

9 301 020 Power supply unit with LEDs

Checking the charging state of the batteries. Activating

charging.

10 301 027 Battery plug-in unit

11 Display cable

12 Socket for Ethernet connection, if the machine is

interconnected.

Electronic cards

Further information:
 Switch off machine at the end of work [87]

389
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly Replacing parts

7.4.2 Overview of the electronic control (control cabinet right)

Overview of the electronic control (control cabinet right)

Valid for:

Type

CMS 530 621

627

CMS 520 C 629

CMS 502 637

638

The machine control is located in the right control cabinet under the cover. The
card for controlling the yarn carrier magnets is located in the carriage.

Right control cabinet

390
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Replacing parts Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly

Right control cabinet

Electronic cards

Card Function

1 301 000 Drive and racking control unit

Controlling the drive and racking motor. Passing on the error
messages from the motors to card 009.

2 301 012 Battery-, input-, output-card (BIO), fuse for (1)

The card ensures that the machine cannot be started as
(301 007, until
long as an error is present.
August 2012)
Switching off main switch:
◆ if the automatic switching off of the machine is
activated
◆ in case of extreme overvoltage
◆ if the servos are not ready for operation
Controlling the feed wheel, fluff absorption and fault lamp.

Ballast fuse for servo drive and racking.

Checking the charging state of the batteries. Activating

charging. Controlling horn, lighting, piezo elements, central
lubrication and battery relay.

3 301 006 Fabric take-down card

Controlling the fabric take-down motors (main take-down,
auxiliary take-down, comb, comb hook motor). Passing on
the error messages from the fabric take-down motors to
board 009.

Capacitors for fabric take-down motors on wiring system

(CMS 530, CMS 520: 251 453, CMS 502: 253 667)

4 Fan

Electronic cards

391
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly Replacing parts

Right control cabinet

Right control cabinet

Electronic cards

Card Function

5 010 Controlling the input unit and the touch screen.

(ID 301 010) Controlling hard disk. The hard disk is integrated on
the board.

6 009 Main computer; collecting all messages from the other

(ID 301 009) cards. Output of instructions to the other cards. Control
of the knitting sequence.
Controlling the carriage (main drive) and the racking
position of the rear needle bed.

7 965 Monitoring of the carriage assembly positions.

(ID 300 965) Actuation of the selection systems and the step
motors. Forwarding of the information to the board
943.

8 943 Motor driver of the step motors of the stitch cams.

(ID 300 943) Cooperation with the card 965.

9 300 923 Power supply unit with LEDs

10 301 008 Battery plug-in unit

11 Ethernet cable, if the machine is networked.

Electronic cards

Further information:
 Switch off machine at the end of work [87]

392
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Replacing parts Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly

7.4.4 Power supply unit

Power supply unit

Power supply unit

Power supply unit

The LEDs on the power supply unit indicate which voltages are generated and
at which voltage an error occurs. While switching on the main switch, the lower
three LEDs light up immediately, and the +28 V approx. 1 second later,
followed by the +40 V. The order in which the LEDs light up when switching on
may provide information on fault causes.
Control of yarn carrier magnets

7.4.5 Control of yarn carrier magnets

Each knitting system has got an electronic board (1) for controlling yarn carrier
magnets.
Electronic cards for controlling yarn carrier magnets

Electronic cards for controlling yarn carrier magnets

Electronic cards

Card Function

960 Activating of the yarn carrier magnets after the time

(ID 300 960) for switching the yarn carrier magnets has been
announced by the board 966.

Electronic cards

393
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly Check fuses

7.4.6 Replacing electronic card

Replacing electronic card

1. Set main switch to "0" and wait until the LEDs on the power supply unit go
out (approx. 60 seconds).
2. Open the cover of the left control cabinet.

NOTICE
An electronic card can be destroyed by electrostatic charge!
If you touch a board while you are electrostatically charged, the
board will be destroyed.
➜ First discharge yourself by touching "ground", e.g. a water
pipe or the machine frame, then touch a card.
➜ Only touch cards on the edge or the front side.

NOTICE
The electronic boards can be damaged by damage to the pins
on the rear of the board!
If the pins of the cards are bent or broken off at the rear, new
cards must be used.
➜ When replacing the cards, make sure that the pins are not
damaged.

3. Remove the card.

4. Plug in the new card.
5. Close the cover of the left control cabinet.
6. Set the main switch to "1" and acknowledge the error remedy.
Check fuses

394
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Check fuses Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly

7.5 Check fuses

Checking fuse (right control cabinet)

7.5.1 Checking fuse (right control cabinet)

Valid for:

Type

CMS 530 642

643

CMS 520 C 647

CMS 502 645

646

DANGER
Life-threatening high voltage!
Electrical shock may cause death or serious injuries.
➜ Set the main switch to "0" and wait until the touch screen is
dark and an alarm signal sounds.

1. Set machine main switch to "0".

2. Wait until the touch screen is dark and an alarm signal sounds.
3. Check fuses (1) to (4) at the rear of the right control unit.
Fuses at the rear of the right control unit (for a better overview the fan was dismantled)

Fuses at the rear of the right control unit (for a better overview the fan was dismantled)

1 28 V (stop motions) (1A, slow- 3 Yarn control unit (1A, slow-blow)

blow)
2 STIXX (1A, slow-blow) 4 Battery charge (1A, slow-blow)

395
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly Check fuses

4. Inspect battery fuse (9).

Disconnect the plug 7 for this.
Remove the screw (8).
Pull out the battery plug-in unit.
Inspect battery fuse (9).

DANGER
Burning risk!
Injuries by hot parts.
➜ Watch out not to touch the resistors (6) when pulling out the
board. The resistors can get very hot.

5. Check the ballast fuse (5) on the input and output card. For this purpose,
remove the screws at the top and bottom and pull out the card.
Ballast fuse for servo drive and racking on the input and output card.

Ballast fuse for servo drive and racking on the input and output card.

6. Check fuses on the transformer at the rear of the machine.

Remove the cover for this.

396
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Check fuses Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly

Fuses on transformer at the rear of the machine

Fuses on transformer at the rear of the machine

F4 Friction feed wheel F18 Central lubrication

F8 Servos F20 Fluff absorption

7. Eliminate the cause.

8. Insert new fuse.

Use a replacement fuse from the accessories. Use only a fuse

with the same specifications.
Specifications of the fuse: see sticker (impression) or circuit
diagram. The circuit diagram can be found on the
documentation DVD, which has been delivered with this
machine.
Checking fuse (right control cabinet)

397
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly Check fuses

7.5.2 Checking fuse (right control cabinet)

Valid for:

Type

CMS 530 621

627

CMS 520 620

628

CMS 520 C 629

CMS 502 637

638

CMS ADF-3 681

DANGER
Life-threatening high voltage!
Electrical shock may cause death or serious injuries.
➜ Set the main switch to "0" and wait until the touch screen is
dark and an alarm signal sounds.

1. Set machine main switch to "0".

2. Wait until the touch screen is dark and an alarm signal sounds.
3. Check fuses (1) to (4) at the rear of the right control unit.
Fuses at the rear of the right control unit (for a better overview the fan was dismantled)

Fuses at the rear of the right control unit (for a better overview the fan was dismantled)

1 28 V (stop motions) (1A, slow- 3 Yarn control unit (1A, slow-blow)

blow)
2 STIXX (1A, slow-blow) 4 Battery charge (1A, slow-blow)

398
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Check fuses Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly

4. Check the battery fuse (7) on the control unit.

Battery fuse below the power supply unit

Battery fuse below the power supply unit

DANGER
Burning risk!
Injuries by hot parts.
➜ Watch out not to touch the resistors (6) when pulling out the
board. The resistors can get very hot.

5. Check the ballast fuse (5) on the right control unit . For this purpose,
remove the screws at the top and bottom and pull out the board.
Ballast fuse for servo drive and racking on the control unit

Ballast fuse for servo drive and racking on the control unit

399
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly Check fuses

6. Check fuses on the transformer at the rear of the machine.

Fuses on transformer at the rear of the machine

Fuses on transformer at the rear of the machine

F1-F3 Fabric Take-down F11- Power supply unit

F13
F4-F6 Friction feed wheel F18 Central lubrication
F8- Servos F20- Fluff absorption
F10 F22

7. Eliminate the cause.

8. Insert new fuse.

Use a replacement fuse from the accessories. Use only a fuse

with the same specifications.
Specifications of the fuse: see sticker (impression) or circuit
diagram. The circuit diagram can be found on the
documentation DVD, which has been delivered with this
machine.
Checking fuse (right and left control cabinet)

400
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Check fuses Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly

7.5.3 Checking fuse (right and left control cabinet)

Valid for:

CMS 530 T

CMS 730 S

CMS 730 T

CMS 822

CMS 830 C

CMS 830 S

CMS 933

DANGER
Life-threatening high voltage!
Electrical shock may cause death or serious injuries.
➜ Set the main switch to "0" and wait until the touch screen is
dark and an alarm signal sounds.

1. Set machine main switch to "0".

2. Wait until the touch screen is dark and an alarm signal sounds.
3. Check fuses (1) to (4) at the rear of the left control unit.
Fuses at rear of left control unit

Fuses at rear of left control unit

1 28 V (stop motions) (1A, slow- 3 Yarn control unit (1A, slow-blow)

blow)
2 STIXX (1A, slow-blow) 4 Battery charge (1A, slow-blow)

401
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly Check fuses

4. Check fuse (12) on the left control unit. For this purpose, pull out plug (13),
remove both screws (14) and pull out battery insert.
Battery fuse 12 below the power supply unit

Battery fuse (12) below the power supply unit

DANGER
Burning risk!
Injuries by hot parts.
➜ Watch out not to touch the resistors (6) when pulling out the
board. The resistors can get very hot.

5. Check fuse (5) on the right control unit. For this purpose, remove the
screws at the top and bottom and pull out the board.
Ballast fuse 5 for servo drive and racking on the control unit

Ballast fuse (5) for servo drive and racking on the control unit

402
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Needle selection displacement Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly

6. Check fuses on the transformer at the rear of the machine.

Fuses on transformer at the rear of the machine

Fuses on transformer at the rear of the machine

F1-F3 Fabric Take-down F16- CMS 933: Lighting

F17
F4-F6 Friction feed wheel F18 Central lubrication
F8- Servos F20- Fluff absorption
F10 F22
F11- Power supply unit
F13

7. Eliminate the cause.

8. Insert new fuse.

Use a replacement fuse from the accessories. Use only a fuse

with the same specifications.
Specifications of the fuse: see sticker (impression) or circuit
diagram. The circuit diagram can be found on the
documentation DVD, which has been delivered with this
machine.
Needle selection displacement

403
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly Needle selection displacement

7.6 Needle selection displacement

Condition:
 Operating system of the knitting machine: Operating system OKC V 2.5
(or higher).
With this test the interaction of the impulse sensor, the control unit and the
different selection systems is synchronized. This takes place with the help of
test series. With different reaction times it is checked whether the needles are
driven out to the "stitch" position for knitting or not. You have to check this in
both carriage directions. You enter these test results in a table. From these
test results the optimum reaction time is calculated.

Time required
Manually:
If you carry out the test series manually, you will need between
2 and 4 hours depending on the machine gauge.

Automatic:
The measuring system "JNA" (Setup-Needle-Selection) is
available at your agency or at Stoll. With this measuring system
the test series are carried out automatically. Time required: 30
- 60 minutes.

"JNA" measuring system

With the "JNA" measuring system you will get instructions on
how to carry out a needle selection displacement.
You do not need to carry out the section "Determine manually
the needle selection displacement" of this instructions.

The needle selection displacement is carried out with the following steps:
 Setting the impulse sensor type [405]
 Preparations [410]
 Reset reference values of impulse sensor, carry out carriage reference run
[411]
 Determining the needle selection displacement manually [412]

Documents for this purpose:

 Mounting instructions "Replace impulse sensor" (resources/pdf/
258255_01_bedan_gb--1498493067.pdf)
 Setting the impulse sensor type [405]
 Preparations [410]
 Reset reference values of impulse sensor, carry out carriage reference run
[411]
 Determining the needle selection displacement manually [412]

404
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Needle selection displacement Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly

7.6.1 Setting the impulse sensor type

Setting the impulse sensor type

This is only necessary with older OKC machines:

 OKC 2.0 machines (2005 until February 2009)
 OKC 3.0 (March 2009 until June 2010)
On newer machines (OKC 3.0, from July 2010 on), this is not necessary as
only the new impulse sensor type can be built-in. You may skip this section. It
continues on Page [410].

405
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly Needle selection displacement

Machines for which the impulse sensor type has to be set.

Type Component
type

OKC 3.0 CMS933 771 000

(March 2009 until June 773
2010)
CMS830 S 633 000

CMS830 C 631 000

CMS822 623 000

632 000

CMS740 630 000

CMS730 T 588 000

CMS730S 625 000

CMS530 T 587 000

CMS530 621 000 - 001

627 000

CMS520 C 629 000

CMS520 620 000

628 000

CMS502 626 000

406
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Needle selection displacement Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly

Type Component
type

OKC 2.0 CMS933 769 000 - 004

(2005 until February
2009) CMS922 770 000 - 004

CMS830 C 573 000 - 004

CMS822 574 000 - 005

CMS740 572 000 - 004

CMS730 T 586 000 - 004

CMS730 S 554 000 - 004

CMS530 T 585 000 - 004

CMS530 566 000 - 004

CMS520 C 570 000 - 004

CMS520 567 000 - 004

CMS420 E 579 000 - 004

Machines for which the impulse sensor type has to be set.

If you are not sure about the machine type, check the machine type plate.

The first column of numbers in the "Type" field indicates the machine type and
the second column of numbers indicates the component type. In the above
example, the machine in question is the "621" type, and the "000" component
type.

407
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly Needle selection displacement

Setting the impulse sensor You need to inform the control unit about the impulse sensor type you installed
type in the machine. It is possible to install two different impulse sensor types in
older OKC machines. You will find the ID in the spare parts delivery.

Impulse sensor ID
type

1 240 562 Impulse sensor of OKC machines until June 2010

2 260 396 Replacement for the previous impulse sensor (ID

240 562)
Keys for setting the machine parameters

Key Function

Continue on to the next window

Call up "Additional function keys"

Call up "Machine parameters 2" window

Confirm input

return to the "Machine parameters"

Keys for setting the machine parameters

408
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Needle selection displacement Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly

Carry out restart with machine configuration:

 The machine is switched off.
1. To switch on the machine, set the main switch to 1.
 The "BootOkc" window is displayed on the touch screen.
BootOkc window

"BootOkc" window

2. Touch the "Restart and Machine Configuration" key.

3. Tap repeatedly on the "Continue on to the next window" key until the
"Machine parameters" window is displayed. ("Language" -> "Machine
configuration" -> "Machine configuration 2" -> "Machine options" ->
"Machine parameters")
4. In the "Machine parameters" window tap on the "Additional function keys"
key.
5. Call up the "Machine parameters 2" window.

6. Select the impulse sensor type "2 - ID 260 396".

Select this setting also with mixed operation (old and new impulse sensor
type).
7. Confirm input.
8. Return to the "Machine parameters" window.
9. Advance till the Main menu appears.
Documents for this purpose:
 Mounting instructions "Replace impulse sensor" (resources/pdf/
258255_01_bedan_gb--1498493067.pdf)
 Preparations [410]

409
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly Needle selection displacement

7.6.2 Preparations
Preparations

 Stop the carriage after the left reversing position.

 With tandem machine: Couple carriage narrow.
 Cast-off the stitches on both needle beds.
 Remove the needle brushes on the front and rear carriage part.
 The test series is required for all the impulse sensors of the machine - with
a tandem machine there are four impulse sensors.
 For the check you need a small knitting program.
Example for a 3-system machine.

Line 30: Check of the front impulse sensor

Line 40: Check of the rear impulse sensor
If you have a 2-system machine simply leave out the indication "S3" for the
third knitting system in the lines 30 and 40.

Documents for this purpose:

 Mounting instructions "Replace impulse sensor" (resources/pdf/
258255_01_bedan_gb--1498493067.pdf)
Reset reference values of impulse sensor, carry out carriage reference run

410
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Needle selection displacement Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly

7.6.3 Reset reference values of impulse sensor, carry out

carriage reference run
Before determining the new values you have to delete the "old" values of the
impulse sensors.
Keys for deleting the reference values

Key Function

Call up the "Service" menu

Call up the "Basic settings" menu

Call up "Machine parameters" window

Call up "Additional function keys"

Call up "Machine parameters 2" window

Keys for deleting the reference values

1. Call up the "Service" menu from the "Main menu".

2. Call up "Basic Settings" menu.
3. Call up the "Machine parameters" window.
4. Call up "Additional function keys".
5. Call up the "Machine parameters 2" window.

6. Select all impulse sensors (activate control box). On a tandem machine

there are four impulse sensors.
7. Confirm input tapping on the (1) key.
8. You will be asked whether the values are to be deleted. Confirm this
message with "OK".
 The values are deleted.
9. Carry out carriage reference run.
Documents for this purpose:
 Mounting instructions "Replace impulse sensor" (resources/pdf/
258255_01_bedan_gb--1498493067.pdf)

411
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly Needle selection displacement

7.6.4 Determining the needle selection displacement

Determining the needle selection displacement manually

manually
Keys for determining the needle selection displacement

Key Function

Call up the "Service" menu

Call up the "Basic settings" menu

Call up the "Adjustment of needle selection" menu

Call up the "Automatic" menu

Call up the "Manually coarse" menu

Keys for determining the needle selection displacement

Determine the needle selection displacement:

1. Fix knitting row.
For checking the front impulse sensor enter "SPF30".
2. Engage the machine, stop the carriage in the right reversing point.
3. Call up the "Service" menu from the "Main menu".
4. Call up "Basic Settings" menu.
5. Call up the "Adjustment of needle selection" menu.
6. Call up the "Manually coarse" menu.

412
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Needle selection displacement Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly

7. Carry out the test series.

A Test for the front needle bed B Test for the rear needle bed
1 Reset 4 Enter the test result (carriage
Delete the test results for the direction: <<)
front needle bed.
2 Current line of the test series 5 Proceed to the next line
3 Enter the test result (carriage 6 Calculating the optimal reaction
direction: >>) time

Switch setting "1" – OK 7 Reset

Switch setting "0" – F (Error) Delete the test results for the rear
needle bed.

8. Tap the "Reset" (1) key.

The active line (2) of the test series is highlighted.
9. Engage the machine.
 The carriage moves very slowly from right to left (MSEC=0.15).
10. While the carriage is running you perform a visual inspection. Check
whether all the needles are driven out for knitting or not.
11. Stop the carriage in the left reversing point.
12. Enter the test result in the table.
If all the needles are driven out, you do not need to enter anything, as "OK"
is entered by default in the active line.
- or -
➜ If one or more needles are not driven out, set the switch (4) to
➜ "0". An "F" is entered in the table.
13. Engage the machine and check the needle selection in the other carriage
direction.
14. Stop the carriage in the reversing position and enter the test result with the
help of the switch (3).

If you are not sure that no error occurred, repeat the check for
both carriage directions.

413
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly Needle selection displacement

15. Resume the test series. Press the (5) key for this.
 The next line of the test series is selected automatically. Internally, the
reaction time is increased by "1".
16. Resume the test series until one error occurs in both carriage directions
(steps 9 to 15).
 Now you have reached the limit for the "positive" reaction time.
17. The second part of the test follows. Press the (5) key for this.
The test will be carried out automatically with "negative" reaction times.
18. Repeat the steps 9 to 15 until one incorrect selection occurs in both
carriage directions.
 The switches automatically get inactive (grey).
19. The test series for this impulse sensor is finished.
20. Calculating the reaction time.
Tap the (6) key for this. The optimum reaction time is calculated. This
takes about 10 seconds. When the calculation is finished a message
appears on the touch screen.
21. Repeat the test series for the rear impulse sensor.
For this fix the knitting row 40 - enter "SPF40".
Attention: With step 8 tap on the "Reset" (7) key. (If you tap on the (1) key,
the recently determined values are deleted.)
Repeat the steps 8 to 20.
22. With a tandem machine: switch the option in the "Right/left carriage" to the
other carriage. Repeat the steps 8 to 21.
 The determination of the needle selection displacement is finished.

If you accidentally tap the (5) key twice, one line of the test
series is skipped. The test series is not valid. You have to
execute again the entire test series (step 8).

Concluding activities  The data of the needle selection displacement is part of the machine
settings. It is automatically saved in the dongle data.
You can save this data additionally if necessary:
– on a USB memory stick
– note on the machine data sheet at the right control cabinet

Documents for this purpose:

 Mounting instructions "Replace impulse sensor" (resources/pdf/
258255_01_bedan_gb--1498493067.pdf)

414
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Entering the data of the needle selection displacement manually Assembling carriage

7.7 Entering the data of the needle selection

Entering the data of the needle selection displacement manually

displacement manually
Only for Stoll technicians or knitting technicians

If the data for the needle selection displacement got lost and there is no
Dongle data available, the data can be entered manually.
When delivering the knitting machine, the machine data was printed out and
put on the right control cabinet.
Machine data sheet at the right control cabinet

Machine data sheet at the right control cabinet

Keys for controlling the data for the needle selection displacement

Key Function

Call up the "Service" menu

Call up the "Basic settings" menu

Open the "Needle bed parameters" window

Call up "Additional function keys"

Open the "Needle bed parameters 2" window

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for controlling the data for the needle selection displacement

415
7 Repairing the knitting machine

Assembling carriage part and carriage assembly Entering the data of the needle

Controlling the data of the 1. Call up the "Service" menu from the "Main menu".
needle selection
2. Call up "Basic Settings" menu.
displacement
3. Open the "Needle bed parameters" window.
4. Call up the additional function keys in the "Needle bed parameters"
window.
5. Open the "Needle bed parameters 2" window.
6. Compare the displayed values with the values on the machine data sheet.
7. If the values are not identical to the data of the needle selection
displacement enter them manually (see next section).
8. Call up the "Main menu".
Entering the data of the
Keys for entering the data for the needle selection displacement

needle selection Key Function

displacement manually
Continue on to the next window

Call up "Additional function keys"

Open the "Needle bed parameters 2" window

Confirm input

return to the "Needle bed parameters" window

Keys for entering the data for the needle selection displacement

 The machine is switched off.

1. To switch on the machine, set the main switch to 1.
 The "BootOkc" window is displayed on the touch screen.
BootOkc window

"BootOkc" window

416
 Repairing the knitting machine 7

Entering the data of the needle selection displacement manually Assembling carriage

2. Touch the "Restart and Machine Configuration" key.

3. Tap repeatedly on the "Continue on to the next window" key until the
"Machine parameters" window is displayed. ("Language" -> "Machine
configuration" -> "Machine configuration 2" -> "Machine options" ->
"Machine parameters" -> "Needle bed parameters")
4. In the "Needle bed parameters" window tap on the "Additional function
keys" key.
5. Open the "Needle bed parameters 2" window.

NOTICE
If you enter wrong values it will lead to a faulty selection of the
needles.

6. Enter the values of the machine data sheet in the "Needle bed parameters
2" window.
7. Confirm entries.
8. Return to the "Needle bed parameters" window.
9. Advance till the Main menu appears.
10. Save the change in the machine adjustments on the USB memory stick.

Further information:
 Saving all machine data on the USB-Memory-Stick [432]

417
8 Software - Installation and basic settings

Boot process

8 Software - Installation and basic

Software - Installation and basic settings

settings
In this chapter the description of how can one install and set the Stoll operating
system is given.
It is important thereby that one gets to know the boot process (the booting of
software and the activation of control) on the knitting machine.
One has to engage in this boot process during installation and setting of the
Stoll operating system.
Thereby call up various windows e.g. the "Basic Settings Menu" window.
For the setting of the Stoll operating system more windows are open in which
the changes can be made.
If your knitting machines are interconnected or are connected with a pattern
unit, you can configure the on-line connection.

Save the machine data against any data losses before every
installation of Stoll operating system or before any changes in
the configuration.

This chapter contains information on:

 Boot process [419]
 Saving all machine data on the USB-Memory-Stick [432]
 Saving pattern after a big fault [434]
 Installing the Stoll operating system [436]
 Diagnose Control [460]
Boot process

418
 Software - Installation and basic settings 8

Boot process

8.1 Boot process

The following figure shows a schematic representation of the boot process of
the knitting machine (with control OKC).
Schematic representation of the boot process

Schematic representation of the boot process

419
8 Software - Installation and basic settings

Boot process

Description of the boot After switching on knitting machine (main switch 1) windows XP gets started.
process The opening screen is displayed on the touch screen.
Thereafter the individual control components start their boot programs i. e. the
different drivers and the applications of the System Control Unit (SCU) are
loaded.
During this time, the following window is displayed on the touch screen:
Start the System Control Unit (SCU)

Start the System Control Unit (SCU)

If this process is closed, then the "BootOkc" window is displayed.

BootOkc window

"BootOkc" window

1 Symbol and status bar show the connection status.

2 Keys for carrying out definite actions.
3 Activity and progress display show the present progress of the boot process.
4 Lists that number the status and error messages and show the date and time.
Further debug information can be connected to, if needed. This information is
also saved in a log file and can be copied with Copy Logfiles, if needed.
5 Keys for setting the touch screen.

420
 Software - Installation and basic settings 8

Boot process

First of all, only the keys "Installation", "Installation and Configuration" and
"Basic Settings" are released. As soon as the connection to control is made,
more keys are released based on the control information.
If a warm start is possible, then this is automatically carried out after a waiting
time that can be set (basic setting: 30 seconds).
Thereafter, the main menu and the last opened window are displayed.
Main menu

Main menu

The knitting machine is now ready to knit.

421
8 Software - Installation and basic settings

Boot process

Interrupt warm start The warm start of the knitting machine can be interrupted. This happens by
tapping the keys in the "BootOkc" window.
Possibilities for interrupting a warm start

Key Meaning

Start the installation process of a Stoll

operating system. The storage location of
the Stoll operating system can be selected
in the "Basic Settings" window.

Starts the installation process of a Stoll

operating system including configuration of
the machine. The storage location of the
Stoll operating system can be selected in
the "Basic Settings" window.

Starts the software anew (Reboot).

Starts the software anew (Reboot) with

configuration of the machine inclusive.

Carries out a manual warm start.

Calls up the "Basic Settings Menu" window.

Set the screen brightness infinite.

Set screen brightness one step darker.

Set the screen one step brighter.

Calibrate touch screen.

Possibilities for interrupting a warm start

Further information:
 Setting touch screen [65]
Basic Settings

422
 Software - Installation and basic settings 8

Boot process

8.1.1 Basic Settings

Call up "Basic Settings Menu" window:
 The knitting machine is switched off.
1. Set the main switch to "1".
 The "BootOkc" window is displayed.
2. Type in within the waiting time for the warm start on the "Basic Settings"
key.
 The "Basic Settings Menu" window is displayed.
Basic Settings Menu window

"Basic Settings Menu" window

Areas of the Basic Settings Menu window

Area Explanation

Boot Source Keys for selecting a source for the installation data.

Delay Time for automatic Enter the waiting time till the automatic warm start.
Warmstart

Service Activities Keys for service purposes.

Areas of the "Basic Settings Menu" window

Selecting the source of the installation data (Boot Source)

423
8 Software - Installation and basic settings

Boot process

Selecting the source of the In the "Boot Source" area of the "Basic Settings Menu" window ascertain the
installation data (Boot source from where the installation of the Stoll operating system is done.
Selection of the source in Basic Settings Menu window

Source)

Selection of the source in "Basic Settings Menu" window

Keys in the Boot Source area of the Basic Settings Menu window

Key Explanation

Current Version (HD) Renewed installation of the existing version.

New Version (HD) Installation of a new version.

Previous Version (HD) Installation of the previous version.

Network Installation of a version from a network drive.

USB Device Installation of a version from a device which is

connected to the USB socket.

User Defined Path Installation of a version from a user-defined storage

location.

Change Path Key for selection of a storage location.

Keys in the "Boot Source" area of the "Basic Settings Menu" window
Setting waiting time until warm start

Setting waiting time until In this area of the "Basic Settings Menu" window, the waiting time that is spent
warm start in between the display of the "BootOkc" window, and the automatic warm start
(display of the main menu) is entered.
Waiting time for warm start in the Basic Settings Menu window

Waiting time for warm start in the " Basic Settings Menu" window

The waiting time can be interrupted at anytime by pressing any

key in the "Basic Settings" window.

Set waiting time:

1. Pull the slide to the desired position.
 The waiting time is displayed in the input field.
2. Confirm input.

424
 Software - Installation and basic settings 8

Boot process

Configure machine

Configure machine Defined by the concept of control OKC some basic information about the
machine should be known right from the start. Enter this information in the
"Machine Configuration" window.
➜ Tap on the "Machine configuration" key.
 The "Machine Configuration" window is displayed.
Machine Configuration window

"Machine Configuration" window

Components of the Machine Configuration window

Label Description

Machine Classification Enter the machine classification.

Component Type Enter the component type.

Controller Characteristic Name of the control unit (only display)

Date Entry of the date

Time Entry of the time

Time Zone Entry of the time zone

Autoadjust clock for Automatically switch the clock to summer- or

daylight saving wintertime.

Motor Types Select which motor (different motors with different

ID) is installed in the machine. (Might be necessary
after replacing a motor)

Components of the "Machine Configuration" window

Entering the machine classification and the component type:

1. In the "Machine Classification" list field, select the machine classification.
2. In the "Component Type" list field, select the component type.
 In the "Controller Characteristic" field, the controller type is displayed.
3. Confirm input.

425
8 Software - Installation and basic settings

Boot process

Enter the date, time and time zone:

1. In the "Date" list field, enter current date.
2. In the "Time" list field, enter current time.
3. In the "Time Zone" list field, select the time zone.
4. Confirm input.
Configuring network

Configuring network If you wish to connect the knitting machine with another knitting machine or a
pattern unit, you must set up and switch on the network on the knitting
machine. The "Network Configuration" window is used for it.
➜ Tap on the "Configure Network" key.
 The "Network Configuration" window is displayed.
Network Configuration window

"Network Configuration" window

In this window all the necessary network parameters are entered. The values
are entered with the internal keyboard (virtual keyboard) or with an external
keyboard.

426
 Software - Installation and basic settings 8

Boot process

Components of the Network Configuration window

Label Description

Computer Name The input of a (machine) name is necessary in order to

enable the other network users an access to this
machine. This machine is identified with this name in the
network. Enter descriptions of this machine in the
"Description" field.

Workgroup All knitting machines should be located in the same

"Workgroup" so that the machines can communicate
with each other. This input field must be filled up. Ask for
your corresponding Work group name from your
Network administrator in case of a network spanning
your firm/LAN.

Description Although entering a description is optional, it does help

to identify machines more efficiently in larger networks.
e.g. Type of the machine, gauge and other special
features of the machine. This input appears as a
comment in the Windows Explorer.

My Network Here are listed the computers that have been defined in
"My Network" field, see KnitLAN connection [269].

If you wish to supplement the lists manually, take note

of the spelling when multiple computers are used:
\\computer name;\\computer name;\\computer name
As a separator between the individual computers the
semicolon (";") must be used.

User Name This user must be familiar with his password in the
network so that the shared drives and folders can be
Password used.
Your Network administrator will create a user name and
a password for you so that you can access the network
resources.

E-Mail Input an e-mail address (Configure). The messages of

the control unit are sent to this address, when the
"Enable" check box is activated.

IP Address Each machine (computer) should have a unique IP

address within a network. The network protocol TCP/IP
communicates with the individual machines by this IP
address. The division of the network is done in the so-
called network classes. An individual Network-address
is assigned to each machine automatically by the
program and it is displayed here.

Subnet Mask This field is automatically filled up by the program with a

value for the shared network Class B.

427
8 Software - Installation and basic settings

Boot process

Label Description

Use DHCP The DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)

enables with the help of a corresponding server the
dynamic allocation of an IP address and the further
configuration parameters to the computers (machines)
in a network.

MAC Address Media Access Control Address.

Name Name of the network board.

Use DNS Domain Name Services via a DNS Server.

Enter the name of the IP address of the server, if
necessary.

Use WINS Windows Internet Name Services.

Enter the name of the IP address of the server, if
necessary.

Gateway A Gateway enables the connection between the shared

networks.
Enter the IP-Address of the active component, if
necessary.

Components of the "Network Configuration" window

Settings in the "Network Configuration" window, especially the

settings for External LAN, are to be done by a Network
Administrator. The settings for Internal LAN serve developers
purposes only and may not be altered.
The Ethernet IP addresses 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.0.255 are
reserved for Stoll knitting machines and may not be used in the
company network.
The reason for this: The cards 963 (IPC) and 966 (Power CPU)
in the knitting machine use these IP addresses to communicate
with each other. But if both these addresses are used in the
company network, the cards cannot work correctly with each
other anymore and the machine does not function any longer.

Display/hide screen ➜ In order to keep the virtual keyboard constantly open, activate the check
keyboard box before "Use Touch Screen Keyboard".
 By clicking on an input field the virtual keyboard opens.
- or -
➜ In order to close the virtual keyboard deactivate the check box before "Use
Touch Screen Keyboard".
Enter the machine name 1. Touch the "Computer Name" entry field.
(Computer-Name)
 The virtual keyboard is displayed.
2. Tap into the "Computer Name" by any desired name (5-15 characters) for
the respective knitting machine.
- or -
➜ Maintain the standard setting.

428
 Software - Installation and basic settings 8

Boot process

Enter the user name and the

Your Network administrator must create a user name and a
password
password before you can access the network resources.

1. In the "User Name" input field, tap the user name (5-15 characters).
2. In the "Password" input field, tap the corresponding password (5-15
characters).
 A * (asterisk) appears for each character you enter.
Enter Workgroup ➜ In the "Workgroup" input field, tap the name of the work group and the
machine group for this machine (5-15 characters).
- or -
➜ Maintain the standard setting.
Enter the description of the ➜ Enter a meaningful description of this machine (maximum 50 characters)
machine (Description) in the "Description" input field.
Enter E-Mail-Address 1. Activate the "Enable" check box.
2. Tap on the "Configure" key.
 The "E-Mail Configuration" window is displayed.

3. Select the cases in the field Events by the appearance of which the e-mail
should be sent.
4. Enter the e-mail address in the "E-Mail address" field
5. Confirm input.

Further information:
 KnitLAN connection [269]
Advanced adjustments

Advanced adjustments For the Stoll technician only

429
8 Software - Installation and basic settings

Boot process

Load the machine settings in The machine settings do not only contain the machine data, but also the
the machine computer machine options, the machine configuration, the report, the network settings,
and other internal control information. This data is referred as Dongle. Dongle-
Data are saved in a file with the mcnumber.dgl (mcnumber = machine number)
name.
 A file with dongle data is available.
1. Tap the "Load Dongle" key.
 A selection window for opening a file is displayed.
2. Select Dongle-file (mcnumber.dgl).

The current machine settings will be overwritten!

When you copy the machine settings to the hard disk, the
current machine settings are overwritten.
Only carry out the following steps if you want to replace the
current machine settings with the settings saved on the file.

3. Confirm input.
4. When the network settings are available, the question appears whether
these should be read also. If you answer this question with "Yes" the
network settings are loaded and a Reboot is automatically run.
 The machine settings are copied to the machine. After the copying is
complete, a message appears.
Saving dongle data

Saving dongle data The machine settings do not only contain the machine data, but also the
machine options, the machine configuration, the report, the network settings,
and other internal control information. This data is referred as Dongle. Dongle-
Data are saved in a file with the mcnumber.dgl (mcnumber = machine number)
name. It is important to back up the data, e.g. when the hard disk is replaced.
1. Tap on the key "Save Dongle".
 A selection window for saving a file is displayed.
2. Select the saving location.
3. Confirm input.
 The machine settings are copied on the target medium (file name:
mcnumber.dgl).
Error diagnostics with Copy Logfiles

Error diagnostics with Copy If the machine computer has serious problems, e.g. it does not react to any
Logfiles inputs or the program crashes any longer, the cause is very important for Stoll.
The computer saves the data up to the fault internally in so-called Logfiles. For
an exact error diagnosis, we want to ask you to save these files and to send
them to the Stoll-Helpline.
1. Tap on the key "Copy Logfiles".
 A selection window for saving a file is displayed.
2. Select the saving location.
3. Confirm input.
 The log files are zipped, and saved on the target medium (file
name:Log_date_time_mcnr.zip).

430
 Software - Installation and basic settings 8

Boot process

Restore the last version of 1. Tap on the key "Restore Last Version".
Restore the last version of the Stoll operating system

the Stoll operating system  A dialog window for confirming the restoration appears.

The current operating system version will be overwritten!

When you restore the saved operating system version, the
current operating system version is overwritten.
Only carry out the following steps if you want to replace the
current operating system by the previous version.

2. Confirm message.
 The "BootOkc" window is displayed. The source (Boot Source)
"Previous Version (HD)" is automatically set.
3. When the Stoll operating system is to be installed without the final
configuration tap on the key "Installation".
- or -
➜ When the Stoll operating system is to be installed with the final
configuration, tap on the key "Installation and Configuration".
 The Stoll operating system gets installed.
Displaying current software version

Displaying current software For diagnostics purposes it is important to know which software is installed on
version the computer. In the "Info" window, the version numbers of the currently
installed Stoll operating system are displayed. In the case of error messages,
these version numbers should also be provided to Stoll-Helpline, if possible.
➜ Tap on the key "Show Current Version".
 The "Info" window is displayed. Here the current version numbers of the
Stoll operating system are displayed.

With Copy Logfiles this data is automatically saved with the file
Log_date_time_mcnr.zip.
Displaying the history of the software versions

Displaying the history of the For diagnostics purposes it is important to know which software is installed on
software versions the computer. In the "Version Info" window, the current versions and all
previously installed software programs are logged. In the case of error
messages, these version numbers should also be provided to Stoll-Helpline, if
possible.
➜ Tap on the key "Show Version History".
 The "Version Info" window is displayed. Here the current version numbers
and all the software installations of Stoll operating system executed so far
are displayed.

With Copy Logfiles this data is automatically saved with the file
Log_date_time_mcnr.zip.

431
8 Software - Installation and basic settings

Saving all machine data on the USB-Memory-Stick

8.2 Saving all machine data on the USB-

Saving all machine data on the USB-Memory-Stick

Memory-Stick
The machine settings do not only contain the machine data, but also the
machine options, the machine configuration, the report, the network settings,
and other internal control information. This data is referred as Dongle. Dongle-
Data are saved in a file with the mcnumber.dgl (mcnumber = machine number)
name.
The Machine data can be copied on a USB-Memory-Stick. After installing a
new operating system version or following data loss or the change of the hard
disk the machine data can be copied back from the USB Memory-Stick to the
machine computer.
Keys for saving the machine data on a USB-Memory-Stick

Key Function

Call up the "Service" menu

Call up "Copy service data" window

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for saving the machine data on a USB-Memory-Stick

1. Insert the USB memory stick into the USB socket.

2. Call up the "Service" menu from the "Main menu".
3. Call up the "Copy service data" window.
Copy service data window

"Copy service data" window

4. Select the desired data carrier e.g. . USB memory stick (Drive F:).
5. Tap on the "Copy Dongle" key.
 The entire machine data are saved under the mcnumber.dgl on the
USB-Memory-Stick (mcnumber = machine number) file name.

432
 Software - Installation and basic settings 8

Saving pattern after a big fault

6. Call up "Main menu".

7. Take out the USB-Memory-Stick.

Loading of the machine settings with the "Load Dongle" key in

the "Basic Settings" window.

Further information:
 Copying service data [182]
 Load the machine settings in the machine computer [430]
Saving pattern after a big fault

433
8 Software - Installation and basic settings

Saving pattern after a big fault

8.3 Saving pattern after a big fault

No "Warm start" can be made after a big fault of the control (e.g. system
crash). You have to carry out a "Restart". You will be asked whether the
logfiles and the pattern which has been loaded recently are to be saved.

If you do not want to save the logfiles and the pattern, then tap on the "NO"
key. The "Restart " is carried out. Load the new knitting program.

Save pattern:
1. If you want to save the logfiles and the pattern, then tap on the "YES" key.
2. You will be asked where the logfiles and the pattern which has been
loaded recently are to be saved. We recommend to save the pattern on a
USB-Memory-Stick or network drive.

3. Confirm the path specification.

4. The selected files will be saved under a new name.
Saved_pattern.sin (.jac, .set, .setx, .seq)
with a sequence: Saved_pattern1.sin, Saved_pattern2.sin, etc.

434
 Software - Installation and basic settings 8

Installing the Stoll operating system

5. Once the data are saved, a message is displayed. Confirm this message
with "OK"

6. Carry out the "Restart".

7. Rename files. You cannot carry out this on the knitting machine. For this
purpose go to the M1plus or a PC.
8. In order to be able to load the pattern into the machine, you have to add
the machine type to the pattern name. For example for a CMS 530:
CMS530.Saved_pattern.sin
9. Rename all the .sin and .set files, do not rename the .jac file.
10. For Setup2: Compress the files (zip), the name of the zip file has to be
identical to the name of the .sin file.
11. Loading the files into the knitting machine.
Installing the Stoll operating system

435
8 Software - Installation and basic settings

Installing the Stoll operating system

8.4 Installing the Stoll operating system

The Stoll operating system can be installed in two ways:
 Direct Installation:
After switching on the main switch, the "BootOkc" window gets displayed.
Type in within the waiting time for the warm start on the "Basic Settings"
key, and select the memory location of the new Stoll operating system in
the "Basic Settings Menu" window. Go back to the "BootOkc" window, and
type on the "Installation" key or "Installation and Configuration". The
installation process is triggered.
When you tap on the "Installation" key, the installation is run through till the
"Reference run" window.
When you tap on the "Installation and Configuration" key, the machine can
be configured afresh for stopping the installation.
 Indirect Installation:
During the production the new Stoll operating system is copied on the hard
disk. You use the "Updating software" window for this purpose.
When the machine is switched on again the software can determine that a
new Stoll operating system is available for installation. You will be asked
in one window whether you want to install the new Stoll operating system
and whether you wish to configure the machine anew simultaneously. If
you acknowledge this process with "Yes" the installation process gets
started with or without configuration.
In the next sections the different types of installations will be discussed at
length.
 Direct installation [437]
 Indirect installation [443]
 Updating software [449]
 Carrying out a restart (Restart) [453]
 Carrying out restart with machine configuration (Restart and
Configuration) [454]
 Setting online connection [456]
 Overview of all system data [458]
 Direct installation [437]
 Indirect installation [443]
 Updating software [449]
 Carrying out a restart (Restart) [453]
 Carrying out restart with machine configuration (Restart and
Configuration) [454]
 Setting online connection [456]
 Overview of all system data [458]

436
 Software - Installation and basic settings 8

Installing the Stoll operating system

8.4.1 Direct installation

Direct installation

For the Direct Installation the installation process is started directly in the
"BootOkc" window.
Overview:
 Start the installation process by switching on the machine. In the
"BootOkc" window, tap on the "Basic Settings" key to select memory
location in which the installation data is available (Boot Source).
 In the "BootOkc" window, start the installation with the "Installation and
Configuration" or "Installation" keys.
 Configure the machine after having selected the "Installation and
Configuration" key or start a reference run after having selected the
"Installation" key.

Select the "Installation and Configuration" key, if along with the

installation of the new Stoll operating system the machine
parameters are also to be altered.
Select the "Installation" key, if the machine parameters are not
to be altered. This shortens the installation process.

The current operating system version will be overwritten!

When you install a new Stoll operating system version the
current one is overwritten.
Carry out the following steps only if you want to replace the
current operating system by the previous version.
Save the machine data and the files specifically the ones you
have created before the installation process.

Select Boot Source  The machine is switched off.

1. Set the main switch to 1.
 The "BootOkc" window is displayed on the touch screen.
BootOkc window

"BootOkc" window

437
8 Software - Installation and basic settings

Installing the Stoll operating system

2. For the automatic warm start, tap on the "Basic Settings" key within the
waiting time.
 The "Basic Settings Menu" window is displayed.
3. Select a source for the installation data in the "Boot Source" section.
4. Confirm input.
 The "BootOkc" window is displayed.
5. Continue with the next section.
Start installation 1. When you want to execute the installation with the final configuration, tap
in the "BootOkc" window on the "Installation and Configuration" key.
- or -
➜ When you want to execute the installation without the final configuration,
tap in the "BootOkc" window on the "Installation" key.
 In the "User Message" window (INSTALLATION STARTED!) the path
to the installation data is displayed.
User Message window (INSTALLATION STARTED!)

"User Message" window (INSTALLATION STARTED!)

2. If only the files that have got altered are to be installed anew during the
installation deactivate the "FORCE INSTALLATION" check box (expedites
the installation process).

When you take up an installation in order to repair your

operating system, activate the "FORCE INSTALLATION"
check box so that the damaged files do not get overwritten
subsequently.

438
 Software - Installation and basic settings 8

Installing the Stoll operating system

3. To confirm the Installation press on the "YES" key.

 In the "User Message" window (CAUTION!), the version number of the
Stoll operating system version selected earlier gets displayed.
User Message window (CAUTION!)

"User Message" window (CAUTION!)

The current operating system version will be overwritten!

When you install a new Stoll operating system version the
current one is overwritten.
Carry out the following step only if you want to replace the
current operating system by the previous version.

4. To confirm the installation, tap on the "YES" key.

 When the installation file of the Stoll operating system has several
languages, the "Install Languages" window is open.
Install Languages window

"Install Languages" window

439
8 Software - Installation and basic settings

Installing the Stoll operating system

Keys for language selection

Key Function

End selection process without saving modifications

Confirm selection

Key "All languages"

Key "No language"

Keys for language selection

5. Select the desired language(s).

If you want to have all languages available simultaneously, tap

the "All languages" key.
If you only want
to carry on working in German, end selection process.

6. Confirm selection.
 The installation process gets started.
The "Language" window is displayed after having selected the "Installation
and Configuration" key.
- or -
The "Reference runs " window is displayed after having selected the
"Installation" key.
7. If the "Language" window is displayed, continue with the Machine
configuration section.
- or -
➜ If the "Reference runs" window is displayed, continue with the section
➜ Start reference runs.

440
 Software - Installation and basic settings 8

Installing the Stoll operating system

Configure Machine  The "Language" window is displayed.

1. Select the dialog language and confirm the selection.
2. Proceed to the next window.
 The "Machine configuration" window is displayed. The data have been
set at the factory and will not be changed.
3. Proceed to the next window.
 The "Machine configuration 2" window is displayed. The data have
been set at the factory and will not be changed.
4. Proceed to the next window.
 The "Machine Options" window is displayed. The data is set at the
factory.

Machine fault!
The presence or lack of machine options must correctly be
specified, as otherwise a fault may occur on the machine.
Always specify the machine options correctly.

5. If necessary, change the data and confirm the changes.

6. Proceed to the next window.
 The "Machine Parameter" window is displayed. The data is set at the
factory.
7. If necessary, change the data and confirm the changes.
8. Proceed to the next window.
 The "Needle bed parameters" window is displayed. The data is set at
the factory.
9. If necessary, change the data and confirm the changes.
10. Proceed to the next window.
 The "NPK-Values" window is displayed. The data is set at the factory.
11. If other NPK values are to be used, change the values and confirm the
changes.
12. Proceed to the next window.
 The "Knit Report Configuration" window is displayed.
13. If other settings are to be used, change the settings and confirm the
changes. Use the "additional function keys" to activate/deactivate the
running time control and/or running time measurement.
14. Proceed to the next window.
 The configuration is complete.
The "Reference runs" window is displayed.
15. Continue with the next section.

441
8 Software - Installation and basic settings

Installing the Stoll operating system

Start reference runs  The "Reference runs" window is displayed.

1. If the racking device is not in the home position, cast-off the stitches of a
needle bed.
2. Carry out reference run(s).
3. Proceed to the next window.
 The installation process is complete and the "Main menu" is displayed.

Further information:
 Selecting the source of the installation data (Boot Source) [424]
 Setting waiting time until warm start [424]
 Configure machine [425]
 Configuring network [426]
 Load the machine settings in the machine computer [430]
 Saving dongle data [430]
Indirect installation

442
 Software - Installation and basic settings 8

Installing the Stoll operating system

8.4.2 Indirect installation

In the case of Indirect Installation the new Stoll operating system is
immediately transmitted on the hard disk of the knitting machine ("Software
update" window).
Overview:
 Start the installation process by switching on the machine. A message
prompt displays that a new Stoll operating system is available for
installation.
You have to make a decision here whether you wish to install the new Stoll
operating system or wish to continue with the old one.
 Determine with the "Installation without configuration" check box whether
the new Stoll operating system should be installed with simultaneous
configuration of the machine parameter.
 Configure the machine if you have deactivated the "Installation without
configuration" check box or carry out a reference run if you have activated
the "Installation without configuration" check box.

Deactivate the "Installation without configuration" check box, if

the machine parameters are also to be altered simultaneously
with the installation of the new Stoll operating system.
Activate the "Installation without configuration" check box, if
you do not want to alter any machine parameters. This
shortens the installation process.

The current operating system version will be overwritten!

When you install a new Stoll operating system version the
current one is overwritten.
Carry out the following steps only if you want to replace the
current operating system by the previous version.
Save the machine data and the files specifically the ones you
have created before the installation process.

Start installation  The Stoll operating system was updated.

 The machine is switched off.
1. Set the main switch to 1.
 The "BootOkc" window is displayed with the following message on the
touch screen:
User Message window (START UPDATE NOW?)

"User Message" window (START UPDATE NOW?)

443
8 Software - Installation and basic settings

Installing the Stoll operating system

2. Deactivate the "Installation without configuration" check box, if the

machine parameters are also to be altered simultaneously with the
installation of the new Stoll operating system.
- or -
➜ Activate the "Installation without configuration" check box, if you do not
want to alter any machine parameters.
3. To start installation process tap on "YES".
 In the "User Message" window (INSTALLATION STARTED!) the path
to the installation data is displayed.

To proceed with the old Stoll operating system, tap on "NO".

User Message window (INSTALLATION STARTED!)

"User Message" window (INSTALLATION STARTED!)

4. If only the files that have got altered are to be installed anew during the
installation deactivate the "FORCE INSTALLATION" check box (expedites
the installation process).

When you take up an installation in order to repair your

operating system, activate the "FORCE INSTALLATION"
check box so that the damaged files do not get overwritten
subsequently.

444
 Software - Installation and basic settings 8

Installing the Stoll operating system

5. To confirm the Installation press on the "YES" key.

 In the "User Message" window (CAUTION!), the version number of the
Stoll operating system version selected earlier gets displayed.
User Message window (CAUTION!)

"User Message" window (CAUTION!)

The current operating system version will be overwritten!

When you install a new Stoll operating system version the
current one is overwritten.
Carry out the following step only if you want to replace the
current operating system by the previous version.

6. To confirm the installation, tap on the "YES" key.

 When the installation file of the Stoll operating system has several
languages, the "Install Languages" window is open.
Install Languages window

"Install Languages" window

445
8 Software - Installation and basic settings

Installing the Stoll operating system

Keys for language selection

Key Function

End selection process without saving modifications

Confirm selection

Key "All languages"

Key "No language"

Keys for language selection

7. Select the desired language(s).

If you want to have all languages available simultaneously, tap

the "All languages" key.
If you only want
to carry on working in German, end selection process.

8. Confirm selection.
 The installation process gets started.
The "Language" window is displayed after having selected the "Installation
without configuration" check box.
- or -
The "Reference runs" window is displayed after having selected the
"Installation without configuration" check box.
9. If the "Language" window is displayed, continue with the Machine
configuration section.
- or -
➜ If the "Reference runs" window is displayed, continue with the section
➜ Start reference runs.

446
 Software - Installation and basic settings 8

Installing the Stoll operating system

Configure Machine  The "Language" window is displayed.

1. Select the dialog language and confirm the selection.
2. Proceed to the next window.
 The "Machine configuration" window is displayed. The data have been
set at the factory and will not be changed.
3. Proceed to the next window.
 The "Machine configuration 2" window is displayed. The data have
been set at the factory and will not be changed.
4. Proceed to the next window.
 The "Machine Options" window is displayed. The data is set at the
factory.

Machine fault!
The presence or lack of machine options must correctly be
specified, as otherwise a fault may occur on the machine.
Always specify the machine options correctly.

5. If necessary, change the data and confirm the changes.

6. Proceed to the next window.
 The "Machine Parameter" window is displayed. The data is set at the
factory.
7. If necessary, change the data and confirm the changes.
8. Proceed to the next window.
 The "Needle bed parameters" window is displayed. The data is set at
the factory.
9. If necessary, change the data and confirm the changes.
10. Proceed to the next window.
 The "NPK-Values" window is displayed. The data is set at the factory.
11. If other NPK values are to be used, change the values and confirm the
changes.
12. Proceed to the next window.
 The "Knit Report Configuration" window is displayed.
13. If other settings are to be used, change the settings and confirm the
changes. Use the "additional function keys" to activate/deactivate the
running time control and/or running time measurement.
14. Proceed to the next window.
 The configuration is complete.
The "Reference runs" window is displayed.
15. Continue with the next section.

447
8 Software - Installation and basic settings

Installing the Stoll operating system

Start reference runs  The "Reference runs" window is displayed.

1. If the racking device is not in the home position, cast-off the stitches of a
needle bed.
2. Carry out reference run(s).
3. Proceed to the next window.
 The installation process is complete and the "Main menu" is displayed.

Further information:
 Configure machine [425]
 Configuring network [426]
 Load the machine settings in the machine computer [430]
 Saving dongle data [430]
 Updating software [449]
Updating software

448
 Software - Installation and basic settings 8

Installing the Stoll operating system

8.4.3 Updating software

A new Stoll operating system can also be copied on the hard disk while the
machine is producing. No data is overwritten here; the operating system is
loaded into a separate memory area.
This saves a few minutes time, as copying occurs during production. The
updating is not carried out until later, i.e. when the machine is switched off and
on again at the main switch. A prompt appears, asking you whether the new
operating system shall be loaded.
 If the question is answered with YES, then the new Stoll operating system
is installed.
 If it is answered with NO, then this question is asked again the next time
you switch on whether the new Stoll operating system should be installed.
For the software update the source from where the new Stoll operating system
should be copied can be selected.
Keys for updating the software

Key Function

Call up the "Service" menu

Call up the "Software updating" window

Key "Select source folder"

Key "Carry out update"

Key "Update display"

Save changes and end setting process

End setting process without saving changes

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for updating the software

449
8 Software - Installation and basic settings

Installing the Stoll operating system

Updating software 1. Call up the "Service" menu from the "Main menu".
2. Call up "Software updating" window.
Software updating window

"Software updating" window

3. Select source folder.

 If multiple Stoll operating systems are found on the data carrier, these
are listed.

When searching for the Stoll operating system the selected

folder section and a section under this section (sub-folder
section) is also searched.

4. If several Stoll operating systems are listed, the Stoll operating system
(Type OS) that is to be copied should be marked.
5. Press the "Carry out update" key.
 The installation files are copied on the hard disk of the machine in a
separate storage location.
The "Update successfully installed" appears.

450
 Software - Installation and basic settings 8

Installing the Stoll operating system

When the Stoll operating system is copied, two more program points are
displayed in the "Software update" window.
Software updating expanded window

"Software updating" expanded window

Other functions in the Software update window

Key Function

1 The data of the separate memory area are deleted.

2 You can choose if the installation should be carried out automatically or

manually when switching on machine again

ON After a waiting time of 10 seconds the installation is automatically

carried out till the "Reference runs" window (like in the case of
"Installation"). Within the waiting time the installation can be
cancelled by tapping on "Cancel".

Select this setting if only the operating system should be updated.

OFF Installation like in the case of "Installation and Configuration".

Select this setting if machine data have been modified. For

example after a gauge conversion or if a special equipment has
been assembled.

Other functions in the "Software update" window

Reset update:
➜ Tap on the key "Reset update" (1).
 The data is deleted in a separate storage location on the hard disk of the
machine.

Select type of installation:

1. If the new Stoll operating system is to be installed after a waiting time of
10 seconds automatically, set the switch "Automatic Installation" (2) to On.
- or -
➜ If the new Stoll operating system is to be installed manually, set the switch
"Automatic Installation"
➜ (2) to
➜ off.

451
8 Software - Installation and basic settings

Installing the Stoll operating system

More data on a network drive In addition to the operating system, other data can be present on the network
or USB-Memory-Stick drive and the USB Memory Stick. Which data is available can be displayed by
activating the key "Carry out updating".
Selection of individual installation types

Type Meaning

OS Operating system (OS)

IMG Hard disk image

HDA HD Analyst

UPT Update of Windows XP Embedded (OPTION)

REP Update of repair image

Selection of individual installation types

Further information:
 Indirect installation [443]
Carrying out a restart (Restart)

452
 Software - Installation and basic settings 8

Installing the Stoll operating system

8.4.4 Carrying out a restart (Restart)

A restart is carried out when the software no longer reacts to inputs following
an error.

Carry out a restart:

1. Set machine main switch to 0.
 The switch-off process takes approx. 60 seconds. When the process
is complete, the touch screen becomes dark and a signal sounds.
2. Set the main switch to 1.
 The "BootOkc" window is displayed on the touch screen.
BootOkc window

"BootOkc" window

3. For the automatic warm start within the waiting time tap on the key
"Restart".
 The machine is configured.
Finally the window "Reference runs " is displayed.
4. Carry out reference run(s).
5. Proceed to the next window.
 The restart is complete and the "Main menu" is displayed.
The machine is ready to knit.

Further information:
 Setting touch screen [65]
 Setting waiting time until warm start [424]

453
8 Software - Installation and basic settings

Installing the Stoll operating system

8.4.5 Carrying out restart with machine configuration (Restart

Carrying out restart with machine configuration (Restart and Configuration)

and Configuration)
A restart with the machine configuration is carried out after a gauge conversion
or after attaching special attachments.

Carry out restart with machine configuration:

 The machine is switched off.
1. To switch on the machine, set the main switch to 1.
 The "BootOkc" window is displayed on the touch screen.
BootOkc window

"BootOkc" window

2. For the automatic warm start within the waiting time tap on the "Restart
and Configuration" key.
 The Restart Process gets started.
After the process is shut, the "Language" window is displayed.
3. Select the dialog language and confirm the selection.
4. Proceed to the next window.
 The "Machine configuration" window is displayed. The data have been
set at the factory and will not be changed.
5. Proceed to the next window.
 The "Machine configuration 2" window is displayed. The data have
been set at the factory and will not be changed.
6. Proceed to the next window.
 The "Machine Options" window is displayed. The data is set at the
factory.

Machine fault!
The presence or lack of machine options must correctly be
specified, as otherwise a fault may occur on the machine.
Always specify the machine options correctly.

454
 Software - Installation and basic settings 8

Installing the Stoll operating system

7. If necessary, change the data and confirm the changes.

8. Proceed to the next window.
 The "Machine Parameter" window is displayed. The data is set at the
factory.
9. If necessary, change the data and confirm the changes.
10. Proceed to the next window.
 The "Needle bed parameters" window is displayed. The data is set at
the factory.
11. If necessary, change the data and confirm the changes.
12. Proceed to the next window.
 The "NPK-Values" window is displayed. The data is set at the factory.
13. If other NPK values are to be used, change the values and confirm the
changes.
14. Proceed to the next window.
 The "Knit Report Configuration" window is displayed.
15. If other settings are to be used, change the settings and confirm the
changes. Use the "additional function keys" to activate/deactivate the
running time control and/or running time measurement.
16. Proceed to the next window.
 The configuration is complete.
The "Reference runs" window is displayed.
17. Carry out reference run(s).
18. Proceed to the next window.
 The restart is complete and the "Main menu" is displayed.
The machine is ready to knit.

Further information:
 Setting touch screen [65]
 Setting machine parameters [178]
 Setting waiting time until warm start [424]
 Configure machine [425]
 Configuring network [426]
Setting online connection

455
8 Software - Installation and basic settings

Installing the Stoll operating system

8.4.6 Setting online connection

The knitting machine (s) and the STOLL pattern preparation unit can be
connected to an Ethernet connection.
Keys for setting online connection

Key Function

Switch on virtual keyboard

Confirm input

Continue on to the next window

Confirm selection

Keys for setting online connection

Setting online connection:

 The knitting machine is switched off.
1. To switch on the machine, set the main switch to 1.
 The "BootOkc" window is displayed on the touch screen.
BootOkc window

"BootOkc" window

2. For the automatic warm start within the waiting time tap on the "Restart
and Configuration" key.
 The Restart Process gets started.
After the process is shut, the "Language" window is displayed.

456
 Software - Installation and basic settings 8

Installing the Stoll operating system

3. Proceed to the next window.

 The "Machine configuration" window is displayed.
Machine configuration window

"Machine configuration" window

4. Tap in the "Online Id" field.

5. Enter the online ID of the knitting machine with the help of the virtual
keyboard.
6. Confirm input.
7. Advance till the "Main menu" appears.
 The restart is finished.

If network problems occur and these are impairing the

production, then the online ID can be set at 0 (switched off). In
the "Service/Basic settings" menu call up the window
"Machine-configuration" and alter the Online ID for this
purpose.
Overview of all system data

457
8 Software - Installation and basic settings

Installing the Stoll operating system

8.4.7 Overview of all system data

All important hardware and software data of the control are displayed in the
"System info" window.
System info window

"System info" window

Field Data shown

1 Stoll operating system (OS) that is loaded, the machine number,

machine type, gauge, yarn carrier type, etc.

2 "Memory" line: Display of the amount of memory this pattern

occupies

3 Hardware and software data

Network data
Keys for calling up the System info window

Key Function

Call up the "Service" window

Call up "Diagnostics" window

Call up the "System info" window

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for calling up the "System info" window

458
 Software - Installation and basic settings 8

Diagnose Control

Displaying System data:

1. In the "Main menu", tap on the "Service" key.
 The "Service" window is displayed.
2. Tap on the "Diagnostics" key.
 The "Diagnostics" window is displayed.
3. Tap on the "System Info" key.
 The "System Info" window with all the important hardware and software
data of the control is displayed.
Diagnose Control

459
8 Software - Installation and basic settings

Diagnose Control

8.5 Diagnose Control

You can activate different diagnoses for service purposes and for
troubleshooting. The diagnoses protocol additional information in one log file
which can be analysed by the service technician or the helpline.
Diagnostic control window

"Diagnostic control" window

Field Data shown

1 Take-down system: Main take-down, auxiliary take-

down, comb take-down.

2 Main drive, racking, stop motions

3 Carriage position, step motor, needle selection

4 Clamping and cutting, holding-down jacks, 2nd stitch

tension, presser foot, pressure cam

5 Yarn Length Control

Copy All Logfiles Saving the data (logfiles)

Buttons for calling up the Diagnostic control window

Key Function

Call up the "Service" window

Call up "Diagnostics" window

Call up "Diagnostic control" window

Call up "Main menu"

Buttons for calling up the "Diagnostic control" window

460
 Software - Installation and basic settings 8

Diagnose Control

Carry out diagnoses:

1. In the "Main menu", tap on the "Service" key.
 The "Service" window is displayed.
2. Tap on the "Diagnostics" key.
 The "Diagnostics" window is displayed.
3. Tap on the "Diagnostic control" key.
 The "Diagnostic control" window is displayed.
4. Tap the desired button. The diagnose is starting, you can see the work
progress in the message window.
5. If other diagnoses are needed, then tap the corresponding button.
6. When all diagnoses are generated, tap on the "Copy All Logfiles" key.
 The data (Logfiles) are saved on the selected data carrier. It will be saved
on the data carrier that is set in the "Copy service data" window.

Further information:
 Copying service data [182]

461
9 Yarns and stitch tension

Economic production and the influencing factors

9 Yarns and stitch tension

Yarns and stitch tension

Economic production and the influencing factors

9.1 Economic production and the influencing

factors
The requirements for a knitting machine can be divided into two main groups:
the machine related goals and the business goals.
The knitting machine is to work with maximum speed with every knitting mode,
every stitch tension, regardless of the yarn. Simultaneously a high productivity
is expected from the knitting machine and the pattern shall be knitted faultless.

The simultaneous achievement of all goals is seldom possible, as there is a

conflict between some goals. A conflict because they cannot be accomplished
all simultaneously. Between the individual goals there are rather interactions,
which can have negative effects on the accomplishment of other goals. In
other words, there are goals that cannot be achieved together or that exclude
each other.
Example:
One conflict exists between the yarn thickness, the stitch tension and the
carriage speed. If the intention is to work at the upper limit, the maximum with
all of the three goals, this will lead to a reduced running reliability of the pattern,
an increased wear and in some cases even to machine damages.

462
 Yarns and stitch tension 9

Stitch Tension Range

The influencing factors

Running reliability ◆ Structure of the pattern (knitting mode, Flexible
Gauge, ...)
◆ Carriage speed
◆ Stitch length (stitch tension)
◆ Yarn quality (friction coefficient, elasticity,
twisting, moisture, hairiness , bobbin setup,
tensile strength)
◆ Yarn gauge, yarn count/twisted yarn
◆ Yarn type (fancy yarn)
◆ Yarn tension, yarn feeding
◆ Fabric take-down

Wear and machine The unsuitable combination of the influencing factors

damages may lead to increased wear and to the damage of
machine parts.

Conclusion Therefore the influencing factors have to be adjusted.

It's not possible to achieve any carriage speed and stitch

tension with every yarn and knitting pattern.
Recommendation: Start with a lower carriage speed (e.g.
0.7 m/sec) and increase it step by step.

Defective machine parts caused by disregarding our

guidelines, are excluded from warranty.
Stitch Tension Range

463
9 Yarns and stitch tension

Stitch Tension Range

9.2 Stitch Tension Range

Stitch Tension Range 5xx

The tension ranges for knitting and splitting differ. The reason for this is the
shape of the split-stitch piece. The information in the table show the minimum
and maximum NP values.

Valid for:

CMS 933

CMS 822
CMS 530

CMS 520

CMS ADF-3
Stitch Tension Range

min. NP max. NP min. NP (Split) max. NP (Split)

E3 7.0 16.7 8.2 15.6

E 3,5 7.0 16.7 8.2 15.6

E4 7.0 16.7 8.2 15.6

E5 6.5 16.9 8.0 14.1

E7 8.3 18.7 9.8 15.9

E8 8.8 19.5 10.3 16.6

E 10 7.25 19.2 9.3 17.65

E 12 7.55 20.0 8.4 16.2

E 14 7.95 20.7 8.8 16.85

E 16 7.6 21.9 8.9 17.85

E 18 7.6 21.9 8.9 17.85

E 5.2 7.8 17.5 9.0 14.7

E 6.2 7.55 20.0 8.4 16.2

E 7.2 7.95 20.7 8.8 16.85

E 8.2 8.0 22.3 9.3 18.25

E 9.2 8.0 22.3 9.3 18.25

E 2,5.2 6.5 16.9 8.0 14.1

E 2,5.2 6.5 16.9 8.0 16.15

m.4L

E 3,5.2 8.3 18.7 9.8 15.9

E 3,5.2 8.3 18.7 9.8 17.95

m.4L
Stitch Tension Range

Further information:
Economic production and the influencing factors [462]

464
 Yarns and stitch tension 9

Stitch lengths

Stitch Tension Range TC-T

Valid for:

CMS 830 C

CMS 730 T

CMS 530 T

CMS 520 C

CMS 502
Stitch Tension Range

min. NP max. NP min. NP (Split) max. NP (Split)

E3 7.0 16.7 8.2 15.6

E 3 m.3L 7.0 16.7 8.2 15.6

E 3,5 7.0 16.7 8.2 15.6

E4 7.0 16.7 8.2 15.6

E5 6.5 16.9 8.0 14.1

E7 8.3 18.7 9.8 15.9

E8 8.8 19.5 10.3 16.6

E 10 7.4 21.5 9.4 17.7

E 12 7.7 21.5 9.4 15.1

E 14 8.1 22.3 9.8 15.5

E 16 8.1 22.5 9.5 15.2

E 18 8.1 22.5 9.5 15.2

E 5.2 7.8 17.5 9.0 14.7

E 6.2 7.7 21.5 9.4 15.1

E 7.2 8.1 22.3 9.8 15.5

E 8.2 8.1 22.5 9.5 15.2

E 9.2 8.1 22.4 9.5 15.5

E 2,5.2 6.5 16.9 8.0 14.1

E 2,5.2 6.5 16.9 8.0 16.15

m.4L

E 3,5.2 8.3 18.7 9.8 15.9

E 3,5.2 8.3 18.7 9.8 17.95

m.4L
Stitch Tension Range

Further information:
 Economic production and the influencing factors [462]
Stitch lengths

465
9 Yarns and stitch tension

Stitch lengths

9.3 Stitch lengths

The specified values serve as a guideline. Depending on the yarn, these
values may differ, as the quality and the specific weight of the material
influence the stitch length.
Fragment

Stitch length - yarn consumption per stitch (mm) with R/L fabric (Table 1)

NP E3 E 3.5 E4 E5 E7 E8 E 10 E 10 E 12
(1) (2)

6.5 6.26

7.0 7.67 5.90 7.03 6.96 1.83

7.5 9.25 7.40 8.48 7.52 2.15 2.20

8.0 10.83 8.90 9.93 8.22 2.85 2.80 2.85

8.5 12.42 10.40 11.38 8.92 4.66 3.56 3.60 3.38

9.0 14.00 11.90 12.83 9.48 5.46 3.58 4.26 4.20 3.91

9.5 15.85 13.40 14.28 10.18 6.10 4.30 4.97 4.80 4.45

10.0 17.17 14.90 15.73 10.88 6.90 5.20 5.67 5.60 4.98

10.5 18.75 16.40 17.18 11.44 7.70 5.92 6.38 6.20 5.51

11.0 20.33 17.90 18.63 12.14 8.34 6.82 7.00 7.00 6.05

11.5 21.92 19.40 20.08 12.84 9.14 7.54 7.71 7.60 6.58

12.0 23.50 20.90 21.53 13.40 9.94 8.44 8.41 8.40 7.11

12.5 25.08 22.40 22.98 14.10 10.58 9.34 9.12 9.00 7.65

13.0 26.67 23.90 24.43 14.80 11.38 10.06 9.82 9.80 8.18

13.5 28.25 25.40 25.88 15.36 12.18 10.96 10.53 10.40 8.71

14.0 29.83 26.90 27.33 16.06 12.82 11.68 11.23 11.00 9.25

14.5 31.42 28.40 28.78 16.76 13.62 12.58 11.94 11.80 9.78

15.0 33.00 29.90 30.23 17.32 14.26 13.30 12.57 12.40 10.31

Stitch length - yarn consumption per stitch (mm) with R/L fabric (Table 1)

(1) CMS 933, CMS 822, CMS 530, CMS 520, CMS ADF-3
(2) CMS 830 C, CMS 730 T, CMS 530 T, CMS 520 C, CMS 502

466
 Yarns and stitch tension 9

Stitch lengths

Stitch length - yarn consumption per stitch (mm) with R/L fabric (Table 2)

NP E 14 E 16 E 18 E E 2,5.2 E 2,5.2 E 3 E E
2,5.2 m.4L (3) m.3L 3,5.2 3,5.2
m.4L

6.5 6.26 5.29 10.55 5.48

7.0 6.96 6.06 4.36 10.55 5.48

7.5 7.52 6.91 5.71 11.80 5.48

8.0 1.88 8.22 7.68 7.06 13.05 4.97 5.48

8.5 2.58 2.16 1.86 8.92 8.45 8.41 14.30 5.30 5.84

9.0 3.13 2.51 2.21 9.48 9.30 9.76 15.55 6.13 6.63

9.5 3.68 2.86 2.56 10.18 10.07 11.11 16.80 6.80 7.42

10.0 4.23 3.21 2.91 10.88 10.84 12.46 18.05 7.63 8.30

10.5 4.78 3.56 3.26 11.44 11.69 13.81 19.30 8.47 9.09

11.0 5.33 3.91 3.61 12.14 12.46 15.16 20.55 9.13 9.88

11.5 5.88 4.26 3.96 12.84 13.23 16.51 21.80 9.97 10.76

12.0 6.43 4.61 4.31 13.40 14.08 17.86 23.05 10.80 11.56

12.5 6.98 4.96 4.66 14.10 14.85 19.21 24.30 11.47 12.35

13.0 7.53 5.31 5.01 14.80 15.62 20.56 25.55 12.30 13.23

13.5 8.08 5.66 5.36 15.36 16.47 21.91 26.80 13.13 14.02

14.0 8.63 6.01 5.71 16.06 17.24 23.26 28.05 13.97 14.81

14.5 9.18 6.36 6.06 16.76 18.01 24.61 29.30 14.80 15.69

15.0 9.73 6.71 6.41 17.32 18.86 25.96 30.55 15.47 16.48

Stitch length - yarn consumption per stitch (mm) with R/L fabric (Table 2)

(3) CMS 830 C

467
9 Yarns and stitch tension

Yarn table

Stitch length - yarn consumption per stitch (mm) with R/L fabric (Table 3)

NP E 5.2 E 6.2 E 6.2 E 7.2 E 7.2 E 8.2 E 9.2

(knit and (knit and
wear) (4) wear) (5)

6.5

7.0

7.5 3.54 2.14 1.77

8.0 3.86 2.47 2.07 2.14 1.58 1.57 1.61

8.5 4.66 3.02 2.57 2.58 1.99 1.91 1.91

9.0 5.46 3.57 3.08 3.13 2.49 2.33 2.30

9.5 6.26 4.12 3.58 3.68 3.00 2.75 2.68

10.0 7.06 4.67 4.08 4.23 3.50 3.18 3.06

10.5 7.86 5.22 4.58 4.78 4.01 3.60 3.45

11.0 8.66 5.77 5.08 5.33 4.51 4.02 3.83

11.5 9.46 6.32 5.58 5.88 5.02 4.45 4.21

12.0 10.26 6.87 6.09 6.43 5.52 4.87 4.60

12.5 11.06 7.42 6.59 6.98 6.03 5.29 4.98

13.0 11.86 7.97 7.09 7.53 6.53 5.72 5.36

13.5 12.66 8.52 7.59 8.08 7.04 6.14 5.75

14.0 13.46 9.07 8.09 8.63 7.54 6.56 6.13

14.5 14.26 9.62 8.59 9.18 8.05 6.99 6.51

15.0 15.06 10.17 9.10 9.73 8.55 7.41 6.90

Stitch length - yarn consumption per stitch (mm) with R/L fabric (Table 3)

(4) CMS 822

(5) CMS 530, CMS 822, CMS ADF-3

Further information:
 Economic production and the influencing factors [462]
Yarn table

468
 Yarns and stitch tension 9

Yarn table

9.4 Yarn table

The specified values serve as a guideline. The quality and the specific weight
of a yarn must also be taken into account. Instead of a simple yarn, we
recommend twisted yarn. With coarser machines it is advisable to use several
twisted threads.
Yarn table -1 Allocation of machine gauge and yarn thickness (Table 1)

Gauge assembled processing [Nm] Final count [Nm]

Yarn thickness of the

Several fine threads are assembled
assembled threads
and fed as a thick yarn to the yarn
Example: 6 x 16/2
carrier.
16/2=8
8:6=1,33

2 6 x 16/2 1,2 - 1,4

2.5 6 x 18/2 1,3 - 1,6

3 5 x 18/2 1-2

3 m.3L 15 x 20/2 0,65 - 1

3.5 6 x 24/2 1,4 - 2,5

4 5 x 24/2 1,4 - 3

6 x 34/2

5 4 x 24/2 3 - 4,5

4 x 34/2

7 2 x 22/2 4,5 - 7

2 x 28/2

8 2 x 24/2 6-8
2 x 34/2

10 2 x 36/2 8 - 12

1 x 24/2

12 1 x 24/2 10 - 18

2 x 44/2

14 1 x 28/2 14 - 20

2 x 40/1

Yarn table - Allocation of machine gauge and yarn thickness (Table 1)

Further information:
 Economic production and the influencing factors [462]

469
9 Yarns and stitch tension

Yarn table

Yarn table -2 Allocation of machine gauge and yarn thickness (Table 2)

Gauge assembled processing [Nm] Final count [Nm]

16 1 x 48/2 20 - 30

1 x 54/2

1 x 60/2

18 1 x 54/2 20 - 40

1 x 60/2

1 x 80/2

20 1 x 80/2 20 - 40

2,5.2 3 x 28/2 3 - 4,5

(all needles) 2 x 14/2

2,5.2 m.4L All needles: 3 x 28/2 Nm 3 – 4,5

Every 2nd needle: 8 x 28/2 Nm 1,3 - 2

Every 2nd needle with cast-off 1,1

technique: maximum13 x 28/2
Nm

2,5.2 (CMS 830 C) 3 x 14/2 1-2

(each 2nd needle) 6 x 14/2

2,5.2 3 x 14/2 1,3 - 2

(each 2nd needle) 4 x 14/2

3,5.2 2 x 28/2 4,5 - 7

(all needles) 3 x 28/2

3,5.2 3 x 14/2 1,5 - 2,5

(each 2nd needle) 7 x 28/2

3,5.2 m.4L All needles: 3 x 28/2 Nm 4,5 – 7

Every 2nd needle: 7 x 28/2 Nm 1,5 – 2,5

Every 2nd needle with cast-off 1,5

technique: maximum9 x 28/2 Nm

Yarn table - Allocation of machine gauge and yarn thickness (Table 2)

Further information:
 Economic production and the influencing factors [462]

470
 Yarns and stitch tension 9

Yarn table

Yarn table -3 Allocation of machine gauge and yarn thickness (Table 3)

Gauge assembled processing Final count [Nm]

[Nm]

5.2 1 x 20/2 8 - 12

(all needles) 2 x 28/2

5.2 3 x 28/2 3 - 4,5

(each 2nd needle) 4 x 28/2

6.2 2 x 44/2 10 - 16

(all needles) 1 x 28/2

6.2 2 x 28/2 4,5 - 7

(each 2nd needle) 3 x 28/2

7.2 1 x 28/2 14 - 20

(all needles) 1 x 30/2

7.2 2 x 28/2 6-8

(each 2nd needle) 2 x 30/2

8.2 1 x 50/2 15 - 25

(all needles) 2 x 60/2

8.2 2 x 50/2 10 - 12

(each 2nd needle) 3 x 60/2

9.2 1 x 40/2 20 - 30

(all needles) 1 x 60/2

9.2 2 x 40/2 10 - 16

(each 2nd needle) 2 x 44/2

2 x 60/2

3 x 60/2

Yarn table - Allocation of machine gauge and yarn thickness (Table 3)

Further information:
 Economic production and the influencing factors [462]
Knitting technique
Knitting technique information

information Gauge Explanation

2,5.2 and 3,5.2 (knit If an extreme yarn (non-elastic and/or very thick) is used, it
and wear) should not be knitted too loosely (in the upper NP area), as
there is a danger of wear of the cams and needle bed.

Knitting technique information

Further information:
 Economic production and the influencing factors [462]

471
9 Yarns and stitch tension

Conversion table

Conversion table

9.5 Conversion table

The following table is used for the
conversion of one yarn gauge to another.
The named yarn gauges mean:

TEX (Tt)
Grams per kilometer

COTTON (NeC)
Number of strands at 840 yds. per lb.

WORSTED (NeW)
Number of strands at 560 yds. per lb.

METRIC (Nm)
Meters per gram

DENIER (den)
Grams per 9000 meters

DECITEX (dtex)
Grams per 10000 meters

Due to the great variety of natural and

synthetic fibers, it must be noted that yarns
with a low specific weight are often more
voluminous than yarns with a high specific
weight. Therefore, the relationship dtex /
den / Nm does not necessarily correspond
to the conversion result.

472
 10

10 Empty chapter
CMS 822 - Operating modes and particularities

473
11 Machine Management Tools

Machine Management Tools window

11 Machine Management Tools

Machine Management Tools

In our world the fast exchange of information has achieved a high level of
significance. In order that the knitting machines lives up to the growing
requirements, a series of auxiliary tools in the software have been taken up
with the control OKC that can prove to be more efficient while working with the
knitting machine and they are referred under the "Machine Management
Tools" term comprehensively.
This chapter contains information on:
 Machine Management Tools window [475]
 Display the virtual keyboard [476]
 Remote control with the software VNC [477]
 Send email directly from the machine [485]
Machine Management Tools window

474
 Machine Management Tools 11

Machine Management Tools window

11.1 Machine Management Tools window

Machine Management Tools window

"Machine Management Tools" window

1 Opens the "VNC Properties (Service-Mode)" window for configuration of the

remote control VNC.
2 Opens the "Send email" window to send the emails directly from the machine.
3 A virtual keyboard opens.
Keys for calling up the machine management tools

Key Function

Call up the "Service" window

Call up "Diagnostics" window

Call up "Machine Management Tools" window

Keys for calling up the machine management tools

Call up machine management tools:

1. In the "Main menu", tap on the "Service" key.
2. In "Service" window, tap on "Diagnostics" key.
3. In "Diagnostics" window, tap on the "Machine Management Tools" key.
 The "Machine Management Tools" window opens.
4. Call up the desired machine management tools.
In the following sections is described how to set up the different tools and how
to use them.

Further information:
 Display the virtual keyboard [476]
 Remote control with the software VNC [477]
 Send email directly from the machine [485]

475
11 Machine Management Tools

Display the virtual keyboard

11.2 Display the virtual keyboard

Display the virtual keyboard

For inputs that are not integrated in the user interface, an external keyboard
or a virtual keyboard is required.
Display the virtual keyboard
Keys for calling up Send email window

Key Function

Call up the "Service" window

Call up "Diagnostics" window

Call up "Machine Management Tools" window

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for calling up "Send email" window

1. Call up the "Service" window.

2. Call up "Diagnosis" window.
3. Call up "Machine Management Tools" window.
4. Tap on the "Virtual keyboard" switch.
 The virtual keyboard is open.
Virtual keyboard

Virtual keyboard

With the virtual keyboard you can make inputs as if an external keyboard has
been connected.
You can find information for usage of the virtual keyboard in the"Help" menu.
Tips for working with the virtual keyboard:
 A locked key (e. g. alt) must be activated finally again to achieve a double
key function.
 Various key layouts can be selected ("Keyboard" menu).
Remote control with the software VNC

476
 Machine Management Tools 11

Remote control with the software VNC

11.3 Remote control with the software VNC

You can use the remote control VNC to control a networked machine (VNC
Server) by a remote computer (VNC client) as if you were standing in front of
the machine and entering data via the touch screen.
Requirements:
 Network
 Networked and correctly configured ready-to-use machine
 Computer that serves as a client, is also networked (e.g. a note-book)
 Software VNC Viewer for the client
 Software for the client:
VNC Viewer or the Java Runtime Engine from Sun Microsystems Inc.
The VNC Viewer software for the client can for e.g. be obtained from the
following manufacturer websites:
 www.realvnc.com
 www.tightvnc.com
 www.ultravnc.sourceforge.net
The Java Runtime Engine for the client can be obtained from the manufacturer
website www.java.com.
In the following sections is described how to activate and use the remote
control VNC:
 Activating the remote control VNC on the machine [478]
 Configuring the remote control VNC on the machine [479]
 Determine the IP address of the machine [480]
 Installing software VNC Viewer on the computer (e.g. a note-book) [480]
 Remote control with the VNC Viewer [481]
 Remote control via a web browser [483]
Activating the remote control VNC on the machine

477
11 Machine Management Tools

Remote control with the software VNC

11.3.1 Activating the remote control VNC on the machine

The remote control VNC is deactivated on the knitting machine by default.
Keys to activate the remote control VNC on the machine

Key Function

Call up the "Service" window

Call up "Diagnostics" window

Call up "Machine Management Tools" window

Call up "Additional function keys"

Activate/deactivate "Remote control VNC"

Call up "Main menu"

Keys to activate the remote control VNC on the machine

1. Call up the "Service" window.

2. Call up "Diagnosis" window.
3. Call up "Machine Management Tools" window.
4. Call up "Additional function keys".
5. Tap on "Remote control VNC" key.
 The activation of the remote control VNC gets is acknowledged by a
message.
Configuring the remote control VNC on the machine

478
 Machine Management Tools 11

Remote control with the software VNC

11.3.2 Configuring the remote control VNC on the machine

 The remote control VNC is activated on the machine.
 The "Machine Management Tools" window is displayed.
1. Tap on the "Remote operation - settings" switch.
 The "VNC Server Properties (service mode)" window opens with
different tabs.
VNC Server Properties (service mode) window with the Connections tab

"VNC Server Properties (service mode)" window with the "Connections" tab

2. Activate "Connections" tab.

Here all the fields are set to their default values.
3. Should another port be activated as the standard port5900 the number of
the port is to be entered in the "Accept connections on port:" field.
4. If the machine has to be controlled remote also via a web browser, activate
the check box "Serve Java viewer via HTTP on port:" and enter 5800 as
port.

Any other adjustments on the various tabs are not necessary.

The value in the "Disconnect idle clients after (seconds):" field

causes the automatic disconnection of a VNC connection when
the value entered here is exceeded and within the mentioned
time no operation is carried out. Thereafter, the connection can
be established again without any problem. By default one hour
= 3600 seconds is adjusted.

479
11 Machine Management Tools

Remote control with the software VNC

11.3.3 Determine the IP address of the machine

Determine the IP address of the machine

Keys for determining the IP address of the machine

Key Function

Call up the "Service" window

Call up "Diagnostics" window

Call up the "System info" window

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for determining the IP address of the machine

 The main menu is displayed.

1. In the "Main menu", tap on the "Service" key.
2. In "Service" window, tap on "Diagnostics" key.
3. In "Diagnostics" window, tap on the "System Info" key.
 The "System Info" window opens.
System info window

"System info" window

4. Note IP address (2) and host name (1).

Installing software VNC Viewer on the computer (e.g. a note-book)

11.3.4 Installing software VNC Viewer on the computer (e.g. a

note-book)
 The software VNC Viewer was obtained from the internet.
1. Start installation program.
2. Follow instructions of the installation program.
 Thereafter the software VNC Viewer is installed on the computer.
Remote control with the VNC Viewer

480
 Machine Management Tools 11

Remote control with the software VNC

11.3.5 Remote control with the VNC Viewer

1. Start the software VNC Viewer on the computer.
 The "VNC Viewer: Connecting Details" window opens.
VNC Viewer: Connection Details window

"VNC Viewer: Connection Details" window

2. Enter the noted IP address of the machine in the "Server" field.

When your network makes the Naming Service available,

instead of the IP address the host name can also be entered.
If another port as 5900 was entered during configuration of the
remote control VNC on the machine, the port must be entered
along with e. g. 172.17.12.54:5903.

3. In order to configure the software VNC Viewer when needed, click on the
"Options" button.
 The "VNC Viewer Options" window opens.
VNC Viewer Options window, Colour & Encoding tab

"VNC Viewer Options" window, "Colour & Encoding" tab

4. In order that all colors are displayed, activate the "Full (all available
colours)" option on the "Colour & encoding" tab under "Colour level".
5. In order to make a small square visible as the mouse pointer alternative,
deactivate the "Render cursor locally" check box on the "Misc" tab.
6. To save the option adjustments, click on the "Save" button on the "Load /
Save" tab under "Defaults".

You can find continuative instructions for configuration of VNC

in the documentation of VNC.

7. Click on the "OK" button.

 The "VNC Viewer: Connection Details" window opens.

481
11 Machine Management Tools

Remote control with the software VNC

8. Click on the "OK" button.

 Now the user interface of the selected machine gets displayed.
Display of the user interface of the machine

Fig. 348: Display of the user interface of the machine

9. Operate the machine now from this window.

The machine can be operated simultaneously through the user

interface of the machine or through the computer (VNC Client).

Further information:
 Configuring the remote control VNC on the machine [479]
Remote control via a web browser

482
 Machine Management Tools 11

Remote control with the software VNC

11.3.6 Remote control via a web browser

When the Java Runtime Engine from Sun Microsystems Inc. is installed on the
controlling computer (client), the access to a machine can be also be done
through the web browser without the software VNC Viewer being installed.
By default the port 5800 is adjusted for this access on the VNC server on the
machine and is activated in the server adjustment under Serve Java Viewer.

Start remote control:

1. Start web browser e.g. the Internet Explorer.
2. Enter the following address as URL: http://<IP address of the
machine>:5800
 A Java applet is run which is obtained as a alternative for the software
VNC Viewer from VNC Server (machine).
Then the web browser appears as follows:
Web browser with the Java applet from VNC

Web browser with the Java applet from VNC

3. Above opens the window "VNC Viewer: Connection Details".

The IP address is entered automatically.
VNC Viewer: Connection Details window

"VNC Viewer: Connection Details" window

483
11 Machine Management Tools

Remote control with the software VNC

4. Click on "Options".
 The "VNC Viewer: Connection Details" window opens.
VNC Viewer: Connection Details window

"VNC Viewer: Connection Details" window

5. In order that all colors are displayed, activate the "Full (all available
colours)" option on the "Encoding and Colour Level:".
6. In order to activate the mouse pointer alternative, deactivate the "View
only (ignore mouse & keyboard)" check box under "Inputs".
7. Click "OK".
 The user interface of the machine is opened in the web browser and can
now be operated from here.
Display of user interface of the machine in the Java applet window

Fig. 352: Display of user interface of the machine in the "Java applet" window

The machine can be operated through the user interface of the

machine or in the "Java applet" window simultaneously.

484
 Machine Management Tools 11

Send email directly from the machine

11.4 Send email directly from the machine

Send email directly from the machine

In the "Send email" window emails can be written and sent directly from the
machine.
For this purpose the machine must be connected to the internet or to a network
with a mail server. Call up your network administrator in order to install this
function.
Call up Send email window
Keys for calling up Send email window

Key Function

Call up the "Service" window

Call up "Diagnostics" window

Call up "Machine Management Tools" window

Call up "Send email" window

Call up "Main menu"

Keys for calling up "Send email" window

1. Call up the "Service" window.

2. Call up "Diagnosis" window.
3. Call up "Machine Management Tools" window.
4. The "Send email" window opens.
 The "Send email" window opens.
Send email window on the machine

"Send email" window on the machine

485
11 Machine Management Tools

Send email directly from the machine

Entries in the Send email window

Inputs Explanation

"Delete all entries" key

(except the entry in the "from" field).

"Send email" key.

From Sender of message.

The machine name is entered here as a sender as
standard.
If you are expecting an answer to the email, enter a
valid email address here as the machine cannot
receive any emails.

To addressee of message.
Several addressee names are to be separated by a
semicolon (;).

Subject Subject of the message.

Field for entering message text.

Mail attachment

"Unzipped" key:
In the "File name" field, displayed files are attached
unzipped to the message.

"Zipped" key:
The files which are displayed in the "File name" field
are zipped before they are attached to the message.

"Delete marked entry" key (in the "File name " field).

"Mail attachment" key:

Opens the "Mail attachment" window for selection of
files (for example bitmaps, log files, zip files) that can
be attached to the message. The file names are
displayed in the "File name" field subsequently.

File name Display of file (s) which are attached to the message.

Entries in the "Send email" window

486
 Machine Management Tools 11

Send email directly from the machine

Write email
Use the virtual keyboard for input.

1. Enter a sender address in the "from" field.

If you are expecting an answer to the email, enter a valid email

address here as the machine cannot receive any emails.

2. In the "To" field, enter the email address of the receiver.

Several addressee names are to be separated by a semicolon (;).
3. In the "Subject" field, enter the subject of the message.
4. In the field below the "Subject" field, enter the content of the message.

With the "Delete all inputs" key, you can delete the inputs in all
the fields of the "Send email" window (except the entry in the
"from" field).

Attach files to the email You can attach any files to an email which are sent with the message. In order
to reduce the size of the file, the files to be attached can be zipped
(compressed).
1. Tap on "Mail attachment" key.
 The "Mail attachment" window opens.
Mail attachment window

"Mail attachment" window

2. In "Mail attachment" window, select the file that has to be attached.

3. Confirm selection.
 The file is displayed in the "File name" field.
4. If additional files are to be attached, repeat the steps 1 to 3.
5. If the files in the "File name" field are to be attached zipped to the email,
tap on "Zipped" key.
- or -
➜ If the files in the "File name" field are to be attached unzipped to the email,
tap on "Unzipped" key.

In order to remove a file from the "File name" field, mark this file
and then tap on the "Delete marked entry" key.

487
11 Machine Management Tools

Send email directly from the machine

Send email  Sender and receiver addresses have been entered correctly.
 The message is entered.
 The email attachments are selected.
➜ Tap on "Send email" key.
 The email is sent with the attachments.

488
 Key word directory

Key word directory

Key word directory

A
Additional needle bed
Repair, 367
Adjusting
Adjust the belt take-down values, 136
Brushes of the central lubrication, 203
Carriage speed, 111
Fabric take-down, 135
Fabric take-down (control), 137,174
Fabric take-down menu (WBF), 139,143
Float slider (opening angle), 219
Friction feed wheel, 131
Horn, 174
Intarsia yarn carrier (type 1), 204
Intarsia yarn carrier (type 2), 205
Knitting areas (SEN), 134
Needle brushes, 194
Needle detector, 200
Plating yarn carrier, 226
Sensor mechanism, 174
Shape counters, 146
Stopping point of an intarsia yarn carrier, 207,218
Yarn carrier, 118,201
Yarn carrier guide, 203
Yarn carrier limiters, 202
Yarn carriers staggering, 126
Yarn tension, 129
Aggregates
Switching on and off, 169
Auxiliary take-down, 42

B
Backup copy, 254
Basic Settings, 423
Battery card, 397,400,403
Boot process, 419
Brushes (central lubrication)
Adjusting, 203

489
Key word directory

C
Carriage assembly, 32
Coupling wide or narrow (CMS 822), 195
Carriage part
Assembling, 379
Removing, 374
Carriage speed
Economic production and the influencing factors, 462
Following machine stop, 178
Outside SEN area (MSECOS), 178
With open safety doors, 178
With small knots, 174
Carriage Speed, 111
Catch hook, 29
Central lubrication, 33
Deaerating oil line, 394
Mounting and working position, 351
Setting, 329
Cleaning
Knitting machine, 316
Needle bed, 323
Cleaning row, 32
Setting, 169
Comb functions
Run manually, 138,163
Comb take-down, 43
Switching light barrier on and off, 174
Component type, 13
Computer viruses, 59,235
Conditional stop, 85
Configuring
Monitoring, 153
Toolbar, 151
Control devices, 37
Conversion table, 472
Copy Logfiles, 430
Copying
File, 254
Courses of yarn, 23

D
Date, 425
Dongle data
Save, 430

490
 Key word directory

E
Electronic card
Control cabinet, 397,400,403
Replacing, 407
Tasks, 397,400,403
E-mail, 485
Emergency switch-off switch, 45
End of work
Switch off knitting machine automatically, 87
Engaging Rod, 46
Error messages
Retrospective view, 109
Suppress, 111
Ethernet
Set Online ID, 456

F
Fabric sensors, 44
Switching on and off, 169
Fabric take-down, 41
Adjusting, 135
Adjusting control, 174
Auxiliary take-down, 42
Comb take-down, 43,174
Control devices, 44
Releasing main take-down during switch-off, 178
Remove fabric winding, 106
Winding plate, 44
Winding protection device, 44
Fault
Correcting stitch cam position (NPK), 192
Drop stitches, 194
Drop stitches (Intarsia), 219
Electronic cards, 397,400,403
Eliminate errors in the fabric, 101
Holes (Intarsia), 219
Intarsia yarn carrier - Adjust stopping point (basic setting, braking value), 207
Needle and coupling part, 355
Remove fabric winding around fabric take-down, 106
Removing cam plate, 382
Removing carriage part, 374
Removing step motor, 383
Replacing comb hook, 395
Replacing gear rack (step motor), 384
Replacing holding-down jack, 361
Replacing intermediate slider, 357
Replacing selection jack, 360
Save pattern after a big fault, 434,434
Start again after pressing off fabric, 101
Start machine, 107
Thread loop tears (Intarsia), 219
Threading-up thread into yarn carrier, 105
Wrong selection (needle selection displacement), 417,428
Feed wheel
Friction feed wheel, 27
Storage feed wheel MSF 3, 27,133
Switch on and off, 169
File
Copying, 254

491
Key word directory

Displaying in the pattern editor, 250

File Manager, 241
Load and save, 245
Loading, 59
Managing, 241
Float slider, 219
Fluff absorption, 32
Switching on and off, 169
Folder
Direct selection, 257
Load and save, 245
Loading, 59
Managing, 241
Setting path, 257
Friction feed wheel, 27
Adjusting, 131
Replacing the friction roller, 391,391
Replacing the position of the friction roller, 391
Function keys
Additional function keys, 55
Main menu, 52
Selection elements, 57
Standard function keys, 54
Standard input elements, 56
Virtual keyboard, 58
Fuses
Checking, 408

H
Hardware data, 458
Helpline address, 13
Holding-down jack, 35
Float slider (opening angle), 219
Replacing, 361
Horn
Switching on and off, 174

I
Impulse sensor, 37
Input unit, 49
Cleaning, 317
Screen brightness, 66
Setting, 65
Touch pen, 49
Intarsia yarn carrier, 30
Adjusting (type 1), 204
Adjusting (type 2), 205
Adjusting stopping point (braking value), 207
Check the pressure plates, 216
Correct stopping point (correction value), 218
Float slider (opening angle), 219
Mounting, 389
Normal yarn carrier type2, 222
Shifting, 206
Internet address, 13

492
 Key word directory

K
KnitLAN 269
Knitted structure 231
Knitting areas (SEN)
Adjusting 134
Knitting machine
Automatic switching off at end of work 87
Cleaning 316
Copying service data 182
Economic production and the influencing factors 462
Load the machine settings 430
Lubricating 327
Machine configuration 425
Machine data on the USB-Memory-Stick 432
Machine data sheet 182,233
Remote control with a web browser 483
Remote operation 477
Start after fault 107
Stitch length 466
Stitch tension range 464
Stop 85
Yarn table 469
Knitting mode
Economic production and the influencing factors 462
Knitting program
Apply shape counter 76
Check 260
Delete knitting memory 252
Enter number of courses 64
Enter piece number 64
Loading 59
Start 75
Knitting system 34
Knock-over wire 231

L
Language
Setting, 172
Setting (Startup), 182
Lateral yarn tensioner, 28
Library
Load and save, 245
Loading, 59
Lighting
Switching on and off, 148,169
Loading
File, 245
Knitting program, 59
Loss of data, 59,235
Loss of production, 59,235
Lubricants, 327
Lubricating interval (needle bed)
Restarting, 334
Setting, 328
Lubrication schedule, 327

493
Key word directory

M
Machine data
Copying service data, 182
Machine data sheet, 182,233
USB-Memory-Stick, 432
Machine main switch, 45
Machine Management Tools, 474
Call up, 475
Remote control VNC, 477
Machine parameters
Setting, 178
Main switch, 45
Switch-off process, 45
Main take-down, 41
Maintenance, 313
Message retrospective view, 109
Monitoring, 153
Motor type, 425

N
Needle bed
Clean thoroughly, 323
Needle bed parameters, 176
Removing, 364
Repair, 367
Structure, 39
Needle brushes
Adjusting, 194
Needle detector, 38
Adjusting, 200
Needle selection displacement, 417
Needle selection displacement
Entering data manually, 428
Network, 269
Configuring, 426
Network data, 458
Normal yarn carrier type 2, 222
Number of courses
Enter, 64

O
Online, 269
Set ID, 456
Operating data, 78,81
Operating system
Direct installation, 437
Direct/indirect installation, 436
Display the current version, 431
Display the previous version, 431
Indirect installation, 443
Order data, 99
Order menu, 96

494
 Key word directory

P
Pattern
Setting up, 157
Pattern editor
Displaying file, 250
Piece number
Enter, 64
Plating
Double bow yarn carrier, 226
Normal yarn carrier type2, 222
Plating yarn carrier, 31,222
Adjusting, 226
Power failure, 180
Power supply 40 V, 349
Power supply unit, 397,400,403
Production
Economic production and the influencing factors, 462
Measure running time, 94
Monitor running time, 89
Program test, 260

495
Key word directory

R
Racking
Racking basic correction VGK, 189
Racking correction, 165
Racking course, 39
Racking device, 39
Racking position correction VPK, 187
Raising cam, 34
Reference Run, 184
Remote control VNC
Activate, 478
Configure, 479
Determine IP-address, 480
Install software VNC Viewer, 480
Start and configure Viewer, 481
Web-Browser, 483
Removing
Cam plate, 382
Carriage part, 374
Needle bed, 364
Selection jack bed, 371
Step motor, 383
Replacing
Comb hook, 395
Drive belt (friction feed wheel), 391
Electronic card, 407
Friction roller (friction feed wheel), 391
Fuses, 408
Gear rack (Step motor), 384
Holding-down jack, 361
Intarsia yarn carrier, 389
Intermediate slider, 357
Knock-over wire, 231
Needle and coupling part, 355
Pressure plates (intarsia yarn carrier), 216
Selection jack, 360
Yarn carrier, 388
Yarn control unit, 391
Report, 78
Save, 78
Restart, 453
Restarting with the machine configuration, 454
Running reliability
Economic production and the influencing factors, 462
Running time
Measuring, 94
Monitoring, 89

496
 Key word directory

S
Screen brightness
Setting, 66
Selection jack bed
Removing, 371
Selection system, 34
Sensors
Adjusting, 174
Service data
Copying, 182
Machine data sheet, 182,233
Setting
Aggregates, 169
Carriage speed following machine stop, 178
Carriage speed with small knots, 174
Central lubrication, 329
Clamping depth of cutting needle, 169
Cleaning row, 169
Comb take-down (light barrier), 174
Counter, 148
Cycle counter, 145
Date, time and time zone, 425
Fabric take down (releasing during switch-off), 178
Fabric take-down values, 135
Input unit, 65
Language, 172
Lighting, 148
Lubricating interval (needle bed), 328
Machine parameters, 178
Monitoring, 153
Motor type, 425
Needle bed parameters, 176
Path, 257
Piece number, 145
Power failure (switch-off time), 180
Racking basic correction VGK, 189
Racking correction, 165
Racking position correction VPK, 187
Screen brightness, 66
Shock stop (piezo), 176
Stitch cam position (NPK), 192
Stitch tension, 114
Stop resistance, 174
Suction, 169
Toolbar, 151
Touch screen, 65
Value for releasing thread clamp, 150
Setup, 274
Setup1, 309
Setup2, 280
Shift counter, 81
Automatic shift change, 83
Shifting device (intarsia yarn carrier), 206
Shock stop, 38
Setting, 176
Signal light, 48
Sintral editor, 262
Software
Advanced adjustments (Enhanced Settings), 429

497
Key word directory

Basic Settings, 423

Configure network, 426
Diagnose Control, 460
Direct installation, 437
Direct/indirect installation, 436
Display current version, 431
Display history, 431
Display the previous version, 431
Error diagnosis with Copy Logfiles, 430
Indirect installation, 443
Load the machine settings, 430
Machine configuration, 425
Machine data on the USB-Memory-Stick, 432
Restart, 453
Restart with machine configuration, 454
Save dongle data, 430
Select boot source, 424
Set waiting time for warm start, 424
Update, 449
Software data, 458
Software VNC, 477
Install viewer, 480
Step motor, 36
Removing, 383
Replacing gear rack, 384
Stitch cam, 34
Correcting stitch cam position (NPK), 192
Stitch length, 466
Stitch tension
Economic production and the influencing factors, 462
Step motor, 36
Stitch tension range, 464
Stop resistance, 38
Setting, 174
Suction, 32
Summer time, winter time, 425
Switch-off process, 45
Symbols in this document, 14
System configuration, 458
System Control Unit (SCU), 419
System crash
Save pattern after a big fault, 434
System data, 458,460
System info, 458,460

498
 Key word directory

T
Thread clamp, 29,44
Releasing, 150
Thread clamping and cutting device, 29
Time, 425
Time zone, 425
Tips history, 109
Toolbar, 151
Touch pen, 49
Touch screen, 49
Cleaning, 317
Setting, 65
Touch pen, 49
Touch Screen
Screen brightness, 66
TP
Program test, 260
Type plate, 13

U
Update (software), 449
User Interface, 50
User profile, 272

V
Virtual keyboard, 58,476
Viruses, 59,235

W
warm start
Interrupt warm start, 419
Warmstart
Set waiting time for warm start, 424
Wear
Economic production and the influencing factors, 462
Minimizing, 314
Winding plate, 44
Winding protection device, 44
Worms, 59,235

499
Key word directory

Y
Yarn
Conversion table, 472
Courses of yarn, 23
Economic production and the influencing factors, 462
Threading up, 67
Yarn table, 469
Yarn carrier
Adjusting, 201
Adjusting guide, 203
Call up assignment, 67
Correction (tandem machine), 123
Intarsia yarn carrier, 30
Normal yarn carrier type2, 222
Plating yarn carrier, 31,222
Replacing, 388
Staggering, 126
Yarn carrier limiters
Adjusting, 202
Yarn control unit
Replacing, 391
Yarn deflector, 44
Yarn tension
Adjusting, 129
Yarn tensioner (side), 28

500
Key word directory

501